JBIMS Spectrum-2020
JBIMS Spectrum-2020
JBIMS Spectrum-2020
JBIMS
Spectrum
DISCLAIMER
The authors are solely responsible for the contents of the papers
compiled in this volume. The publishers or editors do not take any
responsibility for the same in any manner. Errors, if any, are purely
unintentional and readers are requested to communicate such errors
to the editors or publishers to avoid discrepancies in future.
Printed by
MUMBAI UNIVERSITY PRESS
Address: CST Road, Kalina, Santacruz East,
Mumbai, Maharashtra Phone No.: 022 2654
3000, Website: www.mu.ac.in
From the Editor’s Desk
With a view to foster innovation and research, JBIMS has taken yet
another leap forward with the Research Journal that will be published
twice a year. Driven by mission of quality education and research,
the Journal will attract the brightest of researchers and academicians
to share and contribute their research and experience. This research
journal aims to create greater collaboration and sharing of academic
understanding. The Institute seeks to provide excellence in
management education and research by way of this journal-JBIMS
Spectrum. The Journal aims to become a wealth of world-class
research and analysis across the entire spectrum of management
education. By way of our alliances, we hope to create a rich
compilation of management knowledge that will benefit our readers
which comprises industrial stalwarts, researchers, academicians and
the student fraternity.
The Editor
JBIMS Spectrum
Editorial Board
Dr. Kavita Laghate
Director
Jamnalal Bajaj Institute of Management Studies
University of Mumbai, Mumbai–400020
Dr. Srinivasan
Associate Professor
Jamnalal Bajaj Institute of Management Studies
University of Mumbai, Mumbai–400020
A. Abstract:
The Industry 4.0 has affected not only various industrial sectors, business, governance and the
people, but also education leading to Education 4.0. One of the unique characteristics of industry
4.0 and Education 4.0 is the application of Artificial Intelligence (AI). Personalisation of E-
learning systems is dominating Education 4.0 as learners have varying ambitions, background,
skills, intelligence and unique personalities. Education 4.0 is primarily shaped by AI, which
include AI based learning portal supporting teachers’ efforts, adaptive content delivery, integration
of certified resources with personalised learning on real time basis, greater institutional offering of
AI driven e-learning and E-tools on web pages. The key applications of AI in Education include
automation of routine activities, customisable smart content, immersive learning, and
identification of drivers of enhancing students’ performance, early warning signs of dropouts,
personalised learning, learning analytics, adaptive learning, intelligent chatbots and predictive
modelling. Personalised Adaptive Learning (PAL) is amalgamation of personalised learning and
adaptive learning. Personalised learning involves adapting of curriculum, learning and pedagogy
to measure up to customised needs to meet the needs and goals of learners. Adaptive learning
denotes the technologies tracking the learner’s progress, using data to amend learning path
dynamically. An exploratory study based on the secondary resources has been undertaken in this
research paper wherein Industry 4.0, Education 4.0, components of PAL, various AI techniques,
challenges and approaches to adopting AI in Education 4.0 are reviewed and analysed.
B. Key Words: Industry 4.0, Education 4.0, Artificial Intelligence, Personalised Learning,
Adaptive Learning, Personalised Adaptive Learning (PAL)
C. Introduction:
With rapid advances in technology, Technology Enhanced Learning (TEL) has moved to
classrooms and made a remarkable mark on Education. TEL has experienced four major changes
namely, e-learning, mobile learning, ubiquitous learning and smart learning (Adu & Poo, 2013).
C. Research Objectives:
The unique characteristic of industry 4.0 and Education 4.0 is the increasingly innovative
application of Artificial Intelligence. Development and advances of higher education are highly
dependent on technological progress, adoption of technology, computational capabilities and
intelligent machines. Exploratory research is known for its flexibility. When a problem considered
is broad and not narrowly defined, the researchers utilise exploratory research as a first step.
Exploratory studies are an important means of gaining basics, seeking new insights; and asking
questions and to assess phenomenon in a new light (Yin, 1994). Secondary research was
undertaken from books, journals, articles and online medium. The research objectives of this
exploratory study are given below: -
1. To study and track the paradigm shifts in Industrial Revolution and Education including
facets of Education 4.0.
The scope of exploratory study is organised in to five sections. The section E gives a brief
introduction of IR 1.0 to 4.0 and tracks the progress of Education 1.0 to 4.0 with reference o key
technologies. The section F examines various facets and trends of Education 4.0 with impact of
AI on Education 4.0. This is followed by description of PAL based on AI along with cores ideas
and a general framework for implementation. Next, section H briefly explain the various AI
techniques used in Education 4.0. Challenges, problems and issues faced in exploitation of AI
technology in Education 4.0 are presented in section I. Finally, the paper concludes the subject
topic in Section J.
Having tracked IRs, a quick review of Education 1.0 to Education 4.0 is very relevant and in the
context(Genkin et al., 2017). Education 1.0 was a one-way transmission process from teacher to
student. Students gathered at a physical place for absorption of information and resources. Mobility
of student across boundaries in Education 1.25, Open University (OU) model with emphasis on
student centred learning in Education 1.5 and Virtual Learning Environments (VLE)/ Learning
Management Systems (LMS) in Education 1.75 were significant milestones. Technologies of Web
2.0 were leveraged along with crowd contributed content (like Wikipedia) and Open Educational
Resources (OER) in Education 2.0. Blended learning/ flipped classrooms couple with arrival of
Massive Open Online Courses (MOOCs) marked Education 2.5. Education 3.0 met the demands
of technology society which was centred on self-learning by huge adoption of mobile devices and
web 3.0. Ubiquitous access of internet and curricula for employability were also hall marks.
Education 3.5 characterised cross institutional and cross-cultural educational opportunities by
social networking including breaking of traditional boundaries. The IR 4.0 has affected not only
various industrial sectors, the business, governance and the people, but also education leading to
Education 4.0. There are numerous companies, in response to IR 4.0, are restructuring their
One important technology underpinning 4th IR, which is gaining popularity and becoming
competent in tasks, which were perceived to be in sphere of human competence, is Artificial
Intelligence (AI)(Toby Walsh - Machines That Think_ The Future of Artificial Intelligence (2018,
Prometheus Books), n.d.). One of the unique characteristics of industry 4.0 and Education 4.0 is
the application of artificial intelligence(Ciolacu et al., 2019). Advances of higher education are
intertwined with technological progress and developments on computation capacities of intelligent
machines (Popenici & Kerr, 2017). IBM’s AI based Watson one such example. Present education,
Education 4.0 has seven facets which include personalisation of content, gamification, virtual
learning groups, adaptability based on previous knowledge and behaviour, Learning Analytics,
intelligent tutors and E-assessments (Ciolacu et al., 2017). Further, there are nine important trends
of Education 4.0(EJ1190812 - Education 4, n.d.). These trends include anywhere learning (self-
paced E-learning), personalised learning, learner’s choice of subjects, project-based learning,
hands on learning (field experiences), data interpretation with trends, adaptive assessment,
student’s role in design of curriculum and teacher’s role as facilitators. Importance of these trends
transfer the key learning responsibilities from the teachers to the learners. Teachers should not feel
threatened and assist the transition wholehearted instead. There are multiple strategies which are
crucial for creating a conducive learning environment and support students in developing their
communicative, collaborative and problem-solving skills through Social and Emotional Learning
in Education 4.0(Soffel, 2016).
Education 4.0 may be visualised Education 3.0 plus certain characteristics primarily shaped by AI,
which include AI based learning portal supports teachers efforts, adaptive content delivery,
integration of certified OERs with personalised learning on real time basis, greater institutional
offering of AI driven e-learning breaking all boundaries and AI driven E-tools on web pages(Cox
& Lowrie, 2015). Though there could be some hype with unrealistic expectations and inadequate
knowledge of the complex technologies, it is rational to believe that AI is currently galloping at an
accelerated speed and has profound effect on higher education (Popenici & Kerr, 2017). AI based
intelligent systems are highly relevant for education and are considered as a pillar of the TEL.
They affect various factors like motivational, cognitive, social and emotional aspects of
learning(Di et al., 2019).
AI is considered as a discipline dealing with the need to create and design machines with human
intelligence, though in different proportions for solving real world human tasks (Ikedinachi A. P.
WOGU et al., 2019). However, this thought of human-like competence by machines has inspired
and fuelled imaginations(Art & Goldie, 2016). AI based intelligent systems or tutors generate
learning outcomes for students as good as human tutors (vanLehn, 2011). It is also pertinent to
note that AI technology has played a critical role in popularization and multiple accomplishments
of platforms like Udacity, Coursera, edX, Wii, iversity, Stanford Online, and the rest in Massive
Open Online Courses (MOOC) Market(Ikedinachi A. P. WOGU et al., 2019) . At present, impact
of AI on education is mainly crafted and boutique. The key applications of AI in Education include
automation of routine activities in education like grading, use of chatbots for answering
The sense of personalised learning can be tracked to teaching students as per their aptitude by
Confucius and elicitation teaching of Socrates (Peng et al., 2019). PAL is amalgamation of
personalised learning and adaptive learning. Personalised learning is the adapting of curriculum,
learning and pedagogy to measure up to customised needs to meet the needs and goals of learners.
Learning objectives of course, instructional methods, content delivery including sequencing are
modified based on learner needs (Office of Ed Tech, 2017). The pedagogy of personalising
learning is learner-centred and meets specifically the learners who are vulnerable or not available
easily (Peng et al., 2019). It is a paradigm that promotes learners individual progress by
customising the learning process, for free and harmonious all-round development. Three main
common ideas are individual differences, personal needs and personal development(Peng et al.,
2019).
Adaptive learning denotes the technologies tracking the learners progress, using data to amend
instruction as per requirement(Horizon Report > 2017 Higher Education Edition, 2017).
Adaptive learning technologies facilitate dynamic adjusting of course content depending on the
learner’s abilities towards accelerating learning outcome (Pugliese, 2016). The heart of adaptive
learning strategies depends heavily on technology and data of learning outcome with continuous
update of learning path (Walters, 2014). Three main common ideas are individual differences,
individual performance, adaptive adjustment. Personalised learning has highest focus on personal
development compared adaptive learning. Combining the main ideas, proposed goals of
personalised and adaptive learning are individual characteristics, individual performance, personal
development, and adaptive adjustment (Peng et al., 2019). By utilising first three ideas of PAL
as X axis and two types of data decisions as Y axis, six parts of adaptive adjustment are depicted
in figure 2. The wavy line represents the approach of personalised adaptive learning(Peng et al.,
2019).
Adaptive Personalised Learning Environment (APLE) may consist of three major units namely,
Learner modelling Unit, Content Managing Unit and Learner Monitoring Unit(Raj & Renumol,
2018) and a block diagram is depicted in figure 3. Learner modelling Unit is instrumental in
creating Learner Model (LM) based on the attributes of the learner. Specific learner attributes
including learning style, preferences of mode of instruction delivery, and the level of knowledge
are considered. Learning style may utilise Felder Silverman Learning Style Model (FSLSM), as it
divides learners into diverse learning styles in four dimensions. CMU has two components, the
learning object manager which personalises the learning resources and content recommendation
engine. The Learner Monitoring Unit undertakes the assessment of present knowledge of the
learner and constantly monitors the dynamic changing preferences of the learner (Raj & Renumol,
2018).
Robots play a vital role in PAL. AI based teacher robots have applications in content delivery,
administrative part of teaching including administrative feedback. Professor robots are being
considered as a viable alternative for teaching assistants with who lack digital skills. Yuki, a robot
lecturer is being utilised in Germany since 2019 in delivering lectures at The Philipps University
of Marburg(Professor Robot – why AI could soon be teaching in university classrooms | World
Economic Forum, n.d.). Protus is an adaptive and intelligent web-based programming tutoring
system which is able to adapt to the interests and knowledge levels of learners. Protus provides
learners with learning material and activities that fit their learning styles [21]. Various
personalisation systems use permutation and combination of personalisation parameters (Essalmi
et al., 2010a) and are well documented. Table 2 presents an important review of personalisation
parameters and name of the E-learning systems employed(Essalmi et al., 2015) . Majority of the
systems use ‘Learner’s level of knowledge’ as an important personalization parameter.
Table 2. Personaisation parameters and various E-learning systems (Essalmi et al., 2015)
Having reviewed the various dimensions of PAL based on AI, it is important to have an
understanding of widely techniques and their applications. Bayesian networks, Fuzzy Logic (FL),
Decision tree, Neural Networks, Genetic algorithms and Hidden Markov Models are few of the
routinely used AI techniques in personalised learning systems(Khalid et al., 2017). A good and
easy way of classifying AI techniques could be white and black box models. White-box models as
the indicates, clearly indicate their behaviour, process, dependent and independent variables. This
enables the seeker to understand the features and process with greater clarity. Examples include
linear and decision/regression tree models. Diagonally opposite, the black-box models, do not
indicate any idea of the internal working but only reveal the fundamental aspects coupled with
extremely non-linear and opaque process (Khan et al, 2012). Boosting, deep-learning and random
As learning becomes more and more personalised and adaptive, human touch to the process of
teaching and learning may slowly lose its relevance and create critical weaknesses to control the
process effectively. Lack of human oversight in black box AI algorithms in learning can be
undesirable and may not explain the rationale behind acceptance or rejection of student. AI in the
initial stages of settling down, AI is like an infant, demanding more attention and care as AI lacks
awareness of right or wrong. Microsoft’s experiment with Tay ended when Tay was echoing racist
comments and formulating new offensive content (Vincent, 2016)
One of the main flaws in implementation of AI technology in Education 4.0 is that, instead of
addressing the present existing issues and problems faced by teachers, the institutes tend to
encourage and adopt new ways of teaching which may collide with standard traditional practices.
Further, certain new ways of teaching may be incorporated without rigorous assessment and
evaluation of claimed benefits. Ideas of restricting AI based teaching to only cognitive and routine
tasks, importance of human mentor is underestimated towards supporting the learning, socio-
emotional and creative perspectives of teaching, that are beyond mere knowledge dissemination
(UNESCO, 2019b) . The UNESCO Institute for Statistics (UIS) states the numerous hindrances in
collection and exploitation of educational data efficiently and effectively (UNESCO, 2019b).
Fixing the responsibility for undesirable actions in assessment or evaluation, likely loss of jobs in
Education and anxiety of AI driven innovations are few more challenges which need to be
addressed. The full potential of advances in technology towards transformation of education has
often been hyped, although it is believed that potential is yet to be harnessed as expected in
developed countries or developing countries (UNESCO, 2019a).
H. Conclusion:
Adaptive Personalized Learning based on AI is a key learning paradigm in Education 4.0 and
promises to enhance learning outcome in the era of educational transformations. Even though
learning is rapidly transforming in Education 4.0, still there is a lack of clarity about the consequent
evolution of learning process, role of teacher, 21st century job profiles and skills and how AI
technology would be adopted seamlessly without knee-jerk reactions by all stakeholders. The
current paper reviewed the progress of IR 1.0 to 4.0 along with transformations in Education 1.0
to 4.0. In particular, the paper aimed at attaining a two-fold objective. On one hand, it tracked the
paradigm shifts in Industrial Revolution and Education including Education 4.0. The paper
attempted, on the other hand, to identify the multiple applications of AI in Education 4.0 with
Adu, E. K., & Poo, D. C. C. (2013). Smart Learning : A New Paradigm of Learning in the Smart
Age 1.
AI is the new electricity. - Andrew Ng (Coursera) - YouTube. (n.d.).
https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=NQK4ZY_gwKI&feature=youtu.be&t=1m16s
Art, C., & Goldie, P. (2016). Who ’ s Afraid of Who ’ s Afraid.
ben Eubanks. (2019). PRAISE FOR ARTIFICIAL.
Ciolacu, M., Svasta, P. M., Berg, W., & Popp, H. (2017). Education 4.0 for tall thin engineer in a
data driven society. 2017 IEEE 23rd International Symposium for Design and Technology in
Electronic Packaging, SIITME 2017 - Proceedings, 2018-Janua, 432–437.
https://doi.org/10.1109/SIITME.2017.8259942
Ciolacu, M., Tehrani, A. F., Beer, R., & Popp, H. (2018). Education 4.0-Fostering student’s
performance with machine learning methods. 2017 IEEE 23rd International Symposium for
Design and Technology in Electronic Packaging, SIITME 2017 - Proceedings, 2018-Janua, 438–
443. https://doi.org/10.1109/SIITME.2017.8259941
Ciolacu, M., Tehrani, A. F., Binder, L., & Svasta, P. M. (2019). Education 4.0 - Artificial
Intelligence Assisted Higher Education: Early recognition System with Machine Learning to
support Students’ Success. 2018 IEEE 24th International Symposium for Design and Technology
in Electronic Packaging, SIITME 2018 - Proceedings, Ml, 23–30.
https://doi.org/10.1109/SIITME.2018.8599203
Cox, T., & Lowrie, K. (2015). From the Editors: From the Editors. Risk Analysis, 35(11), 1957–
1958. https://doi.org/10.1111/risa.12554
Di, T., Pierpaolo, M., Gennari, R., De, F., Rodríguez, S., & Temperini, M. (2019). Methodologies
and Intelligent Systems for Technology Enhanced Learning, 8th International Conference (Vol.
804). https://doi.org/10.1007/978-3-319-98872-6
EJ1190812 - Education 4. (n.d.).
Essalmi, F., Ayed, L. J. ben, Jemni, M., Graf, S., & Kinshuk. (2015). Generalized metrics for the
analysis of E-learning personalization strategies. Computers in Human Behavior, 48, 310–322.
https://doi.org/10.1016/j.chb.2014.12.050
Genkin, D., Valenta, L., & Yarom, Y. (2017). May the Fourth Be With You. 6(2), 845–858.
https://doi.org/10.1145/3133956.3134029
Riya Tendulkar
JBIMS, Mumbai
This report is prepared on the basis of primary and secondary data. This report is specific to Media
& Entertainment segment.
SYNOPSIS
The Digital wave has arised and hit every sector, business and person. It is right to say that apart
from BEING HUMAN, BEING Digital has become a necessity.
Indian M&E sector is at a digital crossroads today. Every segment of the industry, including
print, TV, radio, film, experiential marketing and OTT, is being impacted by digitisation, and
is showing growth, consolidation and innovation. It presents an excellent opportunity for
companies looking at establishing and expanding their presence in the country, and making the
most of the Indian digital growth story. Together with films, of which India is the biggest
producer by the number of titles annually, TV and print make up three-fifths of the current
industry revenue. Third in line being digital. OOH and radio having a share of less than 10%
each. With the fast growth of digital medium these shares are bound to change in the coming
years. Hence through this report the role of digital marketing in business growth has been
studied and the research is specific to Media and Entertainment segment. This report covers the
strategies used by Media houses, Production Houses, Agencies for business growth through
digital marketing.
INTRODUCTION
FIGURE 1
The Indian Media and Entertainment (M&E) industry is a sunrise sector for the economy and
is making high growth strides. Proving its resilience to the world, the Indian M&E industry is
on the cusp of a strong phase of growth, backed by rising consumer demand and improving
advertising revenues. The industry has been largely driven by increasing digitisation and higher
internet usage over the last decade. Internet has almost become a mainstream media for
entertainment for most of the people.
The Indian advertising industry is projected to be the second fastest growing advertising market
in Asia after China. At present, advertising revenue accounts for around 0.38 per cent of India’s
gross domestic product.
Market Dynamics
Indian media and entertainment (M&E) industry grew at a CAGR of 10.90 per cent from FY17-
18; and is expected to grow at a CAGR of 13.10 per cent to touch Rs 2,660.20 billion (US$
39.68 billion) by FY23 from Rs 1,436.00 billion (US$ 22.28 billion) in FY18. India's media
consumption has grown at a CAGR of 9 per cent during 2012-18, almost nine times that of US
and two times that of China. The industry provides employment to 3.5-4 million people,
including both direct and indirect employment in CY 2017.
India's online gaming industry is expected to grow at a CAGR of 22 per cent between FY18-23
to reach Rs 11,900 crore (US$ 1.68 billion) in FY23
India’s advertising revenue is projected to reach Rs 1,232.70 billion (US$ 18.39 billion) in
FY23 from Rs 608.30 billion (US$ 9.44 billion) in FY18.
Recent development/Investments
The Foreign Direct Investment (FDI) inflows in the Information and Broadcasting (I&B) sector
(including Print Media) in the period April 2000 – March 2019 stood at US$ 8.38 billion, as
per data released by Department for Promotion of Industry and Internal Trade (DPIIT).
Dailyhunt, a regional language news aggregator run by Verse Innovation Pvt Ltd, will receive
investment of US$ 60 million in a new funding round led by Goldman Sachs Investment
Partners.
As of September 2018, Twitter announced video content collaboration with 12 Indian partners
for video highlights and live streaming of sports, entertainment and news.
As of August 2018, PVR Ltd acquired SPI Cinema for worth US$ 94.42 million.
In H12018, 5 private equity investments deals were recorded of worth US$ 115 million.
The Indian digital advertising industry is expected to grow at a Compound Annual Growth Rate
(CAGR) of 32 per cent to reach Rs 18,986 crore (US$ 2.93 billion) by 2020, backed by
affordable data and rising smartphone penetration.
India is one of the top five markets for the media, content and technology agency Wavemaker
where it services clients like Hero MotoCorp, Paytm, IPL and Myntra among others
After bagging media rights of Indian Premier League (IPL), Star India has also won broadcast
and digital rights for New Zealand Cricket upto April 2020.
FIGURE 3
With the change and evolution of modern technologies, small and medium businesses are doing
everything they can to keep up, which can be said true for the rest of human society. Brick-and-
mortar businesses are either changing their business models to an online one, or beefing up
existing marketing efforts with digital marketing strategies – in an attempt to capture a growing
and very lucrative online marketplace.
For it is the process of attracting targeted audiences online that will spell the difference between
a successfully thriving business – and a failed one. Even if you receive tons of daily traffic to
your website, they would not amount to anything unless they convert to leads or sales. In the
digital arena where business and commerce are heading to, Digital Marketing tools and
techniques provide business owners the best chances for competition, survival and even
business growth.
The following reasons will show you why the use of digital marketing is not only investment-
wise decision but also an effective marketing channel that can help you grow your business.
1. Because Digital Marketing levels the online playing field
2. More cost effective than traditional marketing.
3. Delivers Conversion
4. Facilitates Interaction with targeted audience
5. It caters to the mobile consumers
6. Its builds brand reputation
7. Provides better ROI for your marketing investments
8. Earns people’s trust
9. Entices people to take favourable actions
TELEVISION CHANNELS
As M&E companies explore new content and distribution models, they must be careful to
protect what still works. Television distribution illustrates this difficult balancing act. Users can
stream or download some television content, but cable and broadcast networks still hold back
the majority of their shows for traditional distribution. There is some talk about moving much
more television content online. However, the current system still brings tremendous value to its
participants. Cable and satellite services are in most homes and people are accustomed to using
them. These distributors still pay a lot of money per month per subscriber to cable (and
increasingly, broadcast) networks. In the current environment, a cable network would likely
find it difficult to generate equivalent revenue by itself. M&E companies must balance the
expected digital rewards with the risk of harming their current distribution partners which still
bring in billions in revenues. Indeed, while television ad revenues have been impacted by media
fragmentation, they are still large. The major studios also want to create new markets through
digital distribution. However, like television, almost all their revenue comes from traditional
forms of distribution. Therefore, as they pursue digital initiatives, they must be careful not to
jeopardize the biggest part of their business.
VIACOM company which owns COLORS channel group has its own OTT platform VOOT as
well. SONY group has SONYLIV. ZEE Group has its ZEE5 app. STAR group of channels has
HOTSTAR. To cater the mobile savy crowd the top Telvision channel companies have gone
digital and have monetized their digital handles as well. Their respective Youtube channels too
have been monetized which are used to show teasers of upcoming shows, movies and other
content. Apart from broadcasting shows which run on their satellite channels, these OTT
platforms have original web series which is broadcast only on OTT platforms. News Channels
like NewsNation, Zee News, News24, News18, etc too have monetized their digital handles i.e
their webportals/mobileapp. Each of these television channels have successfully started to
monetize their digital handles. With monthly unique users in lakhs and millions, digital handles
of respective channels have risen as one of the competitors to the satellite channels itself.
Satellite Channels which fail to grow their digital business will cease to exist in the next 10 -15
years.
FIGURE 4
WEBPORTAL/MOBILE APP MONTHLY UNIQUE VISITORS
ZEE 5 76.4mn
VOOT 25 mn
Newsnation.com 30lk
News24.com 25lk
News18.com 100mn
NDTV.com 75mn
Zeenews.com 50mn
FIGURE 5
WEBPORTAL/MOBILE APP MONTHLY UNIQUE VISITORS
Hindustantimes.com 33mn
TimesofIndia.com 56 mn
Indianexpress.com 47.4 mn
Midday.com 3 mn
TheHindu.com 21 mn
Hindustanlive.com 20 mn
Patrika.com 54 mn
Radio
Currently at its worst position, this medium has been badly hit by the digitial wave. With limited
scope to digitize, no alternatives have yet been effective in its survival. Soon there will be time
where Radio will become just another antique.
FIGURE 6
WEBPORTAL/MOBILE APP MONTHLY UNIQUE VISITORS
Scoopwhoop.com 35 mn
Pinkvilla.com 22 mn
Considering the big production houses like T-series, YRF, Shemaroo etc. These production
houses have social media handles which have been monetized. With millions of followers, these
productions houses earn millions of rupees for every single video uploaded on their youtube
channel. These videos can be original short films, webseries, upcoming movie promos, songs,
old songs from their music library, old movies from their movie library.
Agencies working in this sector, have to widen their list of services offered for business growth.
Using the traditional mediums along with the new digital channels of every medium must be
used in every ad campaigns run by them.
The Film industry is constantly on a look out of new and advanced marketing techniques to
promote a movie and target a mass audience.Today film promotions have gone beyond
releasing the teasers and trailers for the movie in the theaters. The marketing team spends
enormous efforts to formulate well-structured film marketing strategies so that they can get the
audience queuing up to buy the tickets. Digital marketing in film industry is becoming an
effective way to get the audience involved and develop a strong personal relationship with them.
Digital marketing scope encompasses live streaming of music launches, Google hangout with
the crew, social media contests, movie based games, digital advertisements on Youtube and a
lot more. This shift to the digital medium that is being used to promote the upcoming release of
the movie is a new and effective way of engaging with the audience and establishing a stronger
connection with them. The best advantage of using this medium is that the effectiveness of the
strategy can be easily measured using performance related metrics. This helps the digital
marketing experts to make insightful decisions for future strategies so that they can reduce costs
and increase the effectiveness of the marketing campaigns.
Findings from the report has placed India as a mobile-first news market with smartphones being
identified as their primary device for news consumption by an overwhelming 68% of
respondents, markedly higher than similar global markets like Brazil and Turkey.
Audiences are largely accessing news via ‘side-doors’ such as search (32%) and social media
(24%), rather than going directly to sources of news (18%), the study found.
The first India Digital News Report 2019, published with the support of prominent national
media groups like The Hindu, Indian Express, The Quint and Press Trust of India, looks at news
consumption patterns, trust in the news, media literacy and views on disinformation among
India’s English-language news users with internet access.
“Indians are rapidly embracing digital, mobile, and social media, and advertisers are bound
to follow. This will be the end of the era in which Indian news media could expect advertising
to cover their costs and means that it is critically important that Indian news media develop
new, sustainable business models for online news.” - Rasmus Kleis Nielsen, Director of the
RISJ and co-author of the report.
Interestingly, 9% of the participants who already don’t donate or pay for news responded that
they are “very likely” to pay for news in the next year, while another 31% said they were
“somewhat likely” to pay.
Given the large number of population that consumes news in India, this could translate into
significant revenue.
"Interesting revelations, especially about 9% of respondents willing to pay for reading news in
digital. This augurs well for the news media industry's future. If one considers 460 million
internet users in India, and even a small percentage of them willing to pay for consuming news
digitally, news media companies can take a cue from it," said Magdoom Mohamed, Managing
Director, WAN-IFRA, South Asia.
The explosive growth in internet access in India in the last few years has clearly turned out to
be a shot in the arm for the digital media consumption and has significantly impacted the nature
of public debate in the country.
The report also notes that in the run-up to the country’s elections, billed by some as the world’s
largest democratic exercise, many are concerned that expressing political viewpoints online
could affect how friends or family (49%) and colleagues or acquaintances (50%) see them, with
a majority worried that doing so could find them in trouble with the authorities (55%).
The report, which finds overall trust in news (36%) is lower than other comparable markets,
points out that a majority (57%) expresses concerns over whether online news is real or fake,
with many concerned with hyper partisan content (51%), poor journalism (51%), as well as
news that is false (50%).
4. OBJECTIVES
- To understand customer’s preference for Online Advertisements
- To check whether people preferring Online Advts prefer Online Advts for movies as well.
- To find out the extent of awareness about Entertainment websites
- To study the current trends in digital marketing followed by Media Houses, Agencies and
Production Houses to optimize the advertising campaign results
5. HYPOTHESIS
NULL HYPOTHESES Ho
1) People’s preference for online advertisements does not depend on their preferred
medium to read news
2) People’s preference for online advertisements about movies does not depend on
their age
3) People’s preference for online advertisements does not depend on their Gender
6. RESEARCH DESIGN
Initially a rough draft was prepared by keeping in mind the objective of the research. A pilot
study was undertaken in order to know the accuracy of the questionnaire. The final
questionnaire was arrived at only after certain important changes were incorporated.
Questionnaire was in the form of Google form. The statistical tool used is SPSS.
SAMPLE DESIGN
Probability Based Simple Random Sampling
TYPE OF RESEARCH
Descriptive
SAMPLESIZE
172
LOCATION
Mumbai / Navi Mumbai /Thane
PRIMARY DATA
Survey using Questionnaire
SECONDARY DATA
News articles and reports
The Findings of the survey done through google form have been presented below in the form
of pie charts. The Analysis is done by using SPSS software as well.
FINDINGS
FIGURE 7
FIGURE 18
CASE 1
Ho – People’s preference for online advertisements does not depend on their preferred medium
to read news
Are you FOR or AGAINST Online Advertisements about movies? * Which medium do
you prefer to read any news ? Crosstabulation
Which medium do you prefer to read any
news ?
Mobile
Apps Newspaper Webportals Total
Are you FOR Again Count 14 5 4 23
or AGAINST st Expected 14.1 4.4 4.4 23.0
Online Count
Advertisemen For Count 91 28 29 148
ts about Expected 90.9 28.6 28.6 148.0
movies? Count
Total Count 105 33 33 171
Expected 105.0 33.0 33.0 171.0
Count
Chi-Square Tests
Asymptotic
Significance
Value df (2-sided)
Pearson Chi- .133a 2 .935
Square
Likelihood Ratio .132 2 .936
N of Valid Cases 171
a. 2 cells (33.3%) have expected count less than 5. The
minimum expected count is 4.44.
Considering 5% Level of significance, The LOS obtained is greater than 5%. Hence we accept
the NULL Hypothesis Ho. We can conclude than peoples preference for online advertisements
of movies doesnot depend on their preferred medium to read news.
CASE 2
Ho – Peoples preference for online advertisements about movies does not depend on their age
H1 – Peoples preference for online advertisements about movies depends on their age
Chi-Square Tests
Asymptotic
Significanc
Value df e (2-sided)
Pearson Chi- .916a 2 .633
Square
Likelihood Ratio 1.456 2 .483
N of Valid Cases 171
a. 3 cells (50.0%) have expected count less than 5. The
minimum expected count is .54.
Symmetric Measures
Approximat
e
Significanc
Value e
Nominal by Phi .073 .633
Nominal Cramer's .073 .633
V
N of Valid Cases 171
Considering 5% Level of significance, The LOS obtained is greater than 5%. Hence we accept
the NULL Hypothesis Ho. We can conclude than people’s preference for online advertisements
of movies doesnot depend on their age.
CASE 3
Ho – People’s preference for online advertisements does not depend on their Gender
H1 – People’s preference for online advertisements depends on their Gender
Chi-Square Tests
Asymptotic
Significanc Exact Sig. Exact Sig.
Value Df e (2-sided) (2-sided) (1-sided)
Pearson Chi- .052a 1 .819
Square
Continuity .000 1 .997
Correctionb
Likelihood Ratio .052 1 .819
Fisher's Exact Test .826 .496
N of Valid Cases 171
a. 0 cells (0.0%) have expected count less than 5. The minimum expected count is 10.49.
b. Computed only for a 2x2 table
Symmetric Measures
Approximat
e
Significanc
Value e
Phi .018 .819
Considering 5% Level of significance, The LOS obtained is greater than 5%. Hence we accept
the NULL Hypothesis Ho. We can conclude than people’s preference for online advertisements
of movies does not depend on their Gender.
CASE 4
To check whether people preferring Online Advts prefer Online Advts for movies as well.
Symmetric Measures
Approximat
Asymptotic e
Standard Approximat Significanc
Value Errora e Tb e
Interval by Pearson's R .511 .080 7.727 .000c
Interval
Ordinal by Spearman .511 .080 7.727 .000c
Ordinal Correlation
N of Valid Cases 171
We can conclude that People’s preference of Online Advt and People’s Preference for Online
advt of movies have a correlation of 51.1%.
CASE 5
To check whether the people using voot use Hotstar as well.
Which of the OTT platforms do you use ? ( Leave blank if you don't use any ) [Voot] *
Which of the OTT platforms do you use ? ( Leave blank if you don't use any ) [Hotstar]
Crosstabulation
Which of the OTT platforms do you use ? (
Leave blank if you don't use any ) [Hotstar]
1 2 3 Total
Which of 1 Count 17 20 7 44
the OTT Expected 11.4 19.9 12.7 44.0
platforms Count
do you use 2 Count 2 8 3 13
? ( Leave Expected 3.4 5.9 3.7 13.0
blank if Count
you don't 3 Count 25 49 39 113
use any )
Expected 29.2 51.2 32.6 113.0
[Voot]
Count
Total Count 44 77 49 170
Expected 44.0 77.0 49.0 170.0
Count
We can conclude that the overlap among the users of Voot and Hotstar is low as the
Correlation between them is 0.201 i.e 20%
8. SCOPE & LIMITATIONS
The Indian Media and Entertainment industry is on an impressive growth path. The industry is
expected to grow at a much faster rate than the global average rate. The rural region is also a
potentially profitable target.
The share of digital in India’s advertising space expanded in 2019, with spending on this media
type rising about a quarter, even as revenue for the broader industry climbed a shade below
10%, albeit on a much larger base. Data from Dentsu Aegis Network (DAN) showed that digital
ad spend climbed 26% last year to reach Rs 13,683 crore. A DAN report also maintained that
digital advertising will likely maintain a 27% rate of growth in 2020. “The media and
advertising industry is shifting at a rapid speed and digital is certainly taking charge,” said
Ashish Bhasin, CEO, APAC and chairman, India - DAN. “This year is expected to witness a
major change in advertising in India, with digital becoming a bigger medium.”To be sure, India
remains one of the world’s major advertising markets where print readership and advertising
spend continue to expand. In Entertainment sector Television accounts for largest share of
media spends at 39%, followed by print 29% and digital 20%.
FIGURE 18
9. CONCLUSION
Digital Marketing in Media & Entertainment sector comprises of 20% of the market share in
terms of Advertisement spends. Through this report we have learnt the digital marketing
strategies used by Media house’, Production House’, Agencies and Films. In current scenario,
the use of these digital services in ad campaign along with the traditional mediums will make
an ad campaign more impactful. Through Primary data we can conclude:
- 61% people prefer to read news through mobile apps. The remaining share is equally divide among
people who prefer newspapers and webportals.
- 76.7 % people prefer online advertisements. However, a major chunk of 23.3 % does not prefer
online advertisements. This ratio helps to optimize Ad campaign plan.
- 86.6% people prefer online advertisements related to movies. This shows that people who do not
prefer general online advertisements, prefer online advertisements for movies only.
- A larger chunk of people in the range of 70-80% people are not aware about the webportals
dedicated to entertainment news. However these portals do have a millions of followers from other
parts of the country.
- Social Media handles like Youtube, Instagram, twitter are used by majority on daily basis. It is
through these mediums that people come to know about movies first. These foreign companies are
giving tough competitions to Indian Media.
- Bookmyshow too plays an important role in being the first to tell people about the upcoming
movies. 17% of the people stay updated through Bookmyshow. It is followed by television.
- Among the OTT players, majority people use paid subscriptions of Netflix, Amazon followed by
Hotstar. For Sonyliv, Voot, Mx Player and Zee5 people prefer free subscription.
10. REFERENCES
- https://economictimes.indiatimes.com/industry/services/advertising/digital-ad-spends-rose-26-in-2019-
dan-report/articleshow/73570401.cms
- https://digitalmarketingphilippines.com/12-reasons-why-digital-marketing-can-help-you-grow-your-
business/
- https://economictimes.indiatimes.com/industry/media/entertainment/indian-media-entertainment-
industry-to-hit-rs-3-lakh-crore-by-2024/articleshow/70753579.cms
- https://www.ibef.org/industry/media-entertainment-india.aspx
- https://www.udemy.com/topic/digital-marketing/
- Digital Marketing for Dummies By Ryan Deiss and Russ Hennesberry, 2017
ABSTRACT:
In the era of Industry4.0 as decisions are now more data-driven, emerging technologies and
applications in automated data gathering using the Internet of Things (IoT), machine learning and
artificial intelligence, as well as analytics and cloud computing systems in play today are already
changing the objective to move from historical data based planning to a more real time decisions.
Organizations and enterprises are facing immense amounts of pressure due to their traditional
supply chain activities and fleet management which are resulting their profit margins put under
pressure as their costs creep up throughout the supply chain network. These costs come from many
areas, and a lack of visibility and accountability for reducing them can result in rising operational
expenses.
Thus there is the need of the hour is to maximize visibility into the fleet management to ensure
that the inventory that leave any factory, enterprise reach their intended end customers safely and
well in time.
INTRODUCTION:
The Internet of Things (IoT) is a collection of interconnected physical devices that can monitor,
report on and send and exchange data. IoT devices are typically connected to computer systems
via data or Wi-Fi networks.
With Need of transparency, fair trade and sustainability gaining popularity in the mind of the
customers, most of the businesses must deal with complex and non-integrated supply chain
networks with cause’s lack of comprehensive and efficient end to end traceability and surveillance
of the fleet along various supply chain processes.
According to C. Dwight Klappich, Vice President Analyst, Gartner, “Supply chain operations are
under pressure to adopt new business models and technologies to excel in an increasingly complex
and volatile world,” Thus Supply chain leaders must identify where to innovate and invest in new
processes and technologies to help their companies remain relevant in their markets.”
According to the Deloitte 2013 Global Supply Chain Risk Survey, companies have been facing
difficulty to manage dynamic demands and margin erosion due to lack of latest tools to provide
fleet dynamicity and real time insights into the fleet supply chain activities.
According to the Gartner prediction of 2019 for supply chain operations, By 2023, over 30% of
operational warehouse workers will be supplemented, not replaced, by collaborative robots and at
Due to enthusiasm on technological adoption in data transparency and visibility to achieve supply
chain process integration and increase profit margins, the primary objectives of this research is to
identify:
1. The different pain points faced by the supply chain managers and COO to efficiently manage
their supply chain fleet management activities.
2. Identify different fleet management use cases based on the emerging set of technologies
classified as IoT which can facilitate external (i.e. Suppliers and customers) and internal
(cross-functional operations) stakeholders
LITERATURE REVIEW
The Internet of Things (IoT) is a collection of interconnected physical devices that can monitor,
report on and send and exchange data. IoT devices are typically connected to computer systems
via data or Wi-Fi networks.
With Need of transparency, fair trade and sustainability gaining popularity in the mind of the
customers, most of the businesses must deal with complex and non-integrated supply chain
networks with cause’s lack of comprehensive and efficient end to end traceability and surveillance
of the fleet along various supply chain processes.
According to C. Dwight Klappich, Vice President Analyst, Gartner, “Supply chain operations are
under pressure to adopt new business models and technologies to excel in an increasingly complex
and volatile world,” Thus Supply chain leaders must identify where to innovate and invest in new
processes and technologies to help their companies remain relevant in their markets.”
According to the Deloitte 2013 Global Supply Chain Risk Survey, companies have been facing
difficulty to manage dynamic demands and margin erosion due to lack of latest tools to provide
fleet dynamicity and real time insights into the fleet supply chain activities.
According to the Gartner prediction of 2019 for supply chain operations, by 2023, over 30% of
operational warehouse workers will be supplemented, not replaced, by collaborative robots and at
least 50% of large global companies will be using AI, advanced analytics and IoT in supply chain
operations.
IoT bridges the gap between physical and digital world by synchronizing the information flow
with the physical flow for greater supply chain integration (Ping et al., 2011). IoT capability is
defined as additional capabilities gained by supply chains with everyday objects being
embedded with technology that provides identifying, sensing, networking and processing
The growing need to lessen energy consumption, reduce vehicular emissions, and prevent traffic
congestions leads to increased adoption of smart fleet management solutions. Smart fleet
management solutions are increasingly being used to improve fuel efficiency of fleets and meet
the need for high-speed networks. Growing safety concerns and favorable government regulations
are expected to drive the smart fleet management market during the forecast period. Advancements
in technologies such as IoT and connected cars is likely to boost the adoption of smart fleet
solutions during the forecast period, transperancymarketresearch.com
The global smart fleet management market is segmented on the basis of mode of transportation,
connectivity and application. Based on mode of transportation, the market is segmented as
RESEARCH DESIGN
The instrument used to collect the data was a structured questionnaire. A list of questionnaires was
prepared which could give relevant information when answered by the respondents. A total of 10
All the respondents had a fleet size of more than 50 and belonged to Food & Chemical
Ques.1 Does your organization use a fleet management system?
Yes
No
100%
INTERPRETATION: Of all the respondents, all of the respondents have some kind of fleet
management system in place to manage their fleet services
Ques.2 Do you have capability of tracking or remotely monitoring your fleet in real time?
20%
Yes
No
80%
INTERPRETATION: Although the fleet managers reported that they had fleet management
systems already in place majority of them lacked GPS based real time tracking of their fleet across
geography. The 20 % of respondents had a separate tracking software installed to track their fleet
Challenges
45.00%
40.00%
35.00%
30.00%
25.00%
20.00%
15.00%
10.00%
5.00%
0.00%
Unplanned vehicle failure Rising cost of fuel Managing Drivers Managing schedule
changes
INTERPRETATION: Supply Chain managers and COO’s reported that they face many
operational challenges on a daily basis. However, vehicle maintenance ranked first on the list, with
tires, fuel and oil, and brakes being the costliest services which was closely followed by rising cost
of fuel.
Ques.4 Do you have all the data/information on your fleet readily available whenever you need it?
Yes
40%
60% No
INTERPRETATION: While all the respondents have a storage medium for logistics data, 40 %
of the respondents have a centralized storage medium of data, while the rest 60% respondents use
a local data lake to store the data which is not readily available to other regions.
Challenges
0%
Improper training
70%
INTERPRETATION: It is observed that about 70% of the total respondents cite lack of seamless
real time communication between the supply chain managers and drivers as one of the key
challenges which they face which has a severe impact on the overall fleet operations
Ques.6 Which of the following factors related to transportation in warehouse premises have a
severe impact on the fleet operations
In premise factors
70.00%
60.00%
50.00%
40.00%
30.00%
20.00%
10.00%
0.00%
Real time movement Navigation issues Allocation of fesiablle In premises Information on
monitoring inside parking spots transportation estimated waiting
premises accidents time
INTERPRETATION: It is observed that about 60% of the total respondents cite in premise
transportation accidents as one of the most sever factor related to transportation in warehouse
premises as it can have a devastating effect to both the welfare of employees and brand image
Route selection
0%
Choice of drivers
Fixed routes
40% others
60%
INTERPRETATION: It is observed that about 60% of the total respondents have observed that
their drivers follow a fixed route which is pre decided by the organization whereas 40% of the
respondents let their drivers decide the routes. It is observed that none of them have dynamic route
selection based on real time conditions
Ques.8 Does your fleet management system provide real time vehicle health monitoring, tire
pressure analysis capabilities?
Yes No
100%
INTERPRETATION: Although unplanned vehicle failure was the most critical operational
challenge has a severe impact was reported by the respondents it is noticed that none of them had
a vehicle health monitoring system to observe the health parameters of their vehicles which clearly
shows the whitespace.
20%
Yes No
80%
INTERPRETATION: Majority of the respondents had no measures to track the real time status
of freight in transit. All of them had to be dependent on the driver’s status update or checks in
warehouse after unloading. The rest 20% had basic temperature monitoring mechanism in fleet
FINDINGS
• It is observed that industries today are pursuing opportunities to optimize their fleet and freight
movements by investing in fleet management systems utilizing telematics as they address
changing customer demands.
• The fleet management system currently in implementation is of basic level and reactive in
nature. Fleet entries are made whenever they check in at a ware house or where there is strong
cellular connectivity
• Unplanned break down of vehicles and rising fuel cost are the top two challenge which the
respondents have categorized having a severe impact on the overall logistics fleet operations.
Any breakdown of vehicle on route can result in the whole schedule going for toss
• It is also observed that many of the fleet management systems are not centrally connected and
do not have a central database for aggregation of different regional data which can result in
analytics driven insight generation
• Most of the communications of supply chain managers with the drivers are based on phone
calls and text messages and in areas where the reception is poor, there is no medium to establish
communication with the driver, let alone real time communication.
• Incidents within the warehouse premises are being in rise and has a severe effect on the brand
reputation and lawsuits being filed on the organization
• The choice of route is solely dependent on the driver or he uses a fixed route. The route may
not be feasible at the current situation taking into account factors such as Strikes, Natural
calamities which may affect the overall fleet operations
• Although unplanned breakdown of fleets are a critical challenge for the fleet operators, there
is no mechanism to monitor real time vehicle health status, tire pressure and other critical
parameters, no option of predictive maintenance
CONCLUSION
Thus, this study summarizes that the supply chain managers are COO level people are facing
challenges regarding the fleet management systems lack real time tracking and monitoring
capabilities such as:
Fleet Asset Capabilities: Fuel management, Predictive & preventive maintenance
Fleet Operation Capabilities: Driver behavior monitoring, Yard Management, real time tracking
Freight Management Capabilities: Vibration, Pressure, cold chain, humidity monitoring
This study also focusses on the various above solution implementations by leveraging the sensors,
telematics, GPS to gain real time insights, estimate predictions and driver behavior monitoring to
improve the fleet efficiency, reduce liability, increase compliance and achieve zero safety
accidents.
Thus, Fleet management plays an essential role in the transportation industry as fleet managers
strive to minimize risks associated with vehicle investment. It is critical for the fleet management
system to provide real-time actionable insights for assets on-the-move. An ideal fleet management
system must utilize GPS/Sensors/Telematics to provide a unified real-time information of global
asset or cargo movement across multimodal transportation. Emergence of artificial intelligence
and machine learning should be utilized to drive predictive recommendations for dynamic route
scheduling, ETAs, driver risk profile, freshness, or cold chain monitoring to improve the fleet
experience.
REFERENCES
• Global supply-chain-challenges, blumeglobal.com,
https://www.blumeglobal.com/learning/supply-chain-challenges/
• Blockchain internet of things supply chain traceability,
https://www2.deloitte.com/content/dam/Deloitte/lu/Documents/technology/lu-blockchain-
internet-things-supply-chain-traceability.pdf
• Blumeglobal.com article on internet-of-things,
https://www.blumeglobal.com/learning/internet-of-things/
Abstract
Indian postal service is one of the largest postal networks in the world having 1,54,979 post offices
all over the country. The India post has a brand image but to make their services indispensable the
service quality and other dimensions of satisfaction need to be focused. India post has to
concentrate on balanced growth in all its services for retaining the existing customers and attracting
new one. Only a few studies have been found to be conducted on the performance and other aspects
of post offices in India. These have been conducted in some parts of southern India or south-
western region of India. Hardly any comprehensive study on Indian post offices have been
conducted in north western region of India. Further, the role of Post offices in the recent years have
changed a lot, because many IT enabled services have been initiated in post 2000 Era. No
comprehensive study on Post Offices in post 2000 Era (since the IT services were enabled) has
been found. The utility and efficiency of these services also need to be studied in north-western
India. The previous studies in this respect on the Post Offices belong to the region of Kerala,
Tamilnadu, Assam and Mumbai. Hence, the researcher feels the need to conduct study on Post
Offices of North-Western Region in India, because there are cultural and social differences in the
regions and the results vary.
Keywords: IndiaPost, Postal Services, Financial Services, Problems of Post.
1. INTRODUCTION
Mobilisation of domestic financial resources is a major concern in many developing countries.
Savings are increasingly being acknowledged as a powerful tool for poverty reduction. Domestic
savings play an important role in bringing about economic development of backward countries. In
India, domestic savings originate from three principal sectors namely the house hold sector, the
private corporate sector, cooperative institutions and the Public sector. Postal savings funds play a
significant role in financing public debt and in a number of countries, the funds are intermediated
through a variety of policy based financial institutions with developmental objectives, returning
the funds to the direct benefit of the community of savers. However, it is a fact that the Postal
Saving Scheme has not gained much importance in India. The changing postal environment
presents an enormous challenge for traditional postal businesses, but it also creates a vast array of
new business options and opportunities, as the interest rate compared to other schemes provided
by the Postal schemes are higher. Today, in our country many investment avenues are available
for the investors to invest their money. Only rural people find Post office schemes offered by the
Government of India attractive, because of risk free option with the guarantee of their Principal
amount.
Indian Department of Post is the oldest and apex government institution in the Indian service
sector. Once the East India Company established its rule on the entire Indian Territory the need
was felt by the British rulers to have a government owned institution for delivering the royal mails.
In 19th century Lord Dalhousie played an important role in starting the postal services in India.
The Post Office Act was enacted in 1854 and first post office was established in Mumbai. The act
was promulgated as per which the department of post with 652 post offices and four postmaster’s
generals were placed under central organization. It was headed by Director General. Gradually the
number of post offices increased to 12970 by the end of 1900. At the time of independence, the
total numbers of post offices were 23,334. Today India is the country with maximum number of
post offices all over the world. There are 1,55,335 post offices today in India. Out of which
1,35,000 post offices are in the rural area. The Department of Posts, trading as India Post, is a
government operated postal system in India. It is generally referred to within India as “the post
office”. As of 31 March 2011, the Indian Postal Service had 1,54,866 post offices, of which
1.39,040 (89.78 percent) were in rural areas and 15,826 (10.22 percent) in urban areas. It had
25,464 Departmental Post Offices and 1,29,402 Extra-Departmental Branch Post Offices. At the
time of independence there were 23,344 post offices, primarily in urban areas. The network has
registered a six-fold growth since independence, with the expansion’s focus primarily in rural
areas. On average, a post office serves an area of 21.23 Sq. Kilometres and a population of 7,114.
It is most widely distributed postal system in the world. The large number is a result of a tradition
of disparate postal systems, which were unified in the Indian Union after independence. Because
of this far-flung reach and its presence in remote areas, the Indian postal service is also involved
in other services such as small-savings banking and financial services. The postal service is under
the Department of Posts, which is part of the Ministry of Communications and Information
Technology of the Government of India. The apex body of the department is the Postal Service
Board, consisting of a chair and six members. The six board members govern personnel,
operations, technology, postal life insurance, human-resource development (HRD) and planning.
The joint secretary and financial adviser are also a permanent invitee. India has been divided into
22 postal circles; each circle headed by a Chief Postmaster General. Each circle is divided into
regions, there are 37 regions, headed by a Postmaster General and comprising 442 field units
known as divisions headed by SSPOs and SPOs.
The post office was incepted as a medium of transferring a written communication between the
people all over the country. The department of post is an integral part of lives of every citizen since
last 150 years. The department of post has made conscious efforts to spread these postal services
to all parts of the country. The India Post is offering variety of services to its citizens, including
Mailing Services (Speed Post, Business Post, Express Parcel Post, Media Post, E-Post, etc.),
Financial Services (Public Provident Fund, Postal Savings Bank Account, Monthly Income
Scheme, Recurring Deposit Account, National savings Certificate, Post office Time Deposit etc),
Postal Life Insurance (for central and state government employees) and Retail Services
(payment of electricity bills, telephone bills, e-ticketing, sale of gold coins, sale of UPSC forms,
passport application forms, etc.). These services have penetrated to the large population of the
country and they have become the part of their lives. The department of post has to manage these
services through its huge infrastructure. Every day department of post has to deal with large
number of customers. Hence, it's a customer centric business. Due the evolution in
telecommunication business as well as globalization of business many new players have entered
globally. Today India Post is facing acute competition from technologically advanced competitors.
The big challenge today for India Post is to sustain in this market and retain the existing customers
by delivering high level of satisfaction through its services. In this modern era, the customer
expectations as well as their preferences have changed. The customers have plenty of other
alternatives at click of mouse. So, the India Post has to adopt the necessary changes to become a
leader in the current market. India post is facing many challenges. It not only faces the challenge
from private courier services in urban areas in delivery of mail and parcel services, but also from
financial institutions like bank and insurance companies and Heavy use of communication
technology, especially in Mobile Telephone (3G, 4G services) and increasing use of Internet. One
of the major problems faced by India post under Information Technology Modernization Project
is that total 2,69,000 Gramin Dak Sewaks with minimum qualification of matriculate or below and
without having any technical knowledge of Information and Communication Technology (ICT).
In addition to this, many senior officials don't know the fundamentals of computer. Mass scale
Closure / Merger / Relocation of post offices cannot be accepted by post when all other private
couriers’ agencies are competing to trap urban customers of India Post by opening more and more
outlets in urban areas for extending their services to the door steps of such customers. Year by year
financial performance of mail services being declining. The India Post is a very old institution,
perhaps one of the oldest, but with the help of incorporating technology reforms covering all
During post liberalization period the banking sector in India has grown enormously keeping pace
with and in some cases leading the country's remarkable economic growth. The banking system
has improved its strength, efficiency and resilience. The branches of commercial banks including
RRBs have increased from 8321 in the year 1969 to 93080 in 2011. The average population per
bank branch has decreased from 64,000 in 1969 to 13,466 in 2011. Despite such increase in bank
branches formal banking system has simply fail to reach to the common masses of the country and
all developments are seems to be deficient. Financial inclusion is not an India specific problem, it
is global one. The Deputy Governor, Reserve Bank of India, Dr. K. C. Chakrabarty in one of his
address at the BIS-BNM Workshop on Financial Inclusion Indicators at Kuala Lumpur on
November 5, 2012 said “Across the globe 2.5 billion adults do not use formal financial service to
save or borrow. In India, just about 40 per cent of the population across the country has bank
accounts. The proportion of people having any kind of life insurance cover is as low as 10 per cent
and proportion having non-life insurance is abysmally low at 0.6 per cent. People having debit
cards comprise only 13 per cent and those having credit cards only a marginal 2 per cent of the
population”. Other than banking and other financial institution the Indian post which partially do
banking activity under the ministry of finance is doing a commendable job towards providing easy
financial services to the people throughout the country especially in the remote areas through its
huge network. Financial inclusion is assumed to be one of the key drivers of our vision of an
inclusive society and inclusive economy. During post liberalization period the banking sector has
grown enormously keeping pace with and in some cases leading the country’s remarkable
economic growth. At the same time Indian post offices are also providing banking services to the
all section of people of the society since 1882.
In simple term financial exclusion means lack of access to formal financial services. It is very
transparent that financial services are used only by a section of the population. There is demand
for these services but it has not been provided. The excluded regions are rural, poor regions and
also those living in harsh climatic conditions where it is difficult to provide these financial services.
The excluded population then has to rely on informal sector (moneylenders etc) for availing
finance that is usually at exorbitant rates. Financial inclusion is the availability of banking services
at an affordable cost to disadvantaged and low-income groups. In India the basic concept of
financial inclusion is having a saving or current account with any bank. In reality it includes loans,
insurance services and much more. In advanced economies, Financial Inclusion is more about the
knowledge of fair and transparent financial products and a focus on financial literacy. In emerging
economies, it is a question of both access to financial products and knowledge about their fairness
and transparency.
Post office, commercial banks and financial inclusion in India a critical look
POSBs in India were established in 1882 by the British colonizers to mobilize savings and operate
as an agency for the ministry of finance. As of 2007, there are 1, 54,000 POSBs in India of which
89% were located in rural areas.
Infosys, a global leader in consulting and technology, announced that it has been selected by the
Department of Post, Ministry of Communications and IT, GoI for a mission-critical program that
will enhance India Post's financial services across 150,000 post offices. This is part of the 'India
Post 2012' modernization program that aims at bringing transparency, agility, flexibility and
scalability to India Post's operations. Under the agreement, Infosys and India Post will embark on
a transformational initiative, which encompasses Financial Services System Integration. This
project, estimated at INR 700 crores, aims to transform India Post into a technology-enabled and
autonomous market leader, by revolutionizing its financial operations and end-user services. As
Financial Services System Integrator, Infosys will implement and manage its flagship Finacle™
Core Banking and McCamish™ Insurance products to help India Post transform its banking and
insurance operations - covering more than 200 million banking customers across urban and rural
India; including a large base of insurance customers. Infosys will be installing 1,000 ATMs for
India Post as part of this program to increase the effectiveness of its delivery channel and will also
There is no doubt of the fact that Indian post is playing a very important role in financial inclusion
but it can play a much better role if it can overcome from the following problems:
a) Lack of basic infrastructure, especially post offices in rural areas.
b) Less numbers of staff, mostly one or two persons and need to do all sorts of work.
c) Lack of coordination unlike foreign countries, where post offices are doing tremendous work
for financial inclusion in coordination with other departments.
d) Slow progress of innovation and following the age-old practices of working.
e) Being a government department, they cannot take a decision independently.
a) Saving account scheme: Post office saving bank account (POSB) is the oldest and most popular
postal saving instrument. Any individual can open it with a minimum balance of Rs-50/ with a
pass book and Cheque facility. Currently the rate of interest offered against POSB A/C is 4% and
it is regulated by The Government Savings Bank Act of 1873.
b) Recurring deposit scheme: Post office offers recurring deposit facility with a maturity period
of five years with a minimum deposit is Rs 10/- and multiples of Rs 5/- thereafter and there is no
limit of maximum deposit. The present rate of interest offered against this A/C is 8.4%. Premature
closer is after three year and part withdrawal is also allowed.
c) Time deposit account: Post office offers time deposit for 1 year, 2 year, 3 year and 5 year with
a rate of interest of 8.2%, 8.3%, 8.4%, and 8.5% respectively and a minimum deposit of Rs 200/
with no maximum limit. Premature withdrawal allowed after 6 months.
2. REVIEW OF LITERATURE
Jain, et. al (2001) analysed the structural issues in the operations of India Post. The actions which
can be taken to make the India post activities commercially viable are mentioned. A case study of
Indonesia is considered for suggesting the postal reforms.
Palacios (2001), while observing the challenges of old age income security in India, has
concluded that reforms would provide current and future contributors with a viable alternative to
a traditional family support system that will come under increasing strain of demographic
transition.
Scher (2001) in their study had observed that in many countries Postal Savings and Giro
remittances have long enabled provision of financial services to all segments of the population.
The review of experiences of Asian developing countries suggests many ways by which
developing countries can help themselves to mobilize domestic savings and provide domestic
financial services through postal savings and remittances and thereby provide financial services to
those most likely to be excluded.
World Bank (2002) observes that India Post is particularly well positioned to address the
pressures of a changing environment by expanding services into non-traditional areas such as e-
banking, e-government and e-commerce, reinventing the services and products it offers.
Richa (2004) argued that the Post Office continues to be a major attraction for savers going by
the 32.45 per cent higher collections during the first quarter of the current fiscal relative to that
mobilized over the same period of 2003 – 04. Between 1999 – 2000 and 2003 – 04, gross
collections under the savings deposits shot up from Rs. 34,650 crores to Rs. 91,3000 crores.
Salam (2004) in their study had observed the savings behaviour in India. The objective of the
study was to find the determinants of savings by analysing saving behaviour in India over a period
Suresh (2004) in an analysis of popular perceptions said that retail investors swarmed back to
the stock markets in the year 2003-04. Households had deposited Rs.1,69,000 crores in bank
deposits while investments in small savings rose 19 percent. The data suggests that in 2003-04 the
household investor had turned extremely conservative.
Raghavan (2005) highlights that India Post needs to deal with the emergence of electronic
alternatives to mail, improve the quality of its products and services to satisfy ever more
demanding customers, and respond proactively to market competition. It is recommended that the
training process needs to be reoriented to ensure that post office staff can move up the value and
quality chain and help improve efficiency in the delivery of services. He discussed it using a
comparative study with different nations. In the United Kingdom, the government gives Royal
Mail an explicit subsidy for the provision of loss-making rural post offices. It is observed that to
increase revenues, public postal operators there are increasingly diversifying the range of services
distributed through post offices. In the Republic of Korea all post offices with sufficient space
provided to access free telecentres, thereby meeting a social and development objective on behalf
of the government. Brazil has developed a post bank in partnership with a private bank, which
targets mainly communities that previously lacked access to banks. They have also introduced an
easy export product that simplifies overseas trade for small and medium-size enterprises. To
counter growing competition, postal operators there must be given a greater autonomy from
government control so that they can operate on a more commercial basis. In Trinidad and Tobago
introducing commercial management practices improved service and increased volume, revenues
and productivity.
Ranganathan (2005) opines that with the Internet, Mobile Telephone network revolution posing
the threat of making the letter mail obsolete, postal monopolies throughout the world are
undergoing restructuring and/or privatization. He expresses that the ubiquitous post office, in
Japan and India particularly, has also doubled up as a bank, exploiting the economies of scope
of its vast number of branches and network, and mobilizing savings. Except for foreign mail and
Speed Post in India, every other service is incurring a loss. He adds that the loss in turn is
constraining the managerial autonomy of IP, with all major financial decisions being left to the
Finance Ministry. He further acclaims that to promote its Speed Post IP is cannibalizing its letter
mail market, by delivering normal mail inordinately late. In its quest for commercialization, it is
eroding its own good reputation and good will in its traditional areas, letter post and money order.
The first phase of this research has focused on identifying the reasons for this fall in performance.
Hari Sundar & Jacob (2009) tries to find out the investment pattern of the respondents of
Kumbalangi a rural area in the outskirts of Cochin district. There exists no significant relationship
between Age and Percentage of income saved by the respondents. The factors that influenced to
invest in postal schemes were that the proportionate of investment is less and it provides high
interest rate than banks. The analysis brings out that Kisan Vikas Patra stood first in the preference
of respondents as the investment doubles and gives high return. The study reveals the fact that
majority of the respondents were interested in investing in Post Office, irrespective of reduction in
Normany, et. al (2009) enumerates difficulties of post offices for manual sorting. Its attempt is to
design a machine which will make the work of post office more efficient and effective.
Ganpathi & Malar (2010) studies the attitude and perceptions of the investors towards the
various deposit’s schemes available with Post Office. The schemes are meant to increase thrift
and inculcate increase in saving habits of the investors. They compete successfully in the market
due to their tax saving schemes, safety and high rate of interest.
Planning Commission (2011) have emphasised on the need of the modernization of India Post.
The improvement areas in the functioning of the India Post are analysed and specific
recommendations have been given by the experts.
Rajeshwari & Sunmista (2011) states in their paper the comparisons of the customer’s
perceptions of service quality of Post Office in Virudhunagar district and Madurai district of
Tamilnadu. SERVPERF dimensions were used to measure the service quality of Post. Customers
have a positive attitude more than the negative attitude towards services of Post.
Agarwal (2012) concludes in her study the various factors which focus on influencing the
investors to invest among the different savings schemes of the post offices. It explains that the
educational qualification and occupations of the investors has a significant impact on the saving
pattern as well as to choose among the various investment schemes and services available with
post offices. The study states that the investment in senior citizen schemes are very low preferred
by the customer and communication network of the post offices should be increased. Post offices
provide a unique bundle of savings products.
Aggarwal (2012) depicts that even though there is a global revolution in financial sector, India
Post is still a reliable government agency. There is diversity in the postal services, but awareness
and overall improvement in the services is the challenge faced by the India Post.
Moez & Gharbi (2012) in their paper studies the customer satisfaction in delivering services by
the Postal department in Tunisian city relating to mail services and secondly loyalty of the
customers towards the services of the post. It concludes that the satisfaction of customers for
undertaking services from post has a positive impact on the loyalty of the customers.
Anand, et.al (2013), in his paper focuses on the performance aspects of Indian Postal Services
and its future growth strategy. As per the study, the strength of India Post is its long traditional
of handling financial services, and its reach to masses. It is recommended to improve the service
quality and operational efficiency of the system.
Chhatbar (2013) tried to explain the satisfaction of consumers, which they derive from using
services of the post offices and in comparison, the satisfaction arrived from private courier
services in Mumbai. The study reveals that the customers are equally satisfied by using the private
courier firms or Indian postal services.
Hosseini, et.al (2013) studies the strength, weakness, opportunities and threats of Postal Services
in Rasht (Iran). It focuses on the number of problems faced by the public relating to the services
offered by the Postal Offices. It observes that the post office distribution and city environment are
not properly organised and it offer various suggestion to improve.
Kanthi & Kumar (2013) analyzes the investor’s preferences, awareness, satisfactions, their
objective and purpose of investment in their schemes. It reveals that majority of investors are
highly satisfied by postal savings bank.
Khator (2013) highlights the working way of traditional Post Office services in growth with
modern corporate entities in Kenya, to find out tough competition faced by postal office from
these private companies and to analyse the strategies adopted by them to reduce risk and
uncertainties. 96 offices of private courier and mail services are registered in Kenya.
Malakar (2013) study the role played by Indian post in financial inclusion and the challenges
before the Indian post in providing banking services to the masses. The information is collected
from the department of post, using discussions with officials of Indian post. It is summarized that
Indian post served Indian villagers as banker much before financial inclusion become buzzword
and Indian post claims to be the pioneer of financial inclusion.
Malankar (2013) reveals about the role played by post office in the financial inclusion and the
challenges faced. It mentioned various hurdles and challenges come in their way during the course
of working of services. The study concluded that India Post has removed all those challenges by
becoming the most reliable and safest way of investment agency.
Samal (2013) put forward the thought that due to vast use of electronic media, more demanding
customers, presence of Organised / Unorganised courier for mail service, Financial Institutions
like banks and Insurance companies and above all the challenges of globalization, corporatization
and liberalization, post should take the proper steps for its survival. He highlighted many points
that taken by the India Post including Business Development, IT Modernization, Potential Service
Provider.
Thangapandi (2013) conducted a study to assess the opinion of the customers towards postal
services and how frequently they use the services and to offer suggestions for improvement in
them. The focus of the study was on demographic profile of the customer namely literacy,
occupation, location where there is a significant change in their relationship. The study depicts that
no significant change usage rate and opinion of postal services has been observed in relation to
demographic profile such as age, gender and income of the respondent.
Dutta (2014) has stated in her paper the role of India Post in providing Postal life insurance
schemes for central and state government employees and rural postal life insurance (RPLI)
schemes for general rural people. It studies the problem face by them in undertaking those services.
PLI introduce on 1st Feb, 1884 and RPLI on 24th march, 1995.
Gayathri (2014) studies in general the attitude of the investors towards the different schemes
with the postal offices in Cumbum Town (Tamilnadu). It analyzes the study of the various
problems faced by the customers in investing money in post offices. It highlights suggestion for
improvement in the way postal department perform their services. Latest technology up gradation
which will make services faster and reliable. Advertisement strategy should be adopted as lack of
awareness is there as campaigning of services is not done. Post offices reach to the millions of
people serving them the best products and schemes, especially rural ones.
Giri, S. (2014) discusses the Postal scenario prevailing today and the Financial Services using
technology modernisation and it gives a brief idea of various financial services rendered by the
Pondicherry Division of India. It also highlights the other technology driven services provided
by the Pondicherry Postal Division to the urban and rural people of Pondicherry, Cuddalore
and Villupuram Districts like Collection of Data for Consumer Price Index, Booking of Railway
tickets, Booking of SRM ticket, Payment of Money gram, Western Union Money transfer,
Payment of Instant money remittance etc.
Kaniganat & Chaipoopirutana (2014) has highlighted the Relationship between operational
performance, relational performance, cost performance, organization, and customer satisfaction
towards Thai Postal Service (TPS) in Bangkok, Thailand. The study shows a high positive
relation between organisation image and customers satisfaction.
Kumar & Prakash (2014) attempts to study the importance of precious metal i.e. Gold and
expectations of customers in buying gold through 630 post offices with various discounts are
offered by them. The study summarizes that India post is moving towards technology innovation
and modernisation for services and tries to satisfy customers with best products.
Lykogiannis (2014) attempts to study the behaviour, perception and attitude of the customers
relating to Greek Postal Services to investigate the investors’ awareness for schemes available
in post offices. Big percentage of customers use Greek Postal offices and they are highly satisfied
by the services and schemes. It is recommended that they should take more efforts to concentrate
on raising satisfaction levels of customers.
Moorthy & Kumar (2014) have shown that for poor and lower income people usage of strategies
are very less to meet their requirement. Various investment avenues are available with post to
channelize savings of poor and allocate them for development of the country.
Shafee & Prabakaran (2014) in their paper has discuss the role of Postal Department in
implementing the ATM services. Automated teller machines (ATMs) were the first well known
machines to provide electronic access to customers. To analyze the present ATM facilities
provided by India post, customer satisfaction by appraising the problems faced by the customers
using ATM and to study the growth and development of ATMs in the banking sector and their
functions. It is recommended that Indian Postal ATM Service needs technological, social, cultural
& economic change to create a monopoly in the market.
Subatra & Plaban (2014) acclaims that customer satisfaction depends on the quality of services.
The skilful and sufficient numbers of staff members are required for good services.
Kumar (2015) in his paper has made a comparative study of the role played by Post Office in
rural areas in developed countries, underdeveloped countries and emerging economy. The role
played by Postal department is vital one in fostering financial inclusion. Women empowerment
can be increased by giving them facilities from Post Offices.
Mathew (2015) include in her study the role of postal administration in providing the excellence
services and enjoying the trust and loyalty in customers by diversifying themselves through
innovative products and services and the changing role of post offices by entering into new areas
such as telephony and financial services. It is viewed as a critical window for the rural people to
avail sophisticated products and affordable financial products.
Mohammad (2015) highlights the changing face and role of post offices in Indian services
sector. India has the largest postal network in the world. Its plays a very crucial role in socio-
Potadar et. al (2015) gives an overview of challenges ahead of India Post. The authors
recommended that more revenue will be earned if India Post does directly any business instead of
doing through intermediaries. They stress that the Department does not find any financial
autonomy and commercial flexibility to respond to market forces quickly and efficiently since it
is functioning as a corporate agent of the Ministry of Finance.
Potadar, et.al (2015) highlights the challenges faced by the Indian Post Office from the private
courier, banks and financial institutions or companies in delivering services relating to letters,
mails and parcels. It is reviewed that collection of feedback from employees and customers is the
best way to review their performances.
Saranya & Karthikeyan (2015) worked in his study on the importance of savings among the
investors in post Offices schemes, in order to analyse the satisfaction, they derive using the
services of post Offices and to identify the strength, weakness, opportunities and threats. Thus, the
prime reasons for investors to invest are emergency needs, family needs and future.
Birajdar & Joshi (2016) focuses on quality of services which are provided by India post to its
customers. The quality is very critical to satisfaction in service sector organizations. The researcher
has considered certain dimensions of quality of services like timeliness, reliability, responsiveness,
ease of using services, competency of staff members, safety in dealings, complaint handling, layout
etc. It is concluded that India Post is a reliable organization which takes necessary precautions
while handling variety of transactions. The study points out the importance of maintaining the
service quality for increased customer satisfaction. It is recommended that the waiting time,
complaint handling, staff cooperation and delay in the service delivery are the major concerns of
the customers. As per the study, emphasis should be given on the service quality improvement and
urgent measures need to be implemented for process improvements. It is observed that there is
lack of professional attitude and competitive foresight. Being the responses of the customers in
Dombivali region are considered. Hence it may not be applicable to other parts of the country.
Kumar offers critical lessons for India Post on the importance of addressing employee
motivation, establishing a dynamic management team, and pursuing a more aggressive marketing
strategy to thrive in the market. The international example and especially the restructuring of
Deutsche Post demonstrate that postal sector reform is a long-term process. They also show that
reforms must be on clear consensus and support from government.
Mehta & Mirchandani focus on the investment avenues for investing in the post office savings
schemes. The study observes that it is convenient for the customer of rural and urban customers
to choose the investment in different schemes available. Good public image and confidence is to
be developed among the general public as it offers the safety mode of return.
Mirchandani described ways to manage the postal sector business by using information
technology as a key enabler. He also described the four pillars of strategic change and
development for a postal system as: empower the customers, employees, and partners through
great services and solutions; broaden the use of the post office and transform it into a gateway for
Saidoun discussed about Postal reform in Germany that was carried out in three phases in 1990
to 2006 to respond to the challenges of globalization, liberalization and digitization. The first phase
1990 to 1997 focused on reducing cost, creating efficient processes and improving the quality of
service in the domestic market. The second phase 1998 to 2000 focused on expanding the product
range and offering the new services along the value chain. Value added services include direct
marketing centres, Deutsche Post Print Com and pack stations. The third phase 2001 to 2006
consists of consolidating cross-selling potential.
Thakur & Singh expresses that the customer satisfaction can be raised by providing quality
services and then employees play a very important role in delivering the good services. They have
underlined the necessity of good staff for raising the overall customer satisfaction.
From the above review discussion, it becomes clear that well lesser studies are held on the topic
in Indian context and further, no study has been found executed till date on North-Western India
on the problem. Hence, it would be quite interesting to suggest the solution for the postal system
in the given Indian region itself.
The India post is one of the most trusted government organizations from last 150 years. It is facing
the acute competition from other competitors. To become the leader in the mailing and financial
services the department of post need to adopt certain important changes in its services and
technology. The ease and convenience of the customer with timeliness in service delivery must be
the utmost priority. The India post has a brand image but to make their services indispensable the
service quality and other dimensions of satisfaction need to be focused. The India post has to
concentrate on balanced growth in all its services for retaining the existing customers and attracting
new one. Hence, here the problem scope will lie along exploring the ways ahead as a suggestion
to let the India post achieve its zenith.
Only a few studies have been found to be conducted on the performance and other aspects of post
offices in India. These have been conducted in some parts of southern India or south-western
region of India. Hardly any comprehensive study on Indian post offices have been conducted in
north western region of India. Further, the role of Post offices in the recent years have changed a
lot, because many IT enabled services have been initiated in post 2000 Era. No comprehensive
study on Post Offices in post 2000 Era (since the IT services were enabled) has been found. The
Track Your Consignment, e-Payment, e-Post Message, e-Access to Postal Saving Bank Accounts,
Internet Banking, Online information and application of various schemes and services, e-
Grievance System, Instant Money Order (IMO), International Money Transfer (IMT), Money
Gram - Money Transfer, Electronic Clearance Service (ECS), IFS Money Order, Mobile Money
Transfer, India Post Payments Bank, Forex Services, Postal Life Insurance(PLI), Purchase
philatelic stamps online, Platform for small businesses/weavers to enable them to sell their
products online through the Snapdeal portal.
3. RESEARCH METHODOLOGY
Dipankar Malakar (2013) used both primary and secondary data to prepare his study on the Role
of Indian Post in Financial Inclusion. Primary data was collected from Office of The Chief Post
Master General, Assam Circle. Secondary data was collected from annual administrative report,
annual report and websites of the Indian post and from RBI.
Charusheela Birajdar and Akshata Joshi, (2016) used primary data collection method for their
Review of Customer Satisfaction for Indian Postal Services. The responses of the customers were
collected through the questionnaire. The secondary sources of data collection were also adopted
like books, journals, web sites etc. The responses of the customers are collected and analysed with
tabular and graphical presentation. The opinions of customers regarding various postal services
are analysed.
Hari Sundar G, Prashob Jacob, (2009) studied the investment pattern and the respondent’s
perception towards Post Office saving Scheme and the method of data collection was only by way
of questionnaire distributed to the respondents. The data was collected on random basis.
As evident from the methodology of above studies in variant regions, it is proposed to collect
primary data, by way of a pre-structured questionnaires from the customers of India Post from
North-Western India Region visiting Post Offices of above region, on Simple random bases. A
detail of proposed circle wise sample coverage is mentioned below. Officials from different circles
of North-Western India* will be also interviewed to supplement the study. A secondary data
supplement will be from the relevant and officially published reports and statistics. The data
collected will be tabulated in two formats, viz., and simple table and cross table. The data will be
then analysed by simple percentage, Chi - square test and other tests.
* Postal Circles of India Post, coming in the North-Western Indian Region and proposed
sample size
S. No. Postal Circle Name Postal Circle Code Proposed Sample
1 Delhi C 100
2 Haryana E 100
3 Himachal Pradesh F 100
4 Jammu & Kashmir G 100
5 Punjab N 100
6 Rajasthan O 100
The final thesis dissertation report will be prepared as per the provided university publication and
reporting guidelines. The General Schema for the Dissertation Report will be as follows:
1) INTRODUCTION
2) LITERATURE REVIEW
3) RESEARCH METHODOLOGY
4) ROLE OF POST OFFICE IN FINANCIAL INCLUSION
5) ADMINISTRATIVE PRACTICES AND EFFICIENCY OF POST OFFICES
6) FINANCIAL AND ADMINISTRATIVE PERFORMANCE OF POST OFFICES
7) CHALLENGES BEFORE POST OFFICES IN PROVIDING FINANCIAL SERVICES
8) PERCEPTION OF VARIOUS STAKEHOLDERS OF POST OFFICES IN INDIA
9) PRESENT LEVEL OF CUSTOMER SATISFACTION FOR POSTAL SERVICES
10) SUMMARY, CONCLUSION AND RECOMMENDATIONS
11) SELECTED REFERENCES AND BIBLIOGRAPHY
12) APPENDICES: TABLES, GRAPHS AND FIGURES
13) ANNEXURES: QUESTIONNAIRES, FORMS AND REPORTS / STATISTICS USED
REFERENCES
Print Articles
1. Aggarwal, R. (2012) Factors Influencing Customer Preferences towards Postal Saving Schemes.
International Journal of Management and Technology, Vol 2(1), pp. 11.
2. Abdus, S. & Umma, K. Savings behaviour in India: An empirical study, The Indian Economic
journal, Volume 50(1), pp. 77.
3. Birajdar, C. & Joshi, A. (2016). A Review of Customer Satisfaction for Indian Postal Services.
International Journal of Marketing and Human Resource Management, Volume 7(3), pp. 49 - 59.
4. Chandramowleeswaran, G. & Uma, K. (2015). A Study on Customer Service Evaluation In
Securing Customer Satisfaction. International Journal of Marketing and Human Resource
Management (IJMHRM), Volume 6(3), pp. 75 - 82.
5. Chattopadhyas, S. & Das, P. (2014). key decision-making factors in the domestic services in the
post offices. IJMS, Volume 1(1).
6. Fernando, N. A. (2003) Pawnshops and Micro lending: A fresh look is needed, A quarterly
newsletter of the focal point for micro finance, Volume 4(1), pp. 3.
7. Giri, S. (2014). An Analysis of Financial Services using Technology modernisation of Indian Post
with Refer to Pondicherry Postal Division. International Journal of Advance Research in Computer
Science and Mgmt Stu., Volume 2(10), pp. 191 - 205.
8. Goel, R. (2004). Investment Options: Recent Trends. Chartered Financial Analyst, Volume X (4),
p. 44.
9. Hari Sundar, G., Jacob, P. (2009). Post Office Savings and its Relevance in Rural Areas - A Study
on the Impetus for Rural Investment with Reference to Kumbalangi in Cochin, Vidwat - The Indian
Journal of Management, Volume 2(1), pp. 26 - 34
10. Krishnamurthy, S. (2004). Households turn conservative, Business Line, Sept. 27.
Online Articles
25. Indian government launches e post office usability issue. from http://www.medianama.com/
26. e PLI through McCamish. from http://postbankofindia.blogspot.in
27. India post modernisation cum core banking solutions. from
http://www.indiapost.gov.in/it_modernisation_cm/Core%20Banking%20Solution_FAQs.pdf
28. Infosys newsroom report. India Post core banking and insurance. from
http://www.infosys.com/newsroom/features/Pages/india-post-core-banking-insurance.aspx
29. India Post: The past, present and future. Published November 11, 2010, Retrieved January 2, 2015,
from http://www.rediff.com/business: http://www.rediff.com/business/slide-show/slide-show-1-
india-post-the-past-present-and-future/20101111.htm
30. Samal, B. (2013, May 31). future-of-india-post. SA Post. Retrieved January 1, 2015, from:
http://sapost.blogspot.in/2013/05/future-of-india-post-written-by-by.html
31. Riyat, M. S. (2008, August 21). Globalisation of Indian Postal Service - A Study. Retrieved
September 18, 2008, from Globalisation of Indian Postal Service - A Study:
http://www.indianmba.com/Faculty_Column/FC892/fc892.html
Reports
33. Jain, R., Morris, S. & Raghuram, G. (2001). A project report on the India Post generating financial
resources for the country. IIM Ahmedabad.
34. Planning Commission (2011). letter No. F. No M 13040/26/2011 CIT and WG (Post) dated 20th
June 2011 by Working group on the postal sector to make recommendations on different policy
matters. Department of Post, Govt. of India.
35. DOPT. Business performance of Pondicherry Postal Division – A Report. DoPT, GoI.
36. UPU. ICTs, new services and transformation of the Post. Universal Postal Union.
37. DOPT (2012). Annual Report 2011 - 2012. Department of Posts, Govt. of India.
38. Palacios, R. & Sin, Y. V. (2001). India – The challenge of Old Age Income security. Report no.
23034, April 5. World Bank.
39. DOPT (2008). Project Arrow - India Post Blue Book. Department of Posts, GoI.
40. Raghavan, S. U. (2005). Overview of India Post and Perspective on Challenges Ahead.
Department of Posts, Ministry of Communications and IT, Govt. of India.
41. Vaswani, P. L. (2004). Future of India Post – Rural Dimension. DoPT, Govt. of India.
42. World Bank (2002). A Study on India Post. India Post 2010 conference: New Delhi.
Books
43. Avadhani V.A. (1996). Investment Management: First edition, Himalaya Publishing.
44. Hayes, B. E. (2008). Measuring Customer Satisfaction and Loyalty. ASQ Quality.
45. Rampal, M. K. & Gupta, S. L. (2005). Services Marketing. Pearson Education India.
46. Kulkarni, M. V. (2005). Consumer Marketing. Everest Publishing House: New Delhi.
47. Szwarc, P. (2005). Researching Customer Satisfaction and Loyalty. Kogan Page Pub.
48. Kotler, P., Young, D. & Kartjaya, H. (2004). Attracting Investors: A Marketing Approach to
Finding Funds for Your Business. John Wiley & Sons.
49. Kotler, P., Keller, K. & Shamma, H. M. (2012). Marketing Management. Upper Saddle River:
Pearson Higher Education.
50. Parameswaran, R. & Nedumchezian (2000). Investment Management. Prasanna Pub.
Websites
51. https://www.indiapost.gov.in
52. https://umu.diva.portal.org
53. https://www.ijimt.org
54. https://www.tarupublications.com/journals
55. https://www.ejournals.com
56. https://www.academicjournals.org
57. https://services.cept.gov.in
58. http://www.indiapost.gov.in
59. http://www.postbankofindia.org
60. http://www.keralapost.gov.in
Abstract
In the growing global economy and in the midst of the transformation of the Industrial era due to
Information Technology, leading us towards Industry 4.0, the time is to now start preparing to
study the changes in the Job expectations by the business industries. According to the Future of
Jobs Report from the World Economic Forum the skills required by jobs will change and the
current skill will be obsolete, hence it is essential to study the job requirements, so as the today's
workforce can be changed. Fast-paced technological innovations mean that current work places
soon will have to be shared with artificial intelligences and bots, so as to stay ahead of the curve.
The workforce needs to start now by adopting a commitment to lifelong learning and acquire the
skills needed to sustain in the future workplace of industry 4.0.
It is important for HR, as a function, to keep this in mind, after all, they’re not only building the
reputation of the company but also managing its most precious resource. And they need to ‘handle
with care!’
This research study is based on secondary literature published through articles and reports on
future of jobs due to the transforming of workplaces and employment needs.
Key Words: Industry, transformation, job, employment, skills.
Introduction:
“Machines are coming to take our jobs” has been a concern for hundreds of years, but it has raised
productivity and also fears that thousands of workers would be thrown out on the streets.
Innovation and technological progress have caused disruption, but they have created more
prosperity than they have destroyed. Proactively identifying and engaging high-risk and high-
potential talent is necessary to create a sustainable, capable talent pipeline. Yet today, businesses
are riding a new wave of uncertainty as the pace of innovation continues to accelerate and
technology affects every part of lives. It is known that robots are taking over thousands of routine
tasks and will eliminate many low-skill jobs in advanced economies and developing countries. At
the same time, technology is creating opportunities, paving the way for new and altered jobs,
increasing productivity, and improvingthe delivery of public services. While considering the scope
of the challenge to prepare for the future of work, it is important to understand that many children
currently in primary school will work in jobs as adults that do not even exist today.
Many jobs today, and many more in the near future, will require specific skills which will be a
combination of developmental know-how, problem-solving, and critical thinking as well as soft
skills such as perseverance, collaboration, and empathy. In the evolving gig economy the days of
staying in one job, or with one company, for decades are declining, employees may likely have
Objectives
• To study how we create talent with skills required by jobs in business and to understand the
effectiveness needed of jobs in future sector needs.
Research methodology:
In order to understand the emerging trend in jobs we have done systematic review literature and
secondary data study on jobs trends and new skill for the workplace. Research study for this paper
was done through various open sourced from internet searches and use of management journal
open databases such as EBSCO and websites of the corporate.
Literature Review:
The impact of globalization is expected to increase as digital technologies increasingly enable the
movement of labor virtually (Baldwin, 2018). We are seeing teleworking becoming mainstream,
the rise of the ‘digital nomad’ where a person can work from anywhere in the world, and
contingent employment models (Roos and Shroff, 2017)
First, technology is blurring the boundaries of the firm, as evident in the rise of platform
marketplaces. Using digital technologies, entrepreneurs are creating global platform–based
businesses that differ from the traditional production process in which inputs are provided at one
Kshitij Kashyap is the Vice President – Human Capital) – Optum Global Solutions.
https://www.peoplematters.in/article/outlook2020/core-job-skill-sets-that-are-set-to-dominate-
the-bfsi-sector-in-2020-24283RajniKhurana is currently the Chief Human Resources Officer, U
GRO Capital Rajni Khurana is currently the Chief Human Resources Officer, U GRO Capital
OECD Employment Outlook 2019 THE FUTURE OF WORK Highlights
Global commission on the Future of Work, Work for a Brighter Future International Labour Office
– Geneva: ILO, 2019
Sustainable Development Goals in Industry 4.0 Era: Action Plan of Nineteen Countries by Dr.
Rajen Mehrotra
2019 International Bank for Reconstruction and Development / The World Bank 1818 H Street
NW, Washington, DC 20433 Telephone: 202-473-1000; Internet: www.worldbank.org
Work for a brighter future – Global Commission on the Future of Work International Labour
Office – Geneva: ILO, 2019
Baldwin, R. (2018, April 30). Globalization is close to its ‘holy cow’ moment: Why we must
rethink our outdated ideas about international trade. Chicago Booth Review. Retrieved from
https://review.chicagobooth.edu/economics/2018/ article/globalization-close-its-holy-cow-
moment
Bloom, D. et al. 2016 Africa’s Prospects for Enjoying a Demographic Dividend, NBER
Working Paper No. 22560 (Cambridge, National Bureau of Economic Research).
Schwarz, M. et al. 2014 The Inverting Pyramid : Pension Systems Facing Demographic Challenges
in Europe and Central Asia, (Washington, D.C., World Bank)
Roos, G., and Shroff, Z. (2017, August 8). What will happen to the jobs? Technology-enabled
productivity improvement - good for some, bad for others. Labour & Industry: a journal of the
social and economic relations of work, 27(3), 165 -192.
United Nations Children's Fund (UNICEF). 2014. Generation 2030 - Africa, (Geneva).
United Nations (UN). 2015. World Population Prospects: The 2015 Revision, Key Findings and
Advance Tables, Working Paper No.241 (New York).
Abstract
This research work is an attempt to explore determinants an existing user’s intention to continue
with e-shopping, especially amongst Indian youth (15 to 24 age category). Existing knowledge
base on online shopping behavior and its contextual determinants were studied to understand the
theoretical advancements. Based on different constructs adopted by various researchers a
conceptual framework was developed and seven factors were proposed as the determinants of a
user’s intention to continue with online shopping. By using previously validated scales and
expert’s opinion method a structured questionnaire was developed. The responses were collected
and 707 completely filled responses were used for statistical tests. On the basis of statistical
support, Perceived Usefulness (PU) and Perceived Ease of Use (PEOU) were found to act as the
determinants of a user’s intention to continue with online shopping. Interestingly, Perceived Trust
(PT) and Perceived Risk (PR) were found to have insignificant impact on behavioral intentions
which is contrary to the previous research. These findings underline the need for reinvestigation
in trust and risk taxonomy and its impact on post adoption online shopping behavior. A dedicated
investigation on determinants for post adoption online shopping behavior amongst Indian youth is
the major contribution of this research work. Based on the findings, vital suggestions to e-retailing
companies were made and scope for future research activities was discussed.
Keywords: online shopping Behaviour, perceived usefulness, Indian youth, Online shopping
adoption
INTRODUCTION
During the last decade, the Indian economy witnessed some interesting developments. According
to the report by TRAI (Telecom Regulatory Authority of India), the cell phone population grew
from 120 million in 2008 to 1160 million in March 2018; resulting into a teledensity of 90.1%
(teledensity is number of telephone connections behind every 100 citizens). Secondly, the global
e-commerce giants such as Amazon and Wal-Mart entered Indian market with their ambitious
expansion plans. The Indian telecom industry witnessed the entry of ‘Reliance Jio’ which
propelled a price war, resulting in considerable decrease in cost of internet services. According to
a research report by Economic Times, India became the cheapest internet providing economy in
2018, with per GB (Gigabyte) cost of USD0.26 compared to the global average of USD8.53.
According to Assocham-PwC study, India’s internet data consumption is expected to grow at
72.6% CAGR (Compounded Annual Growth Rate) during 2017-22, making it, the largest
consumer of internet data across the world.
a) To identify and collate various determinants of post adoption online shopping behavior
on the basis of existing knowledge base.
b) To propose a framework for the post adoption, online shopping behavior and to seek
statistical support for the theorized framework in context of Indian youth.
Technology and human interactions domain has been researched by the scholars in consumer
behavior, psychology and technology research. Technology Acceptance Model (TAM) by (Davis,
1989) is considered as the seminal work in this context. This model provides studies the impact of
external factors on internal beliefs, attitude and intentions. The model conceptualized Perceived
Usefulness (PU) and Perceived Ease of Use (PEOU) as the determinants of attitude of a user,
which has a direct impact on behavioral intentions (BI). Although this model is based on classical
theories such as TRA (Theory of Reasoned Actions) by (Fishbein & Ajzen, 1975) and Theory of
Planned Behavior (TPB) by (Ajzen, 1985), it focuses more on actual adoption process of
technology rather than cognitive factors such as attitude and perceived behavioral control.
(Venkatesh & Davis, 2000) presented an extension of original TAM, which is coined as TAM 2.
In a longitudinal study, this model tests proposed relationships for voluntary and mandatory usage
in three steps (pre-implementation, one month after implementation and three months after
implementation). Two major dimensions (social Influence process and cognitive instrumental
process) were recognized as the predictors of behavioral Intentions. Discovery of antecedents of
Perceived Usefulness such as Subjective Norms (SN), Image, job relevance, output quality and
result demonstrability is the major contribution of this paper. It was proved that, Subjective Norms
(SN) acts as better predictor of Intentions when compared with perceived usefulness and perceived
ease of use, in mandatory settings and plays non-vital role in voluntary usage.
By considering dual entity of an online shopper (as a shopper and computer user), and using
construct of four different technology acceptance models, (Koufaris, 2003) presented Online
Shopping Acceptance Model (OSAM) to explain a user‘s adoption intention to return to a
particular e-vendor. Consideration of a user’s intention for unplanned purchase and related
behavioral engagements is the major contribution of this research work. Similar to this model,
(Zhou, Dai & Zhang, 2007) conceptualized Online Shopping Acceptance Model which includes
two dimensions of online shopping adoption determinants (online factors and shopping factors).
In order to develop conceptual framework, the validated relationships from about 203 research
papers on online shopping behavior were collated together. Based on the statistical strength
demonstrated by each of the determinants considered, seven factors were proposed as antecedents
of a user’s intentions to continue with online shopping. Based on the statistical support and Meta-
analysis results, various determinants of shopping intentions were considered and the conceptual
model for post adoption online shopping behavior is conceptualized, which is presented as Figure
no. 1.
Figure 1: Conceptualized Model for Post-adoption of Online Shopping
PU
PEOU
PEOU
Repurchase
BI
BI
Intensions
PT
WD
PT
PR
PR
PT
WD
PR
SQL PIQ
PIQ
Source: Lele & Maheshkar (2018)
Perceived Usefulness (PU): According to (Davis, 1989), PU is defined as “The extent to which a
person believes that using a particular system will enhance his or her job performance”. PU is one
of the core elements of TAM construct and is being widely considered as a predictor of behavioral
intentions by researchers from technology adoption (Al-maghrabi & Dennis, 2005 and (Celik &
Yılmaz, 2011). Our conceptual model considers PU as one of the determinants of a user’s
intentions to continue with online shopping.
H1: Perceived Usefulness (PU) has a direct impact on an existing user’s intentions to continue
with online shopping.
Perceived Ease of Use (PEOU): (Davis, 1989) defines PEOU as ‟ a person’s belief that using a
particular system will be free of effort”. In other words, it is the degree to which a user finds a
particular technology as suitable and by using the technology; a user’s task can get simpler. Similar
to PU, this factor is being widely considered as the predictor of behavioral intentions (Lin, 2007).
H2: Perceived Ease of Use (PEOU) has a direct impact on an existing user’s intentions to continue
with online shopping.
Perceived Trust (PT): PT is another widely used antecedent of a technology user’s intentions.
According to (Mayor, 1995) “Trust can be described as the belief that the other party will behave
in a socially responsible manner, and, by so doing, will fulfill the trusting party’s expectations
without taking advantage of its vulnerabilities' '. Various researchers tried to explore dimensions
of trust and trusting beliefs and tried to integrate these factors into the study construct (Murali &
Mallikarjuna, 2014), (Mao, 2010). Our study considers PT as one of the determinants of the user’s
intentions.
H3: Perceived Trust (PT) has a direct impact on an existing user’s intentions to continue with
online shopping.
Perceived Risk (PR): Perceived risk has been defined as “The consumer’s perceptions of the
uncertainty and the possible undesirable consequences of using the system” by (Tshin, Tanakinjal
& Sondoh, 2010). Similar to PT, we found a larger theoretical support for Perceived Risk as one
of the predictors of intentions. Although, the researchers such as (Agag & El-Masry, 2017) did
explore the relationship of PR with other variables such as PT, in our conceptual model, direct
impact of PR on intentions is considered.
H4: Perceived Risk (PR) has a direct impact on an existing user’s intentions to continue with online
shopping.
Website Characteristics (WC): Although, there is no specific definition of Website
Characteristics prescribed in the literature, (Korgaonkar, Silverblatt & Girard, 2006) defines it as,
“Proper information services with the vendor includes features like option to communicate with
the salesperson, reviews from other shoppers, third party evaluation and information exchange
with online vendor”. Since web interface is the first point of contact between a user and an e-
retailer, the process of customer engagement starts with a good website design and speed of
navigation. The ease at which a user can search and browse information it needs may have an
impact on intentions to continue with online shopping.
H7: Product Information Quality (PIQ) has a direct impact on an existing user’s intentions to
continue with online shopping
The objective of this study is to identify determinants of post adoption online shopping behavior
amongst India youth. For defining sample population, the definition of ‘youth’ by United Nations
(15 to 24 age bracket) is considered. The respondents were chosen by using non probability
convenience sampling in selected cities of India and were interviewed by a structured
questionnaire, developed by pooling of items from previously validated scale on various factors
included in the construct.
As a first step in designing the instrument, items from previously validated scales such as
(Venkatesh & Bala, 2008), (Koufaris, 2004), Venkatesh, Morris and Davis, 2003) and (Davis,
1989) were collated together. With the help of expert’s opinion method (5 experts each from the
online shopping domain and from the academia) and focused group interview method, the face
validity of the instrument was ensured. A pilot study was conducted on a sample of 143
respondents. The reliability score for the instrument with 43 items stood at 0.81, which is well
above the threshold prescribed by (Nunnally, 1978). The reliability score of the instrument
suggests that the scale is reliable in terms of producing internally consistent results.
Description %
Sex
Male 61%
Female 39%
Total 100%
Age
Below 20 16%
21 to 23 68%
Above 23 16%
Total 100%
Occupation
UG 21%
PG 71%
Working 8%
Total 100%
The reliability score for the data obtained from the entire sample stood at 0.859, which is well
above threshold prescribed by (Nunnally, 1978). To uncover the underlying structure of large
variables, Exploratory Factor Analysis (EFA) was applied. All 43 items related with seven
theorized independent factors were considered for the EFA. All items with KMO value more than
0.5 were retained and clubbed into various factors. It resulted in the creation of five factors with
an explanatory power of 56.6 %. The five factors extracted and their variance contributions are as
follows, Perceived Usefulness (14.9%).Web Characteristics (11.7%), Perceived Trust (11%),
Service Quality (9.7%) and Perceived Ease of Use (9%) respectively. The details of EFA are
shown as Table 2
Table 2: Total Variance Explained-Exploratory Factor Analysis
To verify the latent structure emerging out of EFA, the Confirmatory Factor Analysis (CFA) was
applied. The measurement model consisted of 21 items from five factors emerged under EFA. The
final measurement model obtained was close to good fit (Ȥ 2 =625.3, degrees of freedom [df]
=220, pb.000). Comparative fit index [CFI] =.92; root mean square error of approximation
[RMSEA] =.05 GFI=.92 NFI=.88, the value of Standardized Root Mean Residual [RMR] = 0.03.
The details of CFA are shown as Table 3.
Table 3: CFA Results and Comparison with Threshold Values
2. HYPOTHESIS TESTING
Based on the conceptual model, seven relationships were proposed in the initial stage of the study.
Seven factors (Perceived Usefulness (PU), Perceived Ease of Use (PU), Perceived Trust (PT),
Perceived Risk (PR), Web Characteristics (WC), Service Quality (SQL) and Product Information
Quality (PIQ) were proposed as the direct determinants of an existing user’ intention to continue
with online shopping.
As per the results obtained from EFA, only five factors emerged and two proposed factors such as
Perceived Risk (PR) and Product Information Quality (PIQ) got eliminated. As a result, H4 and
H7 were dropped from the model. All five factors emerged were tested for CFA and structural
equation. As per the structural equation and path analysis, following relationships were tested,
against the threshold prescribed by (AL-Majali & Nik Mat, 2011). The results of the proposed
hypotheses are as follows,
H1: The relationship between Perceived Usefulness (PU) and Behavioral Intentions (BI) was
found to be statistically significant as PU (CR=4.0, P=0.000) falls within the prescribed
threshold. It indicates that PU is a determinant of a user’s intention to continue with
online shopping. H1 accepted.
H2: SEM results validates the relationship between Perceived Ease of Use (PEOU) and
Behavioral Intentions (BI) as PEOU (CR=2.13, P=0.000) falls within the prescribed
Three factors (PT, WC and SQL) did emerge from EFA. However, the results of the structural
model indicate a non-significant impact of these factors on a user’s intention to continue with
online shopping. As a result, H3, H4 and H5 got rejected. The details of Hypothesis testing are
shown as Table 5.
Table 5: Path Testing
PT BI 1.053 Rejected
0.292
The objective of this research work was to find out the determinants of post adoption online
shopping behavior amongst Indian youth. On the basis of literature support, a conceptual model
was designed. Seven factors were proposed as the determinants of a user’s intention to continue
with online shopping. With the help of a structured questionnaire, data from 707 respondents was
collected. Out of seven determinants considered in construction, two determinants (Perceived Risk
and Product Information Quality) didn’t emerge from EFA. CFA confirmed the existence of five
factors, emerging from EFA. The structural equation model and path analysis indicates that,
Perceived Usefulness (PU) and Perceived Ease of Use (PEOU) are the two determinants of
behavioral intentions while three other factors namely, Perceived Trust (PT), Service Quality
Factor (SQL) and Web Characteristics (WC) were found to have insignificant impact on a user’s
intentions to continue with online shopping. The statistically proven relationships and paths are
shown as Table 6.
4 PT BI Reliability, Validity,
Path Rejected
EFA, CFA, SEM
5 WC BI Reliability, Validity,
Path Rejected
EFA, CFA, SEM
The result obtained by this study partially supports the historical findings by various researchers.
Validation of PU and PEOU as the determinant supports Al-maghrabi et al.( 2005) , (Celik &
Yılmaz, 2011) and (Lin, 2007) and (Halimi, Chavosh & Choshalyc, 2011) respectively. This
underlines the need for further investigation to arrive at India centric model of online shopping
adoption.
REFERENCES
a. Secondary reports and Industry Publications
➢ Agag, G. M., & El-Masry, A. A. (2017). Why do consumers trust online travel websites?
Drivers and outcomes of consumer trust toward online travel websites. Journal of Travel
Research, 56(3), 347-369.
➢ Ajzen, I. (1985) From intentions to actions: A theory of planned Behaviour. In J. Kuhl& J.
Beckmann (Eds.), Action control: From cognition to Behaviour. Berlin, Heidelber, New
York: Springer-Verlag. (pp. 11-39).
➢ Al-Maghrabi, T., & Dennis, C. (2005). What drives consumers' continuance intention to e-
shopping? Conceptual framework and managerial implications in the case of Saudi Arabia.
International Journal of Retail & Distribution Management, 39(12), 899-926.
➢ AL-Majali, M. & Nik Kmariah, N.M, (2010) “Applications of Planned Behavior Theory
(TPB) on Internet Banking Services Adoption (IBSA) in Jordan: Structural Equation
Modeling (SEM) Approach. The 2010 International Conference on Innovation and
Management, Penang, Malaysia, July 7- 10, 2010.
➢ Arora, N., & Rahul, M. (2018). The role of perceived risk in influencing online shopping
attitude among women in India. International Journal of Public Sector Performance
Management, 4(1), 98-113.
➢ Balamurugan, R., Sathish, M., & Sathyanarayanan, R. (2013). Consumer Behaviour
towards Online Shopping A Study with reference to Coimbatore City. TMC Academic
Journal,, 8(1), 43-53.
➢ Bentler, P. M. (1990). Comparative fit indexes in structural models. Psychological bulletin,
107(2), 238.
➢ Çelik, H. E., & Yilmaz, V. (2011). Extending the technology acceptance model for
adoption of e-shopping by consumers in Turkey. Journal of Electronic Commerce
Research, 12(2), 152
➢ Davis, F. D.(1989) ―Perceived Usefulness, Perceived Ease of Use, and User Acceptance
of Information Technology,‖ MIS Quarterly (13:3), 1989, pp. 319-339.
➢ Fishbein, M., and Ajzen, I. (1975) Belief, Attitude, Intention and Behaviour: An
Introduction to Theory and Research, Addison-Wesley, Reading, MA
➢ Ha, S., & Stoel, L. (2009). Consumer e-shopping acceptance: Antecedents in a technology
acceptance model. Journal of business research, 62(5), 565-571.
➢ Hair JF, William CB, Barry JB, Rolph EA (2006). Multivariate data analysis 5th Edition.
ABSTRACT
Customs authorities have traditionally been responsible for implementing a wide range of border
management policies. The Central Board of Excise and Customs (CBEC) is the key government
agency in India to overview policy planning and development of institutional infrastructure in this
area. They have introduced several trade facilitation related measures in the recent past in
accordance to the changing nature of border management.
Dealing with a large scope of turnover across the borders, customs authorities have a challenge of
balancing the level of controls and interventions vis-à-vis the time and costs required to complete
the established processes.
The primary objective of this applied research is to analyze the current trading across border
processes in India. This is discussed in relevance to index score of trading across border, time
taken and cost incurred to complete these activities published by World Bank every year in their
‘Ease of doing business’ report, comparing 190 nations. India ranked 63 in 2019 and its rank has
improved drastically in the recent years from 100 in 2016; as an effect of the measures taken by
Indian customs. This paper attempts to test the real life relevance between improving trading across
border processes to countries trade volumes. This secondary research works towards testing the
effects of these trade facilitation measures on the overall export and import volumes of India.
This research is an attempt to carry out an analytical research using a quantitative approach.
Analysis of historical records is conducted using secondary data. Correlational research design has
been adopted to carry out this research. Data is tested through statistical method using Statistical
Package for the Social Sciences (SPSS).
Key Words: Trading Across Borders Processes, Documentary Needs, Border Compliance, Ease
of Doing Business
INTRODUCTION
Every nation is attempting to boost their international trade volumes and trade facilitation is seen
as the prime factor in achieving this objective. Trade facilitation is a very broad concept and
includes any measure taken by the governmental bodies in line to boost the trade flow of the
country. Nations are taking various measures as per the guidelines issued by World Bank, World
RESEARCH OBJECTIVE
This research is focused on achieving the following objectives.
1. To study if, an increase in trading across border score from the ease of doing business report
correspondingly brings about an increase in the overall trade flows of India.
2. To analyze, will reducing the time and cost to complete the set processes of documentary needs
in export and import procedures result in higher volumes of import and export from India.
3. To observe whether, cutting down time and cost required to fulfill border compliance
procedures of export and import of consignment result in increasing the import and export
volumes of India.
LITERATURE REVIEW
3.1 TRADE FACILITATION
Grainger (2011) defines trade facilitation as measures taken or policies made with an aim to reduce
complexity and cost of international trade processes.It focuses at increasing the effectiveness of
the process governing movement of goods across national borders. At its broadest, trade
facilitation constitutes of any set of undertakings that has the potential of improving speed and
volume of trade flows (WCO, 2017).
The extent of what constitutes of trade facilitation is far from standard. Facilitation measures can
include a whole set of factors ranging from the local regulations and standards, logistics facility,
border policies, port infrastructure, export/import processes and others. Basically, facilitation
measures can be about any factory that can reduce the time and cost of exporting/importing a
consignment (WTO, 2015).
The empirical literature on trade facilitation shows that substantial gains has been achieved across
all nations/ geographical regions in bringing down the cost and time involved in the process (WTO,
2015; WTO and OECD, 2017). Adding on, cross-country studies by Calì and teVelde (2011);
Helble et al. (2012) demonstrate positive effects of trade facilitation efforts on exports.
Documentary needs factor records the time and cost linked with preparing and presenting all
documents required by numerous regulatory bodies at both exporting and importing country. It
attempts to measure the burden of documentary compliance in completing the trade process
(World Bank, 2019).
Documentary needs takes a holistic approach and covers time and cost for preparing documents,
getting approvals, printing, getting them signed and stamped, presenting them to the required
authority, submitting them online to respective authorities and obtaining certification from a
regulatory body. It is the aggregate time and cost of completing all documentary formalities
required in order to export/import a consignment. Such documentary needs can be of the based
out of any law in exporting or importing country or even can be by mere trade practice. The time
and cost spend on these documentary needs can be of the any stake holder involved in the process,
namely; exporter, custom broker, shipping line or freight forwarder (World Bank, 2017).
Time taken for exporting or importing a cargo is positively related to the number of requirement
to be completed and complexity of the procedures. One addition day taken to complete the
procedures can reduce the overall export value by 1 percent (Djankov et al., 2010).
TABLE 3.6
Title: India’s Trade performance statistics
Year 2019 2018 2017 2016
TABLE 3.6.1
Title: Table showing statistics of time taken and cost incurred for completing documentary
needs for export and import consignments
Year 2019 2018 2017 2016
TABLE 3.6.2
Title: Table showing statistics of time taken and cost incurred for completing border
compliance for export and import consignments
Year 2019 2018 2017 2016
RESEARCH METHODOLOGY
This research is an attempt to carry out an analytical research using a quantitative approach.
Analysis of historical records is conducted using secondary data. Correlational research design has
been adopted to carry out this research.
Extensive literature review is carried out to understand the concepts and identify independent and
dependent variables for this study. The research aims to discover and measure correlations among
the variables. Post listing out the research objectives, hypotheses were formulated to carry out the
research.
Purposive sampling method has been used to select the sample set. To keep the research relevant
to the current time period, sample set consists of data from last four years, from 2016 to 2019.
Secondary data on trade, export and import volumes used in the study are published by Director
General of Foreign trade (DGFT), prime authority in Indian government in this field. Data relating
to trading across border, time and cost factors of documentary needs and border compliance are
obtained from World Bank’s yearly reports.
RESEARCH HYPOTHESIS
Reviewing existing literature on this subject and in line with objectives of the research, below
hypothesis has been formulated.
First,
H0: There is no correlation between trading across border score and trade volumes of India
H1: Trading across border score and trade volumes of India are positively correlated
Second,
H0: Reduction in time taken and cost incurred in completing documentary needs will have no
effect on export and import volumes of India
H1: Reduction in time taken and cost incurred in completing documentary needs will increase
export and import volumes of India
Third,
H0: Reduction in time taken and cost incurred in completing border compliance will have no effect
on export and import volumes of India
H1: Reduction in time taken and cost incurred in completing border compliance will increase
export and import volumes of India
N 4 4
In conclusion, it can be said that time taken and cost incurred to complete establish processes of
documentary needs and export/import volumesare strongly inversely correlated and is significantly
proven. A decrease in time and cost factors has resulted in the increase in export/import volumes
of India. Hence, it can be stated that null hypothesis H0: Reduction in time taken and cost incurred
in completing documentary needs will have no effect on export/import volumes of India is rejected
and alternate hypothesis H1: Reduction in time taken and cost incurred in completing documentary
needs will increase export/import volumes of India is accepted.
N 4 4
N 4 4
Hence it can be concluded that, time taken and cost involved in completing the set processes of
border compliance have a very strong negative correlation with export/import volumes. Reduction
in these variables has led to the rise of export/import volumes for India. Therefore, null hypothesis
H0: Reduction in time taken and cost incurred in completing border compliance will have no effect
on export/import volumes of India is rejected and alternate hypothesis H1: Reduction in time taken
and cost incurred in completing border compliance will increase export/import volumes of India
is accepted.
REFERENCES:
Anderson, James E., and Eric Van Wincoop. (2004). “Trade Costs.” Journal of Economic
Literature 42 (3): 691–751.
Biljan, Jovanka and Trajkov, Aleksanda. (2012). Risk management and Customs performance
improvements: The case of the Republic of Macedonia. Procedia - Social and Behavioral
Sciences 44 ( 2012 ) 301 – 313.
Calì, Massimiliano, and Dirk Willem te Velde. (2011). “Does Aid for Trade Really Improve Trade
Performance?” World Development 39 (5): 725–40.
https://doi.org/10.1016/j.worlddev.2010.09.018.
Central Board of Excise and Customs (2015), Customs Manual.
Draper, Charles. (2000). “Reforming Customs Administration: The Unlikely Case of
Bangladesh.”World Bank.
http://siteresources.worldbank.org/INTRANETTRADE/Resources/Draper_customs.pdf
Dennis, Allen. (2010). “Global Economic Crisis and Trade: The Role of Trade Facilitation.”
Applied Economics Letters 17 (18): 1753–57.
https://doi.org/10.1080/13504850903409771.
DGFT Report data, Directorate General Of Foreign Trade. https://dgft.gov.in/more/data-statistics
Directorate General of Foreign Trade (2014). Trading Across Borders, A report on Improving Ease
of Doing Business‟ in India, Department of Commerce and Industry, Government of
India.
Djankov, Simeon, Caroline Freund, and Cong S. Pham. (2010). “Trading on Time.” The Review
of Economics and Statistics 92 (1): 166–173.
Fernandes, Ana M., Russell H. Hillberry, and Alejandra Mendoza Alcantara. (2015). “Trade
Effects of Customs Reform: Evidence from Albania.
Abstract
The objective of this paper is to study the progress of the Fourth Industrial Revolution (Industry
4.0) in the Indian manufacturing industries and what are the important challenges arising in
progress with relevance of Industry 4.0. Also this paper is one of the initial attempts to draw the
attention towards the overall challenges of the management in industry 4.0, as most of the recent
studies are discussing the technological shift and change in manufacturing processes considerably.
This paper also recommends empirical and qualitative investigation on core challenges of the
management in implementing necessary changes at the initial stage. It is done by integrating the
existing literature with the logical beliefs.
Overview
The global manufacturing is going through a deep digital transformation in the form of Fourth
Industrial Revolution. The growing capability of artificial intelligence and big data represent in
the Industry 4.0 era. The World Economic Forum in Davos has outlined that the Fourth Industrial
Revolution has the most exciting and promising technological innovations in the manufacturing
fields which includes Robotics, Nanotechnology, Machine Learning, 3D printing and most
importantly Artificial Intelligence. Through the advancement and diffusion of digital technologies
the manufacturing business is facing a challenge to its existing values and ideas radically. This is
an implication of "paradigm shift” in the manufacturing business. In the Fourth Industrial
Revolution the business has to operate in an environment of ambiguity, which make decision
making risky and if challenge take place the ability revisit decisions and modify them is imperative
to cut down the losses and reorient the business. To remain in the business and to be competitive
in the market place it’s imperative for the manufacturing industries to adopt the changes in line
with fourth industrial revolution by overcoming challenges.
Indian manufacturing industry are not fully geared up in the digitalization journey few industries
have started implementation and few are still in the wait and watch mode. In short we are in the
first phase of Industry 4.0. The speed of responses is critical. How quick you are to sense and
Research Questions
RQ1: What are the challenges facing by the manufacturing industries to adopt Fourth Industrial
Revolution (Industry 4.0)
Significance of Study
The purpose of this paper is to provide a comprehensive understanding of the Industry 4.0 concept,
with the aim of investigating the challenges, issues, and progress of Industry 4.0 implementation.
The fourth revolution is heavily based on the integration of physical, digital and biological
structures, especially the Internet and the industrial value chain (Hermann, Pentek, & Otto, 2016),
with significant impacts on people, businesses and governments (Schwab, 2015). Industry 4.0 is
also seen as closely related to advances in AI (Lee, Davari, Singh, & Pandhare, 2018), what makes
us confident that great opportunities exist for research on the confluence of intelligent
technologies, the development of human skills, and new organizational configurations, routines
and expected outcomes.
Research design
The research described in this paper has basically been carried out through various types of
literature review considering the electronic databases including scientific papers, journals, articles,
magazines, newspapers and consultants’ reports. Throughout the development of this paper, the
main purpose is to understand the scope of Industry 4.0 definitions and challenges of
manufacturing industries at the initial phase. The methodology enabled to achieve an overall
understanding of the field and current developments and practices described in multiple studies.
The Industry 4.0 term was coined by the German federal government in the context of its High-
tech strategy in 2011. It describes the integration of all value-adding business divisions and of the
entire value added chain with the aid of digitalization. In the “factory of the future”, information
and communication technology and automation technology are fully integrated. All subsystems,
including R&D as well as sales partners, suppliers, original equipment manufacturers and
customers, are networked and consolidated. In other words: all relevant requirements concerning
manufacturing and production capacity are already confirmed during product development. The
entire process can be holistically considered and managed in real time from the very first step,
including seamless quality assurance in production. (KPMG, 2016) According to KPMG (2016),
networking and transparency in manufacturing provide for a paradigm shift from “centralized” to
The manufacturing industries have experienced three main revolutionary phases and shown
significant changes in their workings and dealing one after another.
The First Industrial Revolution was the Steam Revolution during 1760-1840, a form of manual
production to the use of steam-powered engines and water as a source of power. Second Industrial
Revolution was the Electrical Revolution during 1870-1914 in this era the electrification of
factories contributed hugely to production. Third Industrial Revolution was the Electronics
revolution during 1950-1970 which was the revolution of IT and ITes industry growth and
establishments and the Fourth Industrial Revolution is the current revolution having conceptual
frame work that includes rising technologies such as Internet of Things (IOT), Artificial
Intelligence (AI), Big Data, Robotics, 3D printing. Machines will be flawlessly connected to each
other in a factory to manufacture goods, converse with each other for anticipating problems before
they arise and devise solutions without human interference.
The Term Industry 4.0 has been defined by various scholars and consultants as summarized below
in their own way, however the gist of the definition lies within the fourth revolution and
digitalization in manufacturing process which is the important revolutionary phase for the
industries.
i. The term Industry 4.0 stands for the fourth industrial revolution and is best understood
as a new level of organization and control over the entire value chain of the life cycle
of products, it is geared towards increasingly individualized customer requirements
(Koch et al. (2014))
ii. According to MacDougall, 2014 Industry 4.0 or Smart industry refers to the
technological evolution from embedded systems to cyber-physical systems. It connects
embedded system production technologies and smart production processes to pave the
way to a new technological age which will radically transform industry and production
value chains and business models.
iv. The fourth industrial revolution, focuses on the end-to-end digitization of all physical
assets and integration into digital ecosystems with value chain partners (Geissbauer et
al. 2016)
The Industry 4.0 concept (fourth industrial revolution) has become an increasingly important issue,
being discussed by academics, consultants and companies. However, despite the increasing
interest in the Industry 4.0 topic, it is still a non-consensual concept. There are still some vague
ideas about this new manufacturing paradigm, regarding its implications and consequences. Also,
most companies and factories are not aware of the challenges they may face when they want to
implement the Industry 4.0 background (Mohamed, M. 2018) . Nevertheless, it has been assumed
that there is still a misunderstanding in Industry 4.0 about this topic, especially about what involves
Industry 4.0 and its meaning and vision. This new production system allows companies to take
actions to prepare for this change, defining the most suitable manufacturing model and planning
the target roadmaps in order to address the new industrial paradigm’s challenges (MacDougall,
2014).
The modern manufacturing systems must be flexible/agile, reactive, integrated and cost-effective
simultaneously to enable industrial companies to stay competitive in an international competition.
To develop and run such complex systems, manufacturing enterprises need to design and engineer
their production processes appropriately and in a systematic way following structured approaches
based on sound principles and supported by efficient tools and methods (Schelechtendal et al.,
2015).
The management vision towards digitalization and stay ahead in the competition and
implementation of Industry 4.0 is the first step to enter in to the fourth Industrial Revolution. The
Companies are far from ready for the great leap towards full automation. This is a gradual process.
Companies first want to prepare their internal operations and consider automation the next logical
step.
The companies first need to develop their internal organisation and encounter the first problem
here. What does it actually mean? When is my company ready for further or full automation? We
cannot forget that automation through robots and cobots has existed for years. This automation
was mainly used in mass production, which no longer exists in that capacity. (Meurechy, De 2018)
The greatest challenge is collecting the right data, evaluating it correctly, and using it to reach
unquestionable, rational decisions.
Economic Environment marked by high degree of uncertainty “what will happen is uncertain” and
business is thus operating not on sound footing, but shifting gears. In this ability to adapt and
sensitivity are important if the organisation is to be able to respond to the changes. A digital
revolution can pole vault India’s economy and development. Globally organizations experiencing
VUCA in their respective businesses in terms of product costings, market demand and thereby
pressure on overall business operations. In addition to the VUCA environment the industries are
required to prepared for Industry 4.0 challenge.
As per World Economic Forum Report, 2016 he Fourth Industrial Revolution, combined with other
socio-economic and demographic changes, will transform labour markets in the next five years,
leading to a net loss of over 5 million jobs in 15 major developed and emerging economies. (WEF,
2016) in view of the VUCA world many organizations are on wait and watch mode on the fourth
industrial revolution.
We are living on the threshold of the next production revolution. Ongoing transformations in
industry and production activities are unprecedented in terms of their scale and impact. Emerging
technological developments are likely to bring widespread automation and irreversible shifts in
the structure of jobs, raising major challenges on labor markets and for policymakers responsible
for promoting the necessary skills and employment. (Kergroach, S. 2017)
To prepare for the future, various forward-looking groups operating at the international, national,
and organizational levels have offered suggestions on the types of skills required to stay ahead of
the game. For example, the Future of Jobs report has listed complex problem solving, critical
thinking, creativity, people management, and coordinating with others among the top ten skills in
2020 (World Economic Forum, 2016). Given the disruptive nature of digital technologies, how
should senior human resources practitioners manage organizational capabilities and develop
talents to be equipped with future skills? Besides simply achieving productivity gains and value-
adding, the ultimate goal must be to enable professionals, managers, and executives to develop the
skills that create value through innovations. (Hoe, S.L., 2017)
Looking at the present Skill and Age factor of the operating workforce in the manufacturing
industries and the required skill set for the Fourth Industrial Revolution there is huge gap.
Therefore the organizations are sensitizing turbulences in handling skill gap and transformation of
workforce in view of rigid labour laws and Labour Union resistance.
Subsequently managing workforce during the initial phase of fourth industrial revolution would
be a key challenge for the organization. Economic Environment marked by high degree of
unpredictability – what will happen is uncertain and business is thus operating not on sound
footing, but shifting sands. In this ability to adapt and sensitivity are important if the organisation
is to be able to respond to the changes.
In the present revolutionary phase the make-or-buy question has always been a concern of
complex nature which represents a fundamental dilemma faced by many companies. The cut-
throat competition compels all the manufacturing and services companies to re-evaluate their
existing processes, technologies, products and services in order to find an opportunity to positively
impact the bottom line by making strategically-drawn out make-or-buy decisions. The make-or-
buy decision is the act of making a strategic choice between producing an item internally (in-
house) or buying it externally (from an outside vendor) (Katikar, S., Pawar M., 2012)
One of the major challenge industries facing to take decision on Make or Buy Model of
manufacturing operations. Many organization are adopting for buy model. Buy model is nothing
but outsourcing entire manufacturing.
In the phase of fourth industrial revolution decision making on Make or Buy model will be a
challenging task for industries as it will add one more decision point.
In the Fourth Industrial Revolution, Human Resource Planning has become an integral part of
strategic planning of the Organization The adoption of Industry 4.0 will have a profound impact
on the manufacturing workforce. Organizations should start planning the transition today (KPMG
report, 2017). HRP provides inputs in strategy formulation process in terms of deciding whether
the organization has got the right kind of human resources to carry out the given strategy. HRP is
also necessary during the implementation in the form of deciding to make resource allocation
decisions related to organization structure, process and human resources. IT is seen that HRP play
as significant role as strategic planning and HR issues are perceived as inherent in business
management. The fourth industrial revolution is considered by many to be the most important
societal and economic trend in the world—one that will fundamentally change the nature of work,
business, and society in the coming decades (Arntz, Gregory, & Zierahn, 2016; Brynjolfsson &
McAfee, 2014; Ford, 2015; Frey & Osborne, 2013). These changes might lead to the elimination
of thousands of jobs and the disappearance or fundamental change of many current occupations.
At the same time, new occupations, new industries, and fundamentally new ways of work will
likely emerge (Brynjolfsson & McAfee, 2014). It seems clear that digitization and automation
might therefore be one of the most important challenging issues to shape the future career
development and Human Resource Planning in the era of Fourth Industrial Revolution (Industry
4.0)
Conclusion
After going through literature review on research material, articles, news, bulletin and business
conference conversations there will be a challenging face for the manufacturing industries to enter
in to the fourth Industrial Revolution (Industry 4.0) and the Organizations first step is important to
take a leap in the process. Challenges of Vision and other related issues are happen to come,
however the best strategy of the management will help organizations to overcome challenges to
have sustainable and long standing future for the organistion. Challenges summarize above i.e.
Vision, Skill, Labour issue, Business model or Manpower Planning are certainly achievable,
however structured implementation program has the key factor.
This paper offers direction for future research on management practices to identify challenge and
strategy to overcome in the context of industry 4.0. Empirical and quantitative research in the
future can validate the arguments made in this study based on the integration of literature and
logics.
References
Klaus Schwab. (2015). Shaping the future of the Fourth Industrial Revolution. A guide to building
a better world.
McKinsey and Company. (2015). Industry 4.0: How to navigate digitization of the manufacturing
sector. Tech. rep., McKinsey and Company, New York City, New York (NY).
World Economic Forum (2016), “The future of jobs – employment, skills and workforce strategy
for the fourth industrial revolution, global challenge insight report”, World Economic Forum,
Barbara M., Gabriele B., Stefano U., Domenico S., Stefano F. (2017). How will change the future
engineers' skills in the Industry 4.0 framework? A questionnaire survey. 27th International
Conference on Flexible Automation and Intelligent Manufacturing, FAIM2017,
Arntz, M., T. Gregory and U. Zierahn (2016), “The Risk of Automation for Jobs in OECD
Countries: A Comparative Analysis”, OECD Social, Employment and Migration Working Papers,
No. 189, OECD Publishing, Paris. http://dx.doi.org/10.1787/5jlz9h56dvq7-en, accessed on
15.02.2019
Douglas K. Gates (2017) Industry 4.0: It’s all about the people. KPMG report
Koch, V., Kuge, S., Geissbauer, R. and Schrauf, S. (2014). Industry 4.0: Opportunities and
challenges of the industrial internet. Tech. Rep. TR 2014-2, PWC Strategy GmbH, United States,
New York City, New York (NY).
Hoe, Siu Loon ( 2017) Thinking about how to think: cognitive skills to stay relevant in a digital
economy
Florin Bonciu, Evaluation Of The Impact Of The 4th Industrial Revolution On The Labor Market.
Romanian Economic and Business Review – Vol. 12, number 2
Mahapathro B.B. (2010), Human Resource Management, New Age International (P) Ltd, New
Delhi – 110002.
Baena, F., Guarin, A., Mora, J., Sauza, J., and Retat, S. (2017). Learning factory: The path to
ındustry 4.0. Procedia Manufacturing, Vol. 9, pp. 73–80.
Cordes, F., and Stacey, N. (2017). Is UK Industry Ready for the Fourth Industrial Revolution?
Boston, MA: The Boston Consulting Group. Boston, MA, USA, 2017.
Majid Ziaei Nafchi and Hana Mohelská (2018) Effects of Industry 4.0 on the Labor Markets of
Iran and Japan: The Economie Article
Dennis K., Nicolina P., and Yves-Simon G. (2017). Textile Learning Factory 4.0 – Preparing
Germany’s Textile Industry for the Digital Future. 7th Conference on Learning Factories, CLF
2017 Procedia Manufacturing, Vol. 9, pp 214 – 221
Fabian S. (2015). The Dynamics of the Digitalization and its implications for companies’ future
Enterprise Risk Management systems and organizational structures. MSc. in Business, Language
and Culture: Leadership and Management Studies Copenhagen Business School, 2015.
Lee, J., Davari, H., Singh, J., & Pandhare, V. (2018). Industrial artificial intelligence for industry
4.0based manufacturing systems. Manufacturing Letters, 18, 20-23.
Foidl H. and Felderer M. (2016). Research Challenges of Industry 4.0 for Quality Management. in
Innovations in Enterprise Information Systems Management and Engineering, Springer, pp. 121–
137.
Bhandari, L. Dubey, A, (2019) Emerging Employment Patterns of 21st Century India Laveesh
Bhandari and Amaresh Dubey Version: November 11, 2019
Hendrik U., Frank B., Egon M. (2017). Context related information provision in Industry 4.0
environments. 27th International Conference on Flexible Automation and Intelligent
Manufacturing, FAIM2017, Modena, Italy, pp.796-805
Katikar S., Dr Pawar M., (2012) Cost Analysis For 'Make-Or-Buy' Decisions for manufacturing
Industries
Stredwick John (2005), An Introduction to Human Resource Management, (2nd Edition), Elsevier
Ltd., Burlington, MA 01803.
Lee, J., Bagheri, B., and Kao, H. A. (2015). A Cyber-Physical Systems architecture for Industry
4.0-based manufacturing systems. Manufacturing Letters, Vol. 3, pp. 18-23.
Lu, Y. (2017). Industry 4.0: a survey on technologies, applications and open research issues.
Journal of Industrial Information Integration, Vol. 6, pp 1-10
Research paper
Education is an important determinant for economic welfare of any nation. An economy growth
over time, to innovate, to produce and for the growth of income requires a strong support of quality
education provided to the major share of population in an economy. Intellectual and skills capital
are important in a modern economy and educational institutions plays a central role in the
development of valuable skills through quality education.
The foundation of new knowledge, the latest discoveries, new knowledge, entrepreneurship and
innovation that trigger growth and prosperity of the individual as well as that of a nation depends
upon good quality education.
Through channelizing education with technology, it has become one of the means of obtaining
quality education. It renders better teaching and learning process in which students would be
equipped with better understanding their skills and talents. These will help the students to better
harass their resources towards their skills making with achieve proper personality development
among them. It can be achieved through an appropriate blend of their way of apprehending the
knowledge and the way of teaching process.
Historically, teaching comprised of range of activities including face to face presentations, visual
materials, paper based assessment, research and group activities etc. Now with recent perpetration
of technology Web 2.0 and applications in mobile have opened the opportunities of learning for
students in every facet of knowledge. The plethora of technological opportunities has widened the
scope of exploration of knowledge for students.
With an appropriate blend of technology quotient, the feature of traditional classrooms can be
achieved for better results and value addition. The blended learning concept is the incorporation
of technology in significant quotient keeping in view the merits of traditional teaching.
Blended Learning is the teaching practice that combines methods of traditional and online learning.
It is an established and rapidly growing instructional model that providing highly effective solution
Research Methodology: -
Primary Data Sources: - Questionnaire devised for students among Management, Information
Technology and Commerce Students under graduation level from different colleges.
SPSS Software used: - Factor Analysis
Secondary Data Sources: - Research papers, Journals, Reports, webliography links
Sampling: - Stratified Probability Sampling Method
Sample: - 60 respondents
Data Interpretation and Data Analysis: -
1. Smartphone is most common, almost 100%, PDA is not used by any student.
Count Column N %
Cell or digital phone 13 21.7%
Laptop 32 53.3%
Which of the following
PDA 0 0.0%
devices you use?
Personal Desktop 25 41.7%
Smart phone 59 98.3%
Factor Analysis
Factor analysis (FA) attempts to identify the variables, of factors which affect the effectiveness of
blended learning in learning.
Communalities
Initial Extraction
Learning retention 1.000 .941
Understanding of concepts 1.000 .969
Better Communication 1.000 .941
Practice and reinforcement 1.000 .825
Focus on real examples 1.000 .871
Interest in the subject 1.000 .705
Skill upgradation 1.000 .617
Quality of interaction with the instructor 1.000 .569
Personal devices help with my learning 1.000 .818
Quality learning 1.000 .960
Extraction Method: Principal Component Analysis.
F1factors F2 factors
Quality learning Personal devices help with my learning
Learning retention Practice and reinforcement
Better Communication Focus on real examples
Understanding of concepts Quality of interaction with the instructor
Interest in the subject
Skill upgradation
Reliability of data
Reliability Statistics
Cronbach's Alpha N of Items
.615 10
Item Statistics
Mean Std. Deviation N
Learning retention 3.10 1.804 60
Understanding of concepts 2.80 1.508 60
Better Communication 3.00 1.622 60
Interpretation: -
1. After the extraction of fixed two factors, F1 factors do not change.
2. F1 factors are considered as important elements considered by students for understanding
effectiveness of blended learning method in learning.
3. F1 factors are Quality learning, learning retention, Better Communication and
Understanding of concepts.
Recommendations and Suggestions: -
• As Blended Learning is a novel interactive concept, its awareness requires immense
important and action taken to create awareness
• It would an innovation which would radically change the traditional pedagogy for
prospective future technological change happening
• Students would benefit immensely with the integration of Blended Learning as it would
help them learn and grasp effectively
• Challenges of traditional pedagogy can be minimized or reduced through Blended learning
incorporation
• With incorporation of Blended learning, technology quotient required to be addressed can
be adapted as accordance to changing technological environment
• It would enhance the process of teaching pedagogy for teachers
• It would minimize the time and location challenges in today’s educational industry
• Various new technological trends of PDA, Social networking, Blended Classes can be
incorporated to minimize hurdles or challenges of effective learning
• It would help in good governance of teaching and learning practices
• Through personalized learning tactics, students can cultivate their own way of learning and
assimilate the knowledge for better development of skills and talents.
• Skill development will lead to better application of knowledge for practical utility
• Cognitive, conative skills will be developed in students
Bibliography: -
• Using Disruptive Innovation to Improve Schools through blended learning by Clayton M.
Christensen, Michael B. Horn, Heather Staker
• Leading E-Learning by William Horton
Webliography
ABSTRACT:
Onion is an important crop; whose perishable nature is the chief source volatility of its price. It
experiences a seasonal demand and is easily damaged by climatic conditions. This seasonal
demand is on an account of religious occasions (Chaumasa/Navaratras/Pitru Paksh). The supply-
chain for horticultural products, such as onion in India is highly fragmented, characterized by
heavy post-harvest losses, cost inefficiency and thus resulting in low producers’ share in
consumers’ price. The supply chain seems to be skewed away from producers for its inherent
features like small land holding, illiteracy, and poor access to organized finance, markets and
information. Suggestions such a storage facility, public private partnership and improving land
under irrigation will help stable price trends in onion.
INTRODUCTION:
Onion is one of the important crops and it is commercially grown in most of the countries.
Production and productivity not only depend upon area and cultural practices but also on genotype
and environment of the crop. The onion prices experience a very high volatility due to it being
perishable in nature. Onion is predominately a Rabi crop. Onion has an inelastic demand and also
the production is not stable of onion. Understanding onion price fluctuation is important to make
various polices and guidelines. China is the leading producer of onion having about 27% share.
India ranks second but has the highest area for cultivation of onion. India is one of the largest
exporters and hence India needs to improve its yields. India produces all the 3 types of onion i.e.
red, yellow and white. There was a tremendous increase in the area under onion i.e., from 246
thousand ha (1982-83) to 1116 thousand ha (2011-12). Although onion is produced in all the States
in India, the key onion producing states are Maharashtra, Madhya Pradesh, Karnataka and Gujarat.
LITERATURE REVIEW:
Seasonal Factors Resulting in Crop Loss
As per (India, 2012) production of onions in India reflected a steady uptrend in the
last six years except in the year 2009-10 when onion production dropped to 12.19
million tonnes from 13.59 million tonnes in the year 2008-09, due to cyclone and
unseasonal rains in Maharashtra, Gujarat and Karnataka accompanied by hailstorm in
November 2009. In year 2010-11 again due to unseasonal rains the production was
hit of late kharif crop in the aforesaid key onion producing states, which resulted in
increase in onion prices due to temporary shortages across the country. Prior years to
2006, it has been reported that due to unreasonable weather resulted in crop losses
during rabi 1997, kharif 1998 and kharif 2005.
Problem of Plenty
As per (India, 2012) the production estimates in onion tend to be misleading, as these are
based on nursery stage estimates. Further the yields are subjected to changes. Hence it has been
found out in the past that there is a pressing need to check and cross check acreage and adopt
more reliable yield estimates. This will go on a long way in formulating guidelines and
policies concerning domestic price support operations and exports.
Onion Consumption and Demand (Domestic)
As per (India, 2012) consumption of onion in India it is subjected to fluctuation on
account of religious considerations. A section of the society avoids onions totally and
a few others leave out onion from their daily diet during observance of religious
occasions (Chaumasa/Navaratras/Pitru Paksh). The consumption of onions tends to
decline when other fresh vegetables like carrot, radish and cucumber are available at
an affordable price. Thus, during the winters, onion consumption in North India is
comparatively lower.
Supply Chain Analysis of Onion
According to (Gummagolmath, 2012-2013) supply chain mainly focuses the flow of commodities
from farmer to the consumer involving producers, traders and retailers. In such model producers
are the vital link. Strengthening of farmers stake is also crucial so as to make him competitive
with other players of supply chain during transition state i.e. from unorganized to organized supply
chain. Undue advantage at the cost of farmers are taken by the better placed players in the
commercially organized supply chain. The challenge will be to integrate large number of small-
holder horticulture producers into the exiting supply chain and place them at par with other better
placed players. The supply-chain for horticultural products in India is highly fragmented,
OBJECTIVES OF STUDY:
• To study the impact of various factors affecting onion prices fluctuation.
• To study the change in onion prices during the period.
All India Monthly Average Wholesale Prices of Onion for Three Years
Unit (Rs./Qtl)
2016 2017 2018
January 1814.63 1105.87 3517.81
February 1542.71 1075.55 2862.89
March 1332.16 1070.99 2047.78
April 1244.94 1050.96 1466.91
May 1174.58 1014.8 1250.93
June 1183.86 1049.06 1340.9
July 1255.35 1079.22 1618.8
August 1253.67 2023.4 1666.86
September 1154.05 2061.55 1573
October 1111.64 2392.32 1646.47
All India Monthly Average Retail Prices of Onion for Three Years
Unit (Rs./Qtl)
2016 2017 2018
January 22.66 14.84 42.69
February 19.62 14.61 35.12
March 17.16 14.52 26.18
April 16.4 14.36 19.28
May 15.68 14.07 16.72
June 15.77 14.56 17.78
July 16.64 15.04 21.02
August 16.6 26.02 21.6
September 15.65 26.58 20.6
October 15.27 30.11 21.41
November 15.97 39.07 22.02
December 15.53 43.44 19.36
Source: (Ministry of Agriculture & Farmers’ Welfare Department of Agriculture, 2018)
Estimated Irrigated and Unirrigated Area by Size Classes under Onion Crop
Area (in Hectares)
Size
SR
Class (in ONION
NO
Ha.)
No. of Irrigated Unirrigated
Total
Holdings Area Area
Below
242577 20383.99 11573.39 31957.38
0.5
1 (0.5-1.0) 213167 37296.43 29030.91 66327.34
Marginal 455744 57680.42 40604.3 98284.72
2 (1.0-2.0) 288623 87779.83 80279.56 168059.39
Small 288623 87779.83 80279.56 168059.39
3 (2.0-3.0) 134534 54249.97 54008.83 108258.8
4 (3.0-4.0) 62554 29989.15 34034.7 64023.85
Semi-
197088 84239.12 88043.53 172282.65
Medium
5 (4.0-5.0) 38407 20861.52 23455.3 44316.82
6 (5.0-7.5) 42680 27803.83 32202.54 60006.37
(7.5-
17373 13828.83 16706.08 30534.91
7 10.0)
Medium 98460 62494.18 72363.92 134858.1
Model Summary
Model R R Square Adjusted R Std. Error of
Square the Estimate
Model Summary
Model R R Square Adjusted R Std. Error of
Square the Estimate
1 1.000a 1.000 .999 15.31427
All India Monthly Average Wholesale Prices of Onion for Three Years
Descriptive Statistics
N Minimu Maximu Mean Std.
m m Deviation
Y2016_WP 12 1111.64 1814.63 1283.5183 202.29111
Y2017_WP 12 1014.80 3549.30 1722.5342 914.97796
Y2018_WP 12 1250.93 3517.81 1846.5258 673.61737
Valid N
12
(listwise)
The highest volatility in the wholesale monthly prices of onion was witnessed in the year 2017,
with standard deviation of 914.97796. The lowest standard deviation was witnessed in the year
2016, which was 202.29111. The year 2016 saw the lowest average price of 1283.5183. 2018 was
marked with highest mean wholesale monthly prices of which 1846.5258 which indicates a large
number of months were centred with high onion price throughout the year.
All India Monthly Average Retail Prices of Onion for Three Years
Descriptive Statistics
N Minimu Maximu Mean Std.
m m Deviation
Y2016_RP 12 15.27 22.66 16.9125 2.14848
Y2017_RP 12 14.07 43.44 22.2683 10.61723
Y2018_RP 12 16.72 42.69 23.6483 7.67856
Valid N
12
(listwise)
400000
300000
200000
100000
0
(0.5-1.0)
(1.0-2.0)
(2.0-3.0)
(3.0-4.0)
(4.0-5.0)
(5.0-7.5)
(7.5-10.0)
(10.0-20.0)
20 & Above
Below 0.5
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
ONION No. of Holdings ONION Irrigated Area ONION Unirrigated Area ONION Total
The number of holdings are classified as marginal where the holding of land is below 0.5 to 1
Hectares of land, small holders are between 1 – 2 hectares of land, semi-medium ranges between
2-4 hectares of land, medium ranges between 4-10 and large is 10 and above.
Marginal and small farmers in case of onion production owned irrigated land over unirrigated land.
This was opposite in case of semi-marginal, medium and large farmers, where a large number of
farmers owned unirrigated land.
BIBLIOGRAPHY:
Ashok Gulati, P. R. (2017). Making Rapid Strides-Agriculture in Madhya Pradesh: Sources,
Drivers, andPolicy Lessons. Indian Council for Research on International Economic
Relations.
Bagalkoti, T. N. (2017). Growth in Area, Production and Productivity of Horticultural Crops in
Karnataka. Journal of Management and Development Studies.
Bank, Y. (n.d.). DOUBLING FARMERS’ INCOME: Issues and Strategies for Maharashtra State.
NABARD.
(2017). Centre for Indian Agricultural Marketing Intelligence . Website –macp.gov.in.
Gummagolmath, D. K. (2012-2013). Trends in Marketing and Export of Onion in India. Jaipur:
National Institute of Agriculture Marketing.
India, M. I. (2012). Baseline Data for Potato and Onion. Marketing Intelligence System in India.
Ministry of Agriculture & Farmers’ Welfare Department of Agriculture, C. &. (2018).
Horticultural Statistics at a Glance 2018. Government of India.
Pankaj Setiya, E. M. (2018). A Report on the study of Onion Value Chain. PUNE: RESERVE
BANK OF INDIA .
(February 2012). Price and Competition Issues in the Indian Markets in Onion. Australian Centre
for International Agriculture Centre.
PWC. (n.d.). Blockchain, a catalyst for new. PW(n.d.). The Objective of Income stabilization of
Onion Producers.
ABSTRACT:
Sugarcane is an important cash crop in India with Uttar Pradesh as the largest producer of
sugarcane followed by Maharashtra. Maharashtra has a high recovery rate of sugarcane as
compared to Uttar Pradesh making it the largest producer of sugar. There is a large contribution of
Uttar Pradesh to khandsari and gur production as compared to sugar. Sugar prices in India are
assessed through FRP (Fair and Remunerative Price) and SAP (State Advised Price). the large
contribution of Uttar Pradesh to khandsari and gur production as compared to sugar. The central
government has entitled the state government the power to regulate the distribution- movement
system of sugarcane. There are restrictions on the on the trade of sugar byproducts across inter-
state boarders. The prevailing weather condition and prices that farmers get for sugarcane
determines the volatile nature of sugar supply and hence the price. Suggestions to the volatile
nature of sugar prices include the use warehouse bills and technology in micro-irrigation system,
sucrose content detection.
INTRODUCTION:
India being the second largest country in the world, whose sugar industry impacts the rural
livelihoods of sugarcane farmers, 60 million in number, with about 600,000 workers directly
employed in the sugar factories. 12.5 million acres of land is under the cultivation of sugar which
is produced in 11 states and delivered to 530 operating mills. The domestic need of sugar market
extends to reach 24.0 million metric tons in India. There are a large number of small farmers (less
than 0.5 acre),with low cane yields (28 mt/acre as compared to with 33 mt/acre in the USA), with
a large number of small mills (50,000 tons of sugar by mill on average) and short duration sugar
(125-130 days) with high cost of production.
The largest producer of sugarcane in India is Uttar Pradesh (36.5 percent in 2012-13) followed by
Maharashtra (22.0 percent). Maharashtra is the largest producer of sugar in India (35.9 percent)
followed by Uttar Pradesh (25.6 percent). This is because the high recovery rate of Maharashtra
and the large contribution of Uttar Pradesh to khandsari and gur production as compared to sugar.
The 2012-2013 drought portrayed the need to develop sugarcane crops in the vicinity of water
source. Sugarcane is water intensive crop. In Karnataka and Maharashtra, the pricing policy of
sugarcane has semblance with revenue sharing formula and the sugar industry is growing in spite
of severe water shortage. For long term growth of sugar industry in Karnataka and Maharashtra, it
is necessary to adopt change in the pattern of sugarcane cultivation and shift to drip irrigation.
The sugar consumption for the year 2019-2020 is at 27.5 MMT, four percent above the current
year (2018-2019) estimate of 26.5 MMT. India has witnessed a strong demand for sugar from
wholesale buyers, food processing units, restaurant, as a result of growing population, rising
income and changing consumption patterns. Two-third of total sugar consumption in India is
LITERATURE REVIEW:
The Sugarcane (Control) Order, 1966:
Under the Sugarcane (Control) Order, 1966, the price of sugar is fixed annually.
The main players for the sugar sector:
GOI (Government of India):
he distribution of sugar to the Public Distribution System (PDS), sanction of soft loans, and the
responsibility to subsidize sugar production and distribution lays on The Ministry of Consumer
Affairs, Department of Food and Public Distribution.
• The central government’s fair and remunerative sugarcane price (FRP) is calculated by a
decentralized agency under the Ministry of Agriculture and Farmers Welfare by the name
The Commission for Agricultural Costs and Prices (CACP).
• The sugar prices are approved by the Cabinet Committee on Economic Affairs (CCEA)
which is chaired by the Prime Minister of India.
• Under the Sugar Development Fund (SDF) which was enacted in 1982, empowered the
central government to fund research and extend and improve technological improvements
in the sugar sector. Since 2008, it is also empowered to fund debt restructuring and
distribution of soft loans to sugar mills.
• The Indian Council of Agricultural Research (ICAR), an autonomous body functions to
coordinate agricultural education and research in India and corresponds and reports to the
Department of Agricultural Research and Education, Ministry of Agriculture.
The Government of India (GOI), decides annual FRP, after consulting Commission for
Agricultural Costs and Prices (CACP) and confirming with state government and state
The Rangarajan Committee Report, appointed by the GOI recommended reforming sugar
policy by connecting sugarcane price and the price of sugar on the domestic market. The
lack of this connection is a major issue and creates regular imbalance in demand and supply
of sugar.
SAP (State Advised Price): The next level pricing of cane is also written down by many states. It
is higher than the FRP by 30-35%. In case of the declaration of cane prices under SAP, it
overpowers the FRP, in spite of prevailing market price.
SAP is announced in October-November but may suffer delay of a couple of weeks. The delay
occurs when there is no common ground over the sugar price incase of cane growers want a higher
price whereas mill worker resists the same.
Sugar Marketing Policy:
The current sugar industry is subjected to control and regulation under state government, for
instance sugar industry licensing, cane area reservation, adoption of the cane price formula,
specified cane procurement areas for sugar mills, and cane pricing. Also the public distribution
system (PDS) operation devised by state/Union Territories, and the Central Government provides
a fixed subsidy at INR 18.50 per kg for families who will be provided 1 kg of sugar per family per
month under the Antyodaya Anna Yojana (AAY).
Trade Policy:
To anticipate an increase in the sugar surplus, as state The GOI has come out with policy measures
namely:
• To stabilize fluctuating domestic sugar prices.
• To prevent imports at a subsidized rate.
• To encourage surplus stock export.
• To improve cash flow and profits of sugar mills.
The measures implemented were as follows:
• By implementing a limit to the stock holding period for 2 months beginning from February
2018 through March 2018.
• By doubling the duty on import of white and raw sugar by a 100 percent without an end
date.
• Eliminated the duty on export from 20 percent to zero percent on March 20, 2018.
• Two MMT of exports was introduced under the Minimum Indicative Export Quota
(MIEQ) scheme
• The Duty-Free Import Authorization (DFIA) scheme3, allows of white sugar until
September 2018, under which exporters were permitted to import with zero duty for a
period of three years.
•
The sugar mill sector and its laws and regulations:
Determination of cane area and its procurement (Central and State): According to
(Meriot, August 2016), The Central Sugarcane (Control) Order,1966 (6), makes it essential
Minimum mill distance criteria: (Meriot, August 2016), suggest that under the Central
Sugarcane (Control) Order, 1966 (6-A), a new sugar factory shall not be permitted to set
be established within the radius of 9.3 miles (15 km) of any existing sugar factory. The
distance of such approval may be with prior approval of the Central Government. It
suggests that the minimum distance must be followed and may extend the its limits but
may not reduce in limits. In the states of Maharashtra, Punjab and Haryana, the minimum
distance is kept at 15.5 miles (25 km).
Interstate regulations for the trade of sugar byproducts: According to (Meriot, August
2016), there are restrictions on the on the trade of sugar byproducts such as molasses and
bagasse. This was implemented to prevent speculation on prices of these products. For
instance, the of molasses can be extended to produce electricity and hence State
Governments fix quotas for different end uses and imposes restrictions regarding
movement or trade across state borders.
OBJECTIVES OF STUDY:
i. To study the effect of sugar prices on the sugar industry.
ii. To study trends in sugar prices.
RESEARCH METHODOLOGY:
The research methodology adopted is the use of secondary data through external sources. The
external data sources used is in the form of published sources as well as government sources and
external databases.
Data Collection:
Trends in Sugarcane: Area, Production and Yield
FRP of Sugarcane
Sugar Season FRP (Per quintal)
2010-2011 139.00
2011-2012 145.00
2012-2013 170.00
2013-2014 210.00
2014-2015 220.00
2015-2016 254.00
2016-2017 257.00
Source: Commission for Agriculture Cost and Prices
IC UC IC UC IC UC IC UC IC UC
DATA ANALYSIS:
Relationship between area production and yield of sugarcane:
a. Case of Uttar Pradesh:
Where the dependent variable is yield and independent variable is area and production.
Coefficients:
Model Unstandardized Standardized t Sig.
Coefficients Coefficients
B Std. Beta
Error
(Constant) 59728.221 722.809 82.633 .000
Here, the linear regression model for the variables is demonstrated by:
b. Case of Maharashtra:
Where the dependent variable is yield and independent variable is area and production.
Here, R = .953 for Uttar Pradesh which indicates a very high degree of co-relation between the
three variables.
Coefficients:
Model Unstandardized Standardized t Sig.
Coefficients Coefficients
B Std. Beta
Error
(Constant) 104934.514 5255.973 19.965 .000
Here, the linear regression model for the variables is demonstrated by:
Yield = 104934.514 + 1.106 (Sugarcane Production) -89.512 (Sugarcane Area)
The negative relationship indicates yield is inversely proportional to area under sugarcane
production.
c. Case of India:
Where the dependent variable is yield and independent variable is area and production.
Model Summary of Regression using SPSS:
Model R R Square Adjusted R Std. Error of
Square the Estimate
a
1 1.000 1.000 .999 37.54270
Coefficients:
Model Unstandardized Standardized t Sig.
Coefficients Coefficients
B Std. Beta
Error
(Constant) 68168.973 522.618 130.437 .000
Here, the linear regression model for the variables is demonstrated by:
Yield = 68168.973+ .199 (Sugarcane Production) -13.580 (Sugarcane Area)
The negative relationship indicates yield is inversely proportional to area under sugarcane
production.
200
100
0
2010-11 2011-12 2012-13 2012-13 2014-15 2015-16 2016-17
Here paired sample T-Test was used to find the relationship between the Installed Capacity (IC)
and Utilized Capacity (UC) of Uttar Pradesh and Maharashtra with India.
Comparing Uttar Pradesh and Maharashtra with India in terms of its capacity:
The difference in the means of IC and UC are recorded. The co-relation between the two variables
of Uttar Pradesh is -.921(very high negative co-relation), for Maharashtra is -.516 (moderate
negative co-relation) and for India -.617 (moderately high negative co-relation). The planned
There is a wide difference between SAP and FRP as seen above. In the year, 2016-2017, SAP was
noted to be 22.7 percent higher than FRP and 9.6 percent higher compared with RSF, (Commission
for Agricultural Costs and Prices, 2018-2019).
ii. As per the analysis the difference in the means of the Utilised Capacity (UC) of
Maharashtra was lower than Uttar Pradesh and India. This indicates scope to increase
the shelf life, in the transportation cycle loss in case of sugarcane to sugar mills. This can
be treated using digital technology. This shall prove beneficial to sugarcane growers in
case of identifying the crops which have to be cut first and sent to the mills. This will
curtail wastage and will enhance the underutilised capacity of sugar mills.
iii. Sugarcane is a water-intensive crop and meets challenges of producing it with less water.
Sugarcane growing regions experience adverse impact of drought. Thus, it is
recommended to promote micro-irrigation technology s such as drip irrigation for
sugarcane cultivation on a larger scale to conserve water resources and improve
production.
iv. Farmers concern in lack of transparency in the existing procedures of measuring sugar
recovery. The sugar mills have to determine transparency in weighing sucrose levels.
The use of technology can be employed for the measurement of sucrose content.
CONCLUSION:
Sugar is an essential commodity of consumption. The sugarcane used to process sugar is grown
by a large number of marginal farmers. The consumption of sugar has increased in the recent years.
Two-third of total sugar consumption in India is accounted to wholesale buyers. In spite, of the
prevailing FRP, many states have included the provision of SAP which accounts much higher than
FRP. The suggestions for the same include the use of warehouse receipt for financing, the use of
technology for micro-irrigation and detecting sucrose content.
BIBLIOGRAPHY
Aradhey, A. (2018 ). India Sugar Annual 2018 . USDA Foreign Agricultural Service.
Ashwini B V. (2018). A Study on Smart Irrigation System Using IoT for Surveillance of Crop-
Field. International Journal of Engineering & Technology, 370-373.
Commission for Agricultural Costs and Prices. (2018-2019). Price Policy for Sugarcane. New
Delhi: Commission for Agricultural Costs and Prices.
Indian Sugar Exim Corporation limited. (January 2015). Review of the financial health of the
Indian sugar mills. Indian Sugar Exim Corporation limited.
Meriot, A. (August 2016). Indian Sugar Policy : Government role in production and transition
from impoter to expoter. Maryland, USA: Sugar Expertise LLC .
(August 2013). Price Policy for Sugarcane. New Delhi: Commission for Agricultural Costs and
Prices.
Rahil Shaikh. (2020, January 08). How Sugar Mills Can Avoid Margins Turning Sour. Retrieved
from https://www.ncdex.com:
ABSTRACT
Organizations consider employees as the backbone and thus every day brings in new strategies to
motivate and encourage them to work more efficiently. One important strategy which is recently
hitting the market is 4-days work week. The purpose of this research is identified if India is ready
to adopt shorter work week culture. It is based on findings from qualitative research undertaken in
Dec 2019. This Paper will provide an overview of advantages as well as disadvantages of a
compressed work week, furthermore a brief Insight on essential factors that may serve as building
or breaking parameters for the implementation of 4-day work week culture in India.
Keywords: 4 days’ work week, Work Hours Impact on Health, Compressed work week, Shorter
Work week, Increased Productivity, Workdays Culture, Reduced Work Week
INTRODUCTION
Four-day week work is a method where the five days working schedule is compressed into four
days module by adding an extra two hours of compensation in every working day. i.e. to work 4
days a week 10 hours per day. By this, the employee gets a three day weekend, but still, the
working hours of one extra day are also covered by working extra hours.4-day work week
strategy is attracting most of the employers as well as employees as it satisfies the business
perspective as well as gives a good work-life balance too. When provided with flexible schedules
employers
"See an increase in productivity, it does have a positive impact on engagement. People who have
flexibility feel reciprocity. They want to give back to the company”, (Bill Castellano, professor at
Rutgers' School of Management and Labor Relations, 2019). Some employers have employees
working for 10 hours per day, while others shorten the number of hours worked each week. Some
companies design the schedule in such a way that the employee ends up doing eight nine-hour of
shift for three days and one eight-hour day and gets every other Friday off.
(i) Why India Should Adopt The 4-Day Work Week?
Working longer doesn't mean working better. A shorter work week will help improve efficiency
and quality of life Since the Industrial revolution, one thing has remained constant -- a belief that
working longer and harder begets great achievement. But if the benefits of new technologies are
to be evenly spread around, employees can work less hours a week and employers can benefit from
the increase in productivity and better attendance.
(ii) Pros - 4 Day Work Week:
• It motivates employees to work harder
• It does not disturb the flow of work
• It helps employees to take a break from Commuting to the workplace
• It helps the employee to choose their own Four-day work week strategy
LITERATURE REVIEW
2.1 Four – Day Week Pays Off by UK Business (Henley Business School, July 2019)
Henley’s ‘Four Better or Four Worse?’ paper exploring this growing business trend found that of
those businesses who have already adopted a four-day working week, nearly two-thirds (64%)
have reported improvements in staff productivity. The research also found that this working style
increased overall quality of life for employees, with over three quarters (78%) of implementing
businesses saying staff were happier, less stressed (70%) and took fewer days off ill (62%). Almost
two thirds (63%) of employers said that providing a four-day working week has helped them to
attract and retain talent, less stressed (70%) and took fewer days off ill (62%). Almost two thirds
(63%) of employers said that providing a four-day working week has helped them to attract and
retain talent.
2.3 Reduced Work Hours as a means of Slowing Climate Change (David Rosnick, Center for
Economic and Policy Research, February 2013)
As productivity grows in high-income, as well as developing countries, social choices will be made
as to how much of the productivity gains will be taken in the form of higher consumption levels
versus fewer work hours. In the last few decades, for example, western European countries have
significantly reduced work hours (through shorter weekly hours and increased vacation time) while
the United States has not. Western Europe had about the same hours worked per person as the U.S.
in the early 1970s, but by 2005 they were about 50 percent less. This choice between fewer work
hours versus increased consumption has significant implications for the rate of climate change.
2.4 Finding Child Care When You Don't Work 9 To 5 (Robin McClure , Sept (2019)
It's hard enough to find quality childcare when you work traditional weekday hours. But according
to a 2014 survey by the National Study of Employers, there is a decline in the number of companies
awarding flexible work arrangements and more and more employees have to deal with rotating
shifts, required overtime, evening hours, and out-of-town travel.1 Finding childcare to cover these
non-traditional work schedules, or hours if you work more than one job, can be very difficult for
many parents.
2.5 Go Home on Time! Working Long Hours Increases Your Chance Of Having A Stroke
(Libby Sander, June 2019)
Australia is in the bottom third of OECD countries when it comes to working long hours, with 13%
of us clocking up 50 hours or more a week in paid work. These long hours are bad for our health.
A new study from France has found that regularly working long days of ten hours or more
increases our risk of having a stroke. Other research has found that employees who work long
work hours are likely to have poorer mental health and lower-quality sleep. Long working hours
have also been shown to increase likelihood of smoking, excessive drinking, and weight gain.
Long hours are bad for our health and effects of regular long work hours on our health are wide-
ranging.
2.7 6-Hour Workday (Steve Glavesk, Harvard Business Review, December 11, 2018)
The eight-hour workday harkens back to 19-century socialism. When there was no upper limit to
the hours that organizations could demand of factory workers, and the industrial revolution saw
children as young as six-years-old working the coal mines, American labor unions fought hard to
instill a 40-hour work week, eventually ratifying it as part of the Fair Labor Standards Act of 1938.
So much has changed since then. The internet fundamentally changed the way we live, work, and
play, and the nature of work itself has transitioned in large part from algorithmic tasks to heuristic
ones that require critical thinking, problem-solving, and creativity.
RESEARCH MEHTODOLOGY
(i) Purpose of Research
4-day work week had a positive impact on various U.S companies, it enabled a better work-life
balance to improve productivity and creativity in employees, still client deliverables are top
priority for the company.
Despite the widespread enthusiasm for a four-day week, it is not convincing enough for India that
such a schedule is beneficial for employees or businesses.
The Study is about analyzing and assessing if 4 days ‘work week culture is feasible, and can it be
the next big thing in INDIA?
(v) Limitations
The research is limited to the individual awareness, perception & experience about 4 days’ work
culture. Also, the survey respondents will be relevant but limited.
For the purpose of this research, the data will be collected from the below mentioned two sources
1) Primary Data Sources and 2) Secondary Data Sources.
O Primary Data
Primary data for research was collected through Survey. Comprehensive and structured
questionnaire was designed for the purpose of understanding the factors that should be considered
to have 4 days work culture in India
.
▪ Sample size:
For the present study 556 respondents were selected.
▪ Sampling technique:
Snowball sampling technique was used.
▪ Sample Area:
Working professionals (Mumbai Region)
HYPOTHESIS TESTING
1st Chi Square Test
Null Hypothesis: Gender and 4days’ work week are independent
Alternate Hypothesis: Gender and 4 days’ work week are dependent
Table RT: 1
Gender * Preference 4 days’ Work week Crosstabulation
Preference 4 days’ work week Total
Maybe No Yes
Gender Female Count 27 82 195 304
Expected Count 25.2 93.5 185.4 304.0
Male Count 19 89 144 252
Expected Count 20.8 77.5 153.6 252.0
Total Count 46 171 339 556
Expected Count 46.0 171.0 339.0 556.0
Chi-Square Tests
Value df Asymp. Sig. (2-sided)
a
Pearson Chi-Square 4.527 2 .104
Likelihood Ratio 4.516 2 .105
N of Valid Cases 556
Level of significance 0.05 P Value - 0.104001184
Interpretation: As the level of significance 0.104 which is greater than the benchmark i.e. 0.05
hence, we accept the null hypothesis, thus we can conclude that there is no relationship between
Gender and 4 days’ work week preference
Chi-Square Tests
Value df Asymp. Sig. (2-sided)
Pearson Chi-Square 3.901a 3 .272
Likelihood Ratio 3.893 3 .273
N of Valid Cases 556
Null Hypothesis: Marital Status and 4days’ work week are independent
Alternate Hypothesis: Marital Status and 4 days’ work week are dependent
Interpretation: As the p value > 0.05 which 0.272 hence, we accept null hypothesis, thus we can
conclude that there is no relationship between marital status and 4 days’ work week preference
Table RT: 3
VAR00001 * VAR00002
Crosstabulation
VAR000 Tota
02 l
.00 4.00 5.00 6.00
Count 1 0 0 0 1
Expected .3 .5 .2 .1 1.0
Count
VAR0000 No Count 127 253 94 48 522
1 Expected 138.9 244.1 92.9 46.0 522.0
Count
Ye Count 20 7 5 1 33
s Expected 8.8 15.4 5.9 2.9 33.0
Count
Null Hypothesis: Married People with children and 4days’ work week are
independent
Alternate Hypothesis: Married People with children and 4days’ work week are
dependent
Interpretation: As the p value < 0.05 which 0.01 hence, we accept alternate hypothesis, thus
we can conclude that there is relationship between Married People with children and 4 days’
work week preference
4th T - Test
H0: preference to do overtime is same among male and female
H1: preference to do overtime is significantly different from male and female
Table RT: 4
Independent Samples Test
Levene's t-test for Equality of Means
Test for
Equality
of
Variances
F Sig. T df Sig. Mean Std. 95%
(2- Differe Error Confidence
tailed) nce Differe Interval of the
nce Difference
Lower Upper
Equal 5.0 .025 7.54 554 .000 .49990 .06623 .36981 .62998
VAR variances 36 8
assumed
Interpretation: Since p < .001 is less than our chosen significance level α = 0.05, we can reject
the null hypothesis, and conclude that the that the preference to do overtime is significantly
different among male and female
5th T – Test
H0: preference to compensate more hours is same among male and female
H1: preference to compensate more hours is significantly different from male and female
Table RT: 5
Independent Samples Test
Levene's t-test for Equality of Means
Test for
Equality
of
Variances
F Sig. T df Sig. Mean Std. 95%
(2- Differ Error Confidence
tailed e nce Differ Interval of the
) e Difference
nce Lower Upper
Equal 11.64 .00 3.20 554 .001 .3409 .1064 .13190 .55002
VAR varianc 6 1 4 6 3
0000 es
1 assume
d
Equal 3.24 552.87 .001 .3409 .1050 .1346 .5472
variance 6 9 6 3 6 6
s not
assume
d
Interpretation: Since p < .001 is less than our chosen significance level α = 0.05, we can reject
the null hypothesis, and conclude that that the preference to compensate more hours is significantly
different among male and female
RECOMMENDATIONS
o Mindset:
• India moves towards more organized employment, some of the basic characteristics of
having a job in India must change before the country at large, can debate the possibility of
a four-day week.
The implementation will require a ‘social change’ across hierarchies including the top
management
• The competitive gene in the Indian mindset may cause this system to collapse unless we
define clear ways to implement the four days’ work week and alter the orthodox mindset
of managers who may tend to measure performance in quantity rather than efficiency
Shwetali Dhamapurkar
ABSTRACT
Employee engagement is the burning topic for any company during the globalized era. It is a
workplace approach resulting in the right conditions for all members of an organisation to give of
their best each day. It is more than just a measurement of how content employees are with their
job, department, company, income, or benefits. It is their level of emotional connection,
involvement and commitment to their organization. Engaged employees are inclined to contribute
more of organizational productivity. It also supports in maintaining a higher level of commitment.
The purpose of this research was to find out the top-rated employee engagement activities that
have an impact on productivity of the employees. Data was collected from various publications,
websites & primary research. This paper gave us a brief on the various aspects considered in the
study namely employee engagement, employee engagement practices and their impact on
employees, productivity and drivers of productivity. This provided us with the psychology behind
adopting employee engagement practices that specifically lead to enhanced employee productivity.
Keywords: Employees, employee engagement, employee engagement practices, productivity,
employee productivity, productivity drivers.
LITERATURE REVIEW
Over the past decade, many authors have written on the topic ‘Employee Engagement’. Kahn
(1990) was the first to coin the term engagement as he described how people can “use varying
degrees of their selves – physically, cognitively and emotionally in work role performances” [1].
According to Kevin Kruse, employee engagement is the emotional commitment the employee has
to the organization & its goals. It is the level of enthusiasm & dedication an employee feels toward
his or her job.
An “engaged employee” is one who is fully absorbed by and enthusiastic about their work and so
takes positive action to further the organization’s reputation and interests. To these engaged
employees, it is far more than a pay cheque – it is the eagerness towards their task that makes them
passionate in their work, and this passion is often reflected in their individual outcomes.
They care about their company & their work. They have sense of belongingness toward the
company & their work. They tend to go an extra mile for the company without being asked or
wanting recognition or credit for it. They often establish a common responsibility for themselves
to the roles they took up. At the same time, they do want to feel appreciated by the company.
Employee Productivity
Productivity is defined as the ratio between outputs to input. Employee productivity is a metric
that is calculated based on the amount of output of an employee on a project versus the amount of
time s/he takes. It can also be evaluated in terms of the output of an employee in a specific period
of time.
Typically, the productivity of a given worker will be assessed relative to an average for employees
doing similar work [3]. Because most of the success of any organization relies upon the
productivity of its workforce; the more productive they are, the more value they produce for their
employers.
PRIMARY RESEARCH
Methodology
At the start of this project, we were introduced to various types of methodologies which can be
used to research our topic. The four broad alternatives were surveys, questionnaires, interviews &
case studies. The purpose of this study is to understand & analyse the impact of employee
engagement practices on employee productivity. With this purpose, the combined qualitative &
quantitative research findings will be generating detailed analysis. Hence, we finalized to conduct
Purpose:
To find out which employee engagement activities have an impact on productivity of the
employees
Respondent Definition:
For respondent short listing & selection following are the parameters considered:
• Working professionals
• From diverse industries
• Various age groups ranging from 20-50+
• Having experience upto 20+ years
• HR as well as Non-HR professionals to avoid the biasness of policy maker & the one who
utilizes the policy
Sample Size: 30
Primary Research Tool - The Questionnaire
10. What Is the State of Employee Engagement Initiatives carried out in your
organisation?
11. In your opinion to what extent the below listed Employee Engagement Initiatives have
an impact on Employee Productivity:
Activity Low impact Medium impact High impact
Onboarding
Clarity about expectations of
work deliverables
Leadership with Clearly Defined
Goals
Enabling Infrastructure (Tools,
Resources, Processes)
Peer Culture
Team Collaboration
Team Commitment for Quality
Output
Empowerment/Autonomy
Wellness (Activities for Physical
& Mental wellbeing)
Employee Recognition
Performance Management
Training and Development
12. In your opinion please rate the degree to which the above mentioned employee
engagement activities have an impact on outcome produced on the various aspects
listed below:
Activity Low degree Medium degree High degree
Employee Happiness
Employee Satisfaction
Belongingness
Motivation
Customer Service
Employee Retention
Talent Acquisition
Leadership
Empowerment
Enhanced Productivity
Ability To Innovate
Continuous Learning
Willingness To Go An Extra Mile
Enjoyment Of Work
Positive Word of Mouth
Healthy Organisational Culture
DATA ANALYSIS
Age (in years) Analysis:
• A maximum of respondents had a work experience ranging from 0-5 years followed by 6-
10 years bracket.
• 13.3% of the respondents have an experience of over 20+ years; this provides the survey
opinions from seasoned industry professionals.
Location Analysis:
• A sincere attempt was made to tap working professionals from Tier 1 cities from different
geographies of India.
• A maximum of 70% the respondents are from the city of Mumbai.
Industry Analysis:
Level of Management
• This question attempts to find out the level of management at which the respondents work.
The objective behind this question is to find & showcase the hierarchy at which the
respondents work. Also ensures that the right audience has been surveyed.
• A majority of the respondents are working at the Middle level of management followed
by professionals working in Junior level of management.
• We have a small yet a valuable share of professionals working in Top level management.
• Thus, we can say that a total of 56.6% of total respondents comprising of Top & Middle
level management professionals are bringing more valuable opinions to the study.
• An extremely small part of the respondents belongs from non-management positions.
Profile Analysis:
• This question checks the awareness about the practice of employee engagement activities
in their respective organisations.
• Majority of the respondents are aware & very well knowing the status of employee
engagement practices in their organisation.
• In some organisations employee engagement activities are not carried out.
• Also, some respondents are not aware of the practice of carrying out employee engagement
activities in their organisation or we can even say that they are not aware of the set of
activities that are classified as employee engagement activities.
Q.2. What is the State of employee engagement initiatives carried out in your
organisation?
The respondents were asked to select a status of employee engagement activities among the 5
options for the listed Employee Engagement Initiatives as mentioned below:
i. Already implemented
ii. Not implemented
iii. Plan to implement in future
iv. No plans to implement in future
v. Don’t know
Note: For efficient data analysis Q.2 & Q.3 are analysed simultaneously because of their
dependency in analysis on each other.
The listed Employee Engagement Initiatives and their analysis for Q.2 & Q.3:
1. On-Boarding
• Onboarding refers to the process of orienting new employees in a manner that aids in
overall retention. This process focuses on helping employees to become acclimated to their
new workplace in a timely fashion & bringing them “on board” with regard to company
culture, understanding of job function & overall comfort level.
• As we can see in majority i.e. 93.3% of companies Onboarding process is Already
Implemented.
• Only in a small fraction of company it is Not Implemented.
• This practice means communicating the leadership objectives for the organisation to the
employees along with defining the clear goals.
• In majority i.e. 70% of the organisations this practice is Already Implemented followed
by a 20% of where this practice is Not Implemented.
• This practice means providing the necessary tools, resources, processes, equipment,
systems, etc. to the employees which is a very basic requirement but it contributes
considerably to an employee’s productivity. Absence or not offering these basic
requirements hampers basic functioning of an employee.
• In majority i.e. 80% of the organisations this practice was Already Implemented. Yet
we can almost a 20% of the organisation where this practice was Not Implemented in
totality & for some organisations it was not even planned to be implemented in future.
In majority 63% of the organisations this practice is Already Implemented followed by an equal
distribution of organisations where this practice is Not Implemented as well as where the
organisations have plans to implement this practice in future.
• This practice is regarded as High Impact followed by Medium Impact for employee
productivity by majority of respondents.
• It is not at all regarded as a Low Impact practise thus considering this, organisations can
make more use of this practice for achieving better productivity.
6. Team Collaboration
• It means the situation when the entire team commits to work to produce quality output.
This practice leads to better team effort increasing the success ratio for the task at hand.
• In majority of the organisations i.e. 63.3% this practice is Already Implemented.
• Since it is a good practice, we can see that 20% of the organisations are also willing to
Implement it In Future.
• Wellness refers to the activities carried out for physical & mental well- being of
an employee. These include activities such as yoga, spirituality, some sports, games etc.
• In majority of the organisations i.e. 56.7% this practice is Already Implemented.
• From the above graph we can see that we have received mixed responses.
11. It is not at all regarded as a Low Impact practise thus considering this, organisations can
make more use of this practice for achieving better productivityTraining and
Development
Q.4. In your opinion rate the degree to which the above mentioned employee engagement
activities have an impact on outcome produced on the various aspects listed below:
The analysis of this question is done on the basis of degree of impact regarded by the
respondents.
10
We can see from the above graph that most of the responses indicate a High impact. None of
the employee engagement activities has indicated contributing to a majority Low impact. Thus,
indicating that all the below mentioned activities have either a “High” or “Considerably Good”
impact.
High Impact activities being activities with a clear majority & Considerably Good Impact
activities being activities with a majority High vote but one-third votes in the favour of Medium
impact. Hence, we have classified them as follows for their individual analysis:
1) Enhance Productivity
• Majority of 22 of the respondents are of the opinion that the above mentioned employee
engagement activities’ impact on the aspect of having a Healthy Organisational Culture is
to a High degree. While we also have 7 & 1 respondents of the opinion Medium degree
& Low degree impact respectively.
Motivation
• Majority of 21 respondents are of the opinion that the above mentioned employee
engagement activities’ impact on the aspect of Positive Word of Mouth is to a High degree
followed by Medium degree by 9 respondents.
4) Employee Happiness
• Majority of two-thirds i.e. 20 of the respondents are of the opinion that the above mentioned
employee engagement activities have a High degree of impact on Employee Happiness.
• Majority of two-thirds i.e. 20 of the respondents are of the opinion that the above mentioned
employee engagement activities have a High degree of impact on Customer Service.
6) Employee Retention
• Majority of two-thirds i.e. 20 of the respondents are of the opinion that the above mentioned
employee engagement activities have a High degree of impact on Employee Retention.
7) Ability to Innovate
8) Talent Acquisition
• Majority of 19 respondents are of the opinion that the above mentioned employee
engagement activities’ impact is to a High degree of Talent acquisition. 7 respondent’s
opinion is Medium degree & 4 of the respondents think that it has a Low degree of impact
on Talent acquisition.
9) Enjoyment Of Work
Employee Satisfaction
• Majority of 18 respondents are of the opinion that the above mentioned employee
engagement activities have a High degree of impact on Employee Satisfaction. Yet 8
respondent’s opinion is Medium degree & 4 of the respondents think that it has a Low
degree of impact on Employee Satisfaction. Close to 50% of the respondents are of the
opinion that there is a medium to low impact on Employee Satisfaction of various employee
engagement activities.
• Majority of 19 respondents are of the opinion that the above mentioned employee
engagement activities’ impact on Continuous learning is to a High degree. Yet 10
respondent’s opinion is Medium degree & 1 of the respondents also think that it has a Low
degree of impact on Continuous learning.
• Majority of 18 respondents are of the opinion that the above mentioned employee
engagement activities’ impact on Willingness to go an Extra Mile is to a High degree. Yet
10 respondent’s opinion is Medium degree & 2 of the respondents also think that it has a
Low degree of impact on Willingness to go an Extra Mile.
• Here we can see that more than one-third of the respondent’s opinions are different from
the majority.
Leadership
• Majority of 18 respondents are of the opinion that the above mentioned employee
engagement activities’ impact on Leadership is to a High degree. Yet 12 respondent’s
opinion is Medium degree of impact on Leadership. Here we can see that more than one-
third of the respondent’s opinions are different from the majority.
• Majority of 16 respondents are of the opinion that the above mentioned employee
engagement activities’ impact on belongingness is to a High degree.
• Yet 12 respondent’s opinion is Medium degree & 2 of the respondents also think that it has
a Low degree of impact on belongingness.
4) Empowerment
• Majority of 16 respondents are of the opinion that the above mentioned employee engagement
activities’ impact on Empowerment is to a High degree. Yet 10 respondent’s opinion is
Medium degree & 4 of the respondents also think that it has a Low degree of impact on
Empowerment.
• Close to 50% of the respondents are of the opinion that there is a medium to low impact on
the feeling of Empowerment of various employee engagement activities.
CONCLUSION
BIBLIOGRAPHY
Research papers:
A. Patro, Chandra Sekhar. (2013). The Impact of Employee Engagement on Organization's
Productivity.
B. Mohanty, Manoj & Choudhury, Sasmita. (2018). Employee Engagement and Productivity
– Linking connectivity from manufacturing industry perspective.
10.5281/zenodo.1432621.
C. Abhijit Siddhanta & Debalina Roy (Ghosh). Employee Engagement – Engaging the 21st
Century workforce
Websites:
[1]https://www.coursehero.com/file/p7u8ndr/Gallup-organization-defines-employee-
engagement-as-the-involvement-with-and/
[2]https://www.officevibe.com/blog/employee-engagement-benefits
[3]http://www.nettimesolutions.com/blog/4-drivers-that-can-improve-productivity-in-the-
workplace/
Books:
1) First, Break All the Rules by Marcus Buckingham
2) Human Resource Management – An Experiential Approach by Bernardin, John H.
3) Bernardin, John. H. (2003). Human Resource Management – An experiential approach.
New Delhi. India: Tata McGraw Hill Publishing Company Limited.
ABSTRACT
The aim of this research was to understand the influence of Google AdWords on Micro and Small-
Scale Businesses located in Tier II cities of India. This was demonstrated by example of study of
Fashion Designing and Tailoring Business which enabled the researcher to understand the impact
on performance and growth of business in today’s highly digital world. With advent of mobile
revolution backed by telecom giant Jio entry in Indian market, led to widening the digital
marketing throughout the businesses. Not only bigger but also smaller family businesses took
advantage of this. This was enabled by Google’s Analytics feature dedicated to mobile itself. With
ease of doing the On- The- Go analysis and creating Ads, the presented case of business gained
required momentum in market to sustain in current digital world. The complete package of Google
system linked to one email id eased the handling of overall business. Here, the analysis was done
on the basis of PPC, customer reach, customer satisfaction feedback, Ease to reach the location
and visiting the business website. The results of such campaigning were very much insightful and
proved to be great boost for business.
Keywords: Digital Marketing, Google AdWords, Impact, Small Business, Tier II cities, Business
Performance and Growth
1. INTRODUCTION
The modern world is so much connected by mean of incredible happening technological
developments, which in turn makes an organization to be so dynamic in its operations and
marketing of its products. This applies to both big giants like MNCs to even small household
business. With mobile as main tool for common man to have access to information, this platform
made huge success for players like Amazon, Flipkart in India [1]. Mobile centric marketing
enabled this firms to cater vast customer segments which are physically distant.
Concept of Google AdWords: Above situation led to widespread use of an innovative
advertising program called AdWords in India introduced back in 2000 by Google. Its main
algorithm depends on keyword which means the entire phrase that the user types in the Internet
Search Engine to find the information that interests him. A keyword is very rarely a single word–
usually such a keyword consists of two, three or four words. The basic essence of AdWords was
to support marketing activities through Google search engine. AdWords presents an
advertisement containing a link to websites tailored to keywords.
Meaning of Tier II city in India: According to Govt. of India, cities are classified on the basis
of their population, as recommended by the Sixth Central Pay Finance making Mumbai, New
Delhi, Kolkata, Pune as Tier I cities and Aurangabad, Nanded, Nashik as Tier II cities. With rising
2. OBJECTIVES OF STUDY
Here, considering the research gap, the following objectives were considered important to study
in this research.
1. To understand the importance of Google Ads in tight financed working conditions of
Micro Enterprise working in Tier II city of India
2. To study impact of Google AdWords on Micro Enterprise (as given in study) with
respect to customer reach, product marketing
3. To study consumer behaviour through online listing and promoting via Google
AdWords- Conversion from potential customer to realised customer
Here, all the objectives are then converted into step by steps procedural actions to understand
the impact of each step on overall business performance. Here, for study of above mentioned
objectives, a Fashion Designing business was taken into consideration and research was done on
the same.
Hypothesis of Research:
Here, main hypothesis is as follows:
H0 = There is no significant influence of Google AdWords on marketing by Micro Enterprise
in Tier II cities
H1 = There is significant influence of Google AdWords on marketing by Micro Enterprise in
Tier II cities
These hypotheses are again divided into majorly 3 sections of objectives:
1. Customer Reach
2. Customer Conversion
3. Finding Optimised Cost Per Click per Conversion
Here, researchers have made out following sub hypothesis for each section:
1. H0 = There is not much customer reach provided by Google AdWords Campaign run
by Micro Enterprise in Tier II cities
H1 = There is increased customer reach provided by Google AdWords Campaign run
by Micro Enterprise in Tier II cities
3. LITERATURE REVIEW
Researcher was aided by secondary data available from number of research papers and articles
providing a detailed insight on Internet Marketing and use of this platform for SMEs. The findings
from the literature are presented below: -
As per findings by Dr. Bala Madhu et al (2018, P. 333-336) [1], there is almost 10% impact
of mobile marketing which comes within top 5 Digital Marketing Activities. Paper also states
factors like cost involvement, ease of real time data and campaign success, easy stimulation of
customer actions, and instant purchase through UPIs were major contributor to success of digital
marketing.
Paper by Singh Tina (2017, P.40) [2] describes the Social Media as major factor to market their
products and to have a better connect with their customers. It also reveals that internet marketing
has least expenses and most exposure with the example of McDonald’s social media campaign.
The paper does not specifically state various methods of social media marketing and their
analytics point of view.
In the report by IAMAI (2019, P. 29) [3], it is highlighted that, Digital payments have enabled
easy and transparent transactions for businesses also helping them with lessening defaults from
customers. This has led to category focus of MSME on Digital Payment to be high while digital
advertising focus to be medium. This clearly shows the importance of going digital for micro
enterprise.
Research paper published by Kaushik Rajiiv (2016, P. 17) [4] briefly describes the exploratory
research done by researcher for current scenario of digital marketing in India. It clearly shows
tremendous potential of increasing sales with proper strategy giving benefits like increased brand
recognition and better brand loyalty. Paper describes the various factors for failure of digital
marketing in startups, and also highlights the gains by Indian big giants like Nestle, Coca Cola,
etc. in such scenario.
Now, Shirisha M. (2018 P. 616) [5] also have similar thoughts of importance of digital
marketing as expressed by Kaushik [4]. It goes ahead and states that, for NPD, creating the product
awareness, digital marketing plays important role.
4. RESEARCH METHODOLOGY
The overall research framework was designed in proper method to help the researcher to have
a detailed analysis of impact of Google AdWords on performance of Micro Enterprise located in
the Tier II city- Nashik, Maharashtra, India.
Background of Micro-Business: The presented business is been working in the region of Nashik
city from more than 25 years in primary fashion designing, tailoring and hobby classes. The
business has used various tactics of marketing like pamphlet, advertisement in local newspaper, etc.
previously. But the response was limited and got stagnant due to increased competition in the
region from new entrants. With no such mechanism to analyse the customer behaviour and tack
the business performance, the business required much needed boost in its strategy to promote
itself strongly.
Review/
Use of google Creating and Setting
Modification and
Analytics Ad Campaign
Follow Up
It was active for period of March 2019 to December 2019 for the period of 10 months. Here,
an impression is counted each time Ad is shown to someone visiting a search results page or
website on Google. Comparing the number of impressions with the number of actions taken on Ad
is required to understand how well Ad appeals to potential customers. Here actions taken by
customer are: No. of Clicks, No. of Phone calls received, No. of Map actions, etc. The analysis
was done considering the hypothesis presented. The above parameter of radius oftargeting was
taken considering the amount to be spent. More the radius, more would be amount. This was aided
by
Data Analysis:
Here, researchers have analysed the data with the help of SPSS Version 13 as statistical tool.
Researchers analysed above parameters to test sub hypothesis which further related to main
hypothesis testing.
1. Customer Reach:
Table No: 3 Chi Square results for Customer Reach via Ease of Google Maps and
Improved Business Revenues
Chi-Square Tests
Value d Asymp. Sig. (2-
f sided)
Pearson Chi-Square 20.097a 249 .452
Likelihood Ratio 24.346 249 .228
Linear-by-Linear Association 3.541 1 .060
N of Valid Cases 180
Here, it was found that, significance value is more than 0.05, so the H0 was accepted and H1
was rejected. So, it was found that, there is not much customer reach provided by Google AdWords
Campaign run by Micro Enterprise in Tier II cities.
ANOVAa
Model Sum of d Mean F Sig.
Squares f Square
Regression 20.000 1 20.000 10.11 .002
1 Residual 352.111 248 1.978 0 b
Total 372.111 249
a. Dependent Variable: Areas where Branding of Coca Cola is Relevant
b. Predictors: (Constant), Country of Belongingness
Now, considering ANOVA test for Optimised Cost per Click per Conversion and Cost by
Google AdWords Campaign, it was found that, significance value is 0.002 which is less than
With all sub hypothesis getting accepted, researchers concluded that, main hypothesis, H1 was
accepted, i.e., there is significant influence of Google AdWords on marketing by Micro Enterprise
in Tier II cities.
ABSTRACT:
Entrepreneurship is one of the ways to solve unemployment problem in India. And emerging
country like India wants many problem solvers that mean there is huge scope of entrepreneurship.
Tech startups have emerged a lot and in industry 4.0 there is huge scope for tech startups. Finance
is a major aspect of startup ecosystem which we tend to study in this research. To study financial
structure of Tech start ups we observed the information of 15 tech startups for the financial sources,
challenges, factors influencing financial decision. We found that Finance plays a vital role &
should be given importance in startup ecosystem. This research explores Finance in Tech start ups
and we found that even though there are many sources of funds for startups but still most of the
start ups are self financed (bootstrapped), there are various challenges that they have to raise the
funds, even after many government policies very few have materialized for funding. With this
research we would like to bring the findings to notice of stakeholders.
Key Words: Start up financing, Entrepreneurial Finance, Tech start up.
INTRODUCTION:
For emerging countries where the rate of unemployment is the biggest problem that governments
have to face, encouraging the spirit of entrepreneurship is presented to be one of the best ways
to reduce it. Thus, the governments of India focus on the development of start-up firm to promote
the economic growth, & reduce the unemployment. As per the ILO report, unemployment rate
stood at 3.5 per cent in India (Economic times 3/7/2019). Entrepreneurship is one way to solve the
problem.
Start-up is an entrepreneurial venture which is typically a newly emerged business that aims to
meet a market place need by developing a viable business model around a product, service,
process or a platform (Wikipedia). The issue of finance has been viewed as the immediate reason
why most start-ups fail to start or to grow. There is limited access to financial resources available
to smaller enterprises compared to larger organizations. The financing choices are the most
important decisions for the growth and survival of any organization. Capital structure (financing
decisions) can be defined as the proportion of debt and equity used by a firm to finance its
operations. The capital structure of the firm is determined by several factors. Start-up capital
refers to the money that is required to start a new business, whether for office space, permits,
licenses, inventory, product development & manufacturing, marketing or any other expense.
Start-up capital is also referred to as seed money. The money can come from a bank, in the form
of a business loan; or from an investor, group of investors, or venture capitalists. In the case of
REVIEW OF LITERATURE:
Waleczek, Peter, Flatten, Tessa Christina in 2014 studied financial behaviour of 3,017 new
business owners and found that bootstrapping is a strategic choice rather than a necessity. (The
pecking order hypothesis: does it apply to startup firms? Emrald).
Stuart Paul, Geoff Whittam, Janette Wyper in 2007 finds that where external funds are required,
the main source is equity rather than debt. In the majority of cases, in depth interviews show that
a bridged pecking order applies in that the businesses move from self funding to external equity
in preference to, or instead of bank finance. Two reasons for this pattern can be established. First,
entrepreneurs consider debt to be a personal liability as it invariably requires to be underwritten
by personal guarantees. Entrepreneurs place a self imposed limit on the extent to which they are
prepared to mortgage their assets. Second, entrepreneurs deliberately seek out equity investment
as a means of obtaining added value over & above the finance invested.
Andrew Atherton in 2012 studied new venture financing across 20 business start ups. initial
discussions with the founder(s), and follow up contact to confirm sources of financing acquired
during new venture creation. This approach was adopted because of the challenges associated
OBJECTIVE:
• To determine the most preferred or feasible source of financing in a Tech start-up.
• To evaluate the factors influencing the selection of source of financing.
• To ascertain the challenges faced by tech start-ups in raising the funds.
RESEARCH METHODOLOGY:
This research is a exploratory research to better understand the topic and problem and to gain
insights into the topic. To meet the research objective, empirical study is undertaken. The research
is based on primary and secondary data both.
Sampling Method: Non-probability sampling method: Convenience Sampling
Sampling Size: For this research sample is comprise of 15 Tech start Ups of any domain.
DATA COLLECTION:
Primary Data: To know the response, the questionnaire method comprised of dependent and
independent variable. It has been designed as a primary research instrument. The questionnaires
were used as an instrumentation technique, because it is an important method of data collection.
The success of the questionnaire method in collecting the information depends largely on proper
drafting. So in the present study questions were arranged and interconnected logically. Also,
telephonic interview was used to get some more insights from tech start ups founders.
DATA ANALYSIS:
The startup has how many founders?
Out of 15 start ups 7 (46.7%) has only one founder 5 (33.3%) startups has 2 founders. 2 start ups
(13.3%) has 3 founders and only 1 start up has 4 or more than 4 founders.
40% of starups has the age of 1-3 years. 26% has the age og 3-5 years. 20% is of the age 0-1 year
only 13.3 % is of age above 5 years.
Majority of founders of tech start ups are masters qualified and bachelor. Only one start up founder
has Phd or equivalent qualification.
Majority of founders are from professional background, second hihest no. of founders are students
then those who are from business background.
Is the startup registered with the startup India scheme under DIPP ?
73.3% of start ups are funded by their own funds. 53.35 are from famiy and friends. 13.3% are
from incubator and accelerator. Only 6.7% are funded by bank.
How many founders are aware about the income tax eemptions for the start ups?
60% of the startups are awrae about the tax exemptions. 40% are not aware about the same.
Is startup eligible for funding or financial concession from government has it materialized?
What are the reasons which stop founders from raising the funds?
As per majority (40%) of startups VC’s are disinterested and then they (26.7%) have lack of
networking. Also 20% of them are not aware about different sources of funds.
40%
of startup has employee between 1-3. 33.3% has 10and above employee. 13.3% of them has
employee between 4-6 or 7-9.
Has the founder achieved the break even point?
66.7% startups says that they have 0% debt fund. 6.7% has only 5% debt funds. 6.7% has 50%
debts funds. 13.3% of startups has 100% debt funds.
Umesh Rathod
Abstract:
Marketing is something that a lot of Indian Startups seem to struggle with. With less or no
money/ budget for having right candidates the problems could be many. There are many
opportunities that lie unexplored in this field which motivated me to pursue this research. The
topic of research is, "Study of current trends for Early Stage Startup marketing in India", even
today when startups see the word marketing their eyes glaze over but lot of things have
changed. Today, consultants & entrepreneurs are engaging in what is called as magnetic
marketing, which is attracting buyers & customers based on the usefulness of their content as
well as through the authority of their personal brand.
This research studies the various current trends of startup marketing that can be understood as
'marketing with an entrepreneurial mindset'. By combining the definition of marketing and two
conceptualizations of entrepreneurship (entrepreneurial orientation and entrepreneurial
management), the definition of Startup marketing is known as the organizational function of
marketing by taking into account innovativeness, risk taking, pro-activeness and the pursuit of
opportunities without regard for the resources currently controlled. (Sascha Kraus, Rainer Harms,
Matthias Fink, Int. J. Entrepreneurship and Innovation Management, Special Issue, 2009).
Concentrating on entrepreneurial marketing w.r.t Indian startup ecosystem, this research illustrates
the concept of startup marketing by highlighting marketing strategies. As a primary research
instrument to know the response the questionnaire method was used with 100 different startups. It
was comprised of dependent & independent variables.
With help of this research we came to know go-to-market strategy used by startups & now we can
forecast the future trends of marketing by startups in India. Most of the early stage startups still
believe in marketing by word of mouth, the startups do not have funds and look for events where
they can talk about their product or service. Just because one has a startup doesn’t mean they can’t
get creative with their marketing. But it’s true in India very few startups ever think of offbeat
channels of marketing as they are risky.
Keywords:
Entrepreneurial Marketing, Marketing, Early stage startups, Indian Startups, Marketing,
Startups.
Two fundamental truths exist when marketing a startup. One is that a great product alone
is not enough to succeed. The other is that no amount of marketing will make a crap product gain
a mass audience. “Nothing kills a bad company faster than good marketing”. Successful startup
marketing requires that you have both a great product and great marketing.
The reason that I am particularly pursuing this research on startups is because a very large
number of students are opening their startups or are joining existing startups after graduation. The
number of startups is growing at an exponential rate, and I believe that this will be a continuing
trend. Marketing is something that a lot of Indian Startups seem to struggle with. With less or no
money/ budget for having right candidates the problems could be many.
Through this research we discuss study of various current trends of startup marketing that
can be understood as 'marketing with an entrepreneurial mindset'. By combining the definition of
marketing and two conceptualizations of entrepreneurship (entrepreneurial orientation and
entrepreneurial management), we arrive at a definition of startup marketing as the organizational
function of marketing by taking into account innovativeness, risk taking, pro-activeness and the
pursuit of opportunities without regard for the resources currently controlled. The research
illustrates the concept of startup marketing by highlighting marketing strategies currently being
used by 100 different startups.
We also get a close insights into the availability of current appealing, diverse marketing
tools used for early stage startup marketing in India. The research examines the impact of various
external factors of targeting users by startups with the limited source of funds. Further, it we also
questioned the startups on the various marketing tools be it modern i.e. Social Media, Internet, etc
or traditional i.e. print, word of mouth, etc and figure out which trends are still being used by them
and whether it aligns with their unique selling preposition.
Review of Literature
Over the years academicians and practitioners have observed that marketing implemented
by small firms is unique from that employed by larger firms. Expanding on this idea, the observed
marketing behaviour of an individual startup differentiates from mainstream marketing (Gilmore,
2010). Some authors have worked on these differences (i.e. Siu and Kirby, 1998; Hultman, 1999;
Stokes, 2000; Gaddefors and Anderson, 2008). Summing up, “the process of managing
entrepreneurial marketing differs from the process of managing regular approaches to marketing”
(Collinson and Shaw, 2001, p.6)
Entrepreneurial marketing (EM) is a growing area of study. For that reason, it is important to
develop its own branch, yet it is advisable not to lose track of where it comes from. Marketing and
entrepreneurship must be regarded as solid mainstreams from which EM can supply concepts and
ideas to evolve. Precisely, the present article expands on such mainstreams. Marketing and
entrepreneurship have been recognized as having significant interrelations, and to get potentiated
when jointly implemented (Morris and Paul, 1987; Athuahene-Gima and Ko, 2001; Bhuian et al.,
2005).
The Study: It is based on the current trends of marketing for early stage Startups.
The Sample: The sample size was 100 and the data have been collected according to the different
tech start ups. Sampling technique is purposive. The data have been collected from the period
February 2018 - March, 2018.
This research was conducted with the study through Secondary & Primary research to aid
the completion of the research.
The secondary research includes articles, reports available in journals, books, magazines,
EDII library literature & electronics media sources. The expectation from the secondary research
included information on:
1. Indian Startup market dynamics & market share information
2. Promotional effect on the product
3. Modes of Marketing/Promotion
4. Brand history & progress so far
The Primary Research was carried out by interviewing the early stage startups at events
with the following expectations & utilizing modes of online survey:
1. Understanding Initial launch & go – to - market strategy
2. Market understanding & opportunity Identification
3. Key behind focusing on offline & online channels
4. Spend distribution in marketing efforts
Data Types:
Every decision poses unique needs for information, and relevant strategies can be
developed based on the information gathered through research. Research is the systematic
objective and exhaustive search for and study of facts relevant to the problem.
Research design means the framework of study that leads to the collection and analysis of
data. It is a conceptual structure with in which research is conducted. It facilitates smooth sailing
of various research operations to make the research as effective as possible.
It is observed that among the total respondents of 100 start ups maximum (49.1%) start ups
are in quite early age i.e. below 18 months. Followed by (18.2%) startups which are 18 months –
3 years old.
Majority of start ups serve the metro’s with approximately 33.5%, followed by urban with
31.7%. We can clearly see that very few startups have rural demograph.
It is observed that an early age start up in India does not employ more 10 people, the start
ups which are in 18 months – 3 years old are there who has team of 11 to 50 people.
It shows that respondents belong to different industry and sectors. Data so collected is from
multiple domain start ups. We have data from all the sectors.
With the help of current marketing plan 47.3% startups think that they can increase
their market share by 10% - 25%. Followed by 34.5% startups who think they can achieve
25%-50%.
Almost 80 % of startups measure their marketing success as per no. of cust omer
acquired. Followed by no. of sales (45.5%) achieved and no. of referrals achieved (29.1%)
As seen earlier with the number of early stage startup samples we can see here that
56.4% have an annual turnover of below INR 5 lac & followed by 23.6% under the range of
INR 10 – 50 lac. There are few startups that have got funding & have a turnover between INR
1 cr to 5 cr.
It is interesting to see that most of the startups have moved from just being information
broadcaster to customer servicing and from pushing product sales to building a community.
The traditional marketing still finds a vital place in the marketing, we can see the print
channels used by startups starting with Brochures, Direct Mailers, Flyers and Cards largely
compared with other traditional mediums. These sums up the cheap and easiest mediums compared
to other print channels.
More than 60% samples had a compelling story to create a perception for their customer.
It can be observed that 40% startups are either do not have a compelling story or are not able to
create a compelling story for their customers. The lack of USP may be a reason for the same.
It is observed that 63.6% startups have compelling story to tell about their product or
service as seen in the previous pie chart. But in this case, the startups having and executing their
marketing plan is 78.2%. This shows that nearly 14.6% startups are marketing their product
without the idea of their USP or a compelling story. This marketing will only create confused
consumers. There is a need for these startups to introspect their marketing plan.
It indicates that 1/5th of sampled startups have only got in touch with consultants.
Outdoor advertising works well for promoting your product in specific geographic areas.
Billboards, bus benches, and transit advertising can be very effective for startups. Outdoor sign is
often the first thing a potential customer sees. The sign if bright and conspicuous can attract
attention and sufficiently informative to let prospective customers know the product/service. It
becomes clear that the young startups have focus on Billboards & Signs for their outdoor
advertising campaign.
Joint venture marketing is an agreement between two entities in this case star tups in
which both of them combine marketing strategies in order to increase their share of the
marketplace and increase their revenues. We can clearly see that startup samples want to
collaborate through joint venture for increasing sales and indirectly the market share. This
follows with cross promotions and joint events.
Startups rarely utilize publicity events because of the price; however in the above chart
we can see that a lot of startups are interested to share information about their product or
services through presentation and speaking events followed by workshop/seminars and
demonstrations.
Conclusion:
Through this research we were able to understand what tools are used by early stage
startups for their market research. We also analyzed marketing trends adopted by startups of
different industry. The research showed startup’s alignment with the marketing strategies. We
also judged how effective their current marketing strategy is after assessing the application
of market trends by startups.
I have tried to analyze/determine integration of different marketing trends into market
strategy given limited business knowledge. We came to know which are the most suitable
marketing and preferred trend by startup & the dimension of startup marketing problem for
startups. The results showed the reaction & responses of the customers in order to monitor
the marketing success of the startup. We analyzed involvement of startups in brand building
marketing activities or short term sales strategy’s.
We have understood go to market strategy used by startups & now we can forecast the
future trends of marketing by startups in India. I would like to bring this to the notice of the
policy makers the marketing issues faced by the early stage startups. We need to hand hold
them into creating a good market place in the ecosystem apart from the funding and mentoring
done while starting. The major challenge lies in sustaining the business without hampering
the inflow.
Most of the early stage startups still believe in marketing by word of mouth, the
startups do not have funds and look for events where they can talk about their product o r
service. Here we can see conventions being the topmost priority, followed by customer
referral programs, fairs and festivals, network meetings and seminars. It is also noted that
startups are building a community of focused groups.
Just because one has a startup doesn’t mean they can’t get creative with their
marketing. But it’s true in India very few startups ever think of offbeat channels of marketing
as they are risky w.r.t. ROI. We can clearly see that startup samples want to collaborate for
increasing sales and indirectly the market share. This follows with cross promotions and joint
events.
The startups in India have huge potential to become a problem solver for the world.
We need to have the right support not only in starting up a business but also hand holding
them through the journey, soon we will see India becoming the startup destination for the
world.
References
ABSTRACT
Currently, in the corporate world, emotional quotient is equal to intellectual quotient that is nothing
but Emotional intelligence. Emotional quotient is needed in any organization to perform its
functions smoothly. The employee engagement level of any organization decides whether that
organization is on the right track or not. To achieve growth in business and fulfil the need for
market demand, employees need to perform with full of their potential. To find out a relation
between emotional intelligence and employee engagement level questionnaire has shared with
working people and studied their responses. This paper has found a relationship between these two
qualities of employees through primary research.
Keywords: Emotional Intelligence, Employee engagement
INTRODUCTION
Any organization needs smart, experienced people, but they also require people who are adept at
dealing with changes, understand others. The emotional intelligence model has developed over the
past 30 years-based analysis of strengths of leaders and they observed a well-balanced array of
certain EQ capabilities which helps to create leaders for challenging roles. Several studies found a
strong connection between emotional intelligence, driving change visionary leadership.
Every leader needs to build a balance of strengths across the emotional intelligence competencies
to achieve outstanding results in business. Emotional Intelligence has divided into four major
domains and 12 elements as shown in the following Table 1.
Self-awareness is all about your relationship with yourself. It is about to get to know an
individual’s strengths, weaknesses and identify emotions. Reading influential books and receiving
feedback from your co-workers can help in self-awareness [3].
Sr No Domain Elements
1 Self-Awareness 1. Emotional Self-awareness
1. Emotional self-control
2. Adaptability
2 Self-Management
3. Achievement orientation
4. Positive Outlook
1. Empathy
3 Social Awareness
2. Organizational awareness
1. Influence
2. Coach and Mentor
4 Relationship Management 3. Conflict Management
4. Teamwork
5. Inspirational Leadership
Table 1: Emotional Intelligence domains and elements
ENGAGEMENT OF EMPLOYEE:
Employee engagement is the extent to which employees have dedication and passion about their
jobs, are committed to the organization, and put discretionary effort into their work. Employee
engagement works beyond activities, games and events, eventually, it leads performance.
Employee engagement helps to improve strategic alignment, motivating and relating employees,
managing execution. Effective communication is one of the crucial factors of business success.
LITERATURE REVIEW-
Relationship between Emotional Intelligence and Employee Engagement: A Study of
Leading Printing Press in NCR
“Tecnia Journal of Management Studies”, April-September 2013 issue, Vol. 8,No.1, ISSN: 0975-
7104
As emotional intelligence has a strong impact on employee engagement, nowadays companies are
focusing on measuring EE during the hiring and selection process. This paper reveals the moderate
positive and significant impact on the relationship between the dimensions of emotional
intelligence such as well-being, self-control, emotionality, sociability with the employee
engagement and impact of emotional intelligence. The Pertrides and Furnham (2006)
questionnaire are used to calculate emotional intelligence whereas Utrecht and Bakker (2003)
questionnaire are used to calculate the engagement scale. The author interpreted that if an
employee can understand and manage his/her emotions well, then he/she will be more engaged.
Out of four dimensions of emotional intelligence, well-being has a significant impact on employee
engagement whereas the other three dimensions do not.
The Relationship between Emotional Intelligence and Employee Engagement with the
Moderating Role of Gender
International Journal of Economics, Business and Management Research,Vol. 2, No. 02; 2018;
ISSN: 2456-7760
Employees having emotional intelligence skills apart from logical and technical skills gain an
advantage in today’s highly competitive world. Also, the employees who are well directed to the
organizations' goal and who know their roles and responsibilities i.e. who are more engaged in the
organization feel more energetic and passionate to put their companies forward. Three dimensions
of employee engagement i.e. physical, emotional and cognitive are taken into consideration. The
analysis showed that there is a significant relationship between employee engagement and
emotional intelligence but there is no potential impact of gender between employee engagement
and emotional intelligence. The author suggested that in order to ensure advantage, organizations
should include the evaluation of emotional intelligence ability into their recruitment process. The
further suggestions are the professionals who control their feelings or emotions at workplace, who
feels happy within workplace play an important role in terms of productivity; Engaged employees
stay longer in an organization which results in stronger and healthier work environment; The level
of emotional intelligence shall be taken into consideration when employees are evaluated for the
leadership positions and in order to repair the professionals who have a negative mood in an
organization, engagement programs should be organized.
RESEARCH METHODOLOGY
To conduct this research, two standard questionnaires are used, one for emotional intelligence and
another for employee engagement. For emotional intelligence trait-based, EQ test is followed and
for employee engagement, Gallup tests are taken for reference.
The convenient research methodology is used to complete the research. For data analysis,
Emotional quotient is considered as an independent variable and employee engagement is
considered as a dependent variable. Using a social media platform, the survey link is shared with
employees working in various organizations, to collect the data. This questionnaire also includes
some personal questions like gender, age, work experience, organization name. These questions
are added in the questionnaire to get validated responses from all respondents.
MEASURES
In accordance with objective study two standard questionnaire are utilized namely:
1. Employee Engagement: The Gallup Q12 engagement questions are used to determine the
employee engagement of employees. There are 12 questions asked in the survey in which
the employee rated themselves on the scale of 1 to 7. Gallup has studied survey results
from more than 35 million employees around the world[17].
2. Emotional Intelligence: The Trait Emotional Intelligence Questionnaire (TEIQue) is used
to determine Emotional Intelligence. It is a scientific measurement instrument based
exclusively on trait EI theory and providing a comprehensive assessment of the emotional
world of the individual [18].
1. The average score of emotional intelligence is 4.59 which shows that there is above average
level of emotional intelligence for the employees under consideration for the study.
Analysis: 1
Following hypothesis are formulated:
H0 – There is no significant correlation between Emotional Intelligence and Employee
engagement.
H1- There is a significant correlation between Emotional Intelligence and Employee
engagement.
In order to formulate the relationship between emotional intelligence and employee engagement,
correlation analysis is done. The value of the relationship between both is 0.345 which indicates
that there is a moderate relationship between the emotional intelligence and employee engagement.
EQ EE
EQ 1
EE 0.34 1
Table 3: Correlation between Emotional Intelligence & Employee Engagement
The above table shows that there is a positive and significant correlation between Emotional
Intelligence & Employee Engagement. Hence the alternate hypothesis is accepted.
Analysis 2
Multiple Regressions
CONCLUSION
This study was carried out to analyses the relationship between employee engagement and
emotional intelligence along with its four dimensions. Based on linear and multiple regression,
there is a quite significant relation between employee engagement and emotional quotient. So, it
can be interpreted that if the employee is able to manage his/her emotions in a better way than the
employee can engage in a better way. The self-control domain has a major influence on employee
engagement level whereas the other three domains i.e. well-being, emotionality and sociability
don’t have a significant impact on employee engagement. This research has helped to underline
that emotional quotient influences employee engagement up to 20%.
IMPLICATIONS
This research helped to understand the correlation between emotional quotient and employee
engagement. If any organization wish to enhance employee engagement and employee of that
organization has good emotional quotient then the organization can focus on other parameters of
employee engagement to increase the same. This can be a topic to study further.
LIMITATIONS
The sample is taken from employees of various organizations. The employee engagement
perspective may vary from employee to employee and company to company. During the survey,
the respondents rated themselves on their own perspective.
ABSTRACT
Business Model Innovation is an important buzzword in business terminology. As per several case
studies, reported in the business literature, the right Business model innovation has turned around
the fortunes of not only companies but also industries. A successful innovation in the business
model has resulted in superior profits and growth as compared to peer companies, than innovation
only in the products and services. This study is intended to understand whether there has been any
business model innovation, in three sectors, namely Auto, Pharma and FMCG.
INTRODUCTION
A “business model” comprises how a firm creates values, distributes value and appropriates the
value. In order to create value, a firm has to invest either in human capital or increase R&D spend
or enter into joint ventures. Also, a change in the business model, could lead to change in inventory
levels, better relations with buyers and sellers. A seller would be willing to lend more and a buyer
would pay-up sooner, which would be reflected in trade receivables and trade payables. Hence,
for the purpose of this study, the following information has been tracked for the period 2014 to
2019 :-
- R&D spend
- Trade receivables
- Trade payables
- Wages
- Inventory levels
- Profits
- Turnover
- Share price
- BSE Sensitive Index
- BSE 500 Index
An indicator would be its spend on R&D and human resources, 2 key parameters for a business
model innovation process. Inventory, trade receivables and trade payables have been considered
as indicators of a business model innovation or a business transformation process, hence, these
have been assessed.
Further, the way a company does business is also reflected in its Inventory management, trade
receivables and trade payables, which is a surrogate for its “strength or clout” in the market, from
SCOPE
This study has been conducted on 4 companies each from three Industry sectors, namely Pharma,
FMCG and the Auto sector.
METHODOLOGY
Secondary data from the company’s annual report has been extensively reviewed, for all the
companies selected for the study during the period 2014-2019.
RESEARCH DESIGN
The pharma sector, FMCG and the Automobile sector, were selected among all the industries,
due to their prominence and importance as economic bell weathers.
The companies listed on the Bombay Stock Exchange were selected. In the pharma sector, only
Indian companies having similar business profiles were selected and multi-national companies
were left out, as their business models are different. Companies from FMCG and Auto were
selected randomly.
RESEARCH OBJECTIVES
The research has been carried out, in order to understand if there has been a business model
innovation by any of the companies or sectors, and to understand the correlation of the internal
company indicators, across the other sectors and their comparison to the BSE sensitive index as
well as one benchmark index, which is BSE 500.
Following are the dependent variables. Following are the independent variables
1. Profits 1. Wages
2. Share price 2. Trade receivables
3. Trade payables
4. R&D expenses
5. Inventory
DATA METHODOLOGY
Data from the company’s annual reports over the past 6 years was taken for the purpose of the
study. The share price from the Bombay Stock exchange was considered to map the growth of
the individual stock the BSE sensitive index and BSE 500 index.
HYPOTHESIS
There is a business model innovation in the Indian Pharma companies.
Data evaluation
Observations and Comments on the inventory
● Pharma Industry :-
Of the four companies, 2 reduced their inventories, while 2 increased their inventories. Inventories,
among other aspects, point to a problem in forecasting the demand. The average inventory is about
20%, which is the highest amongst the three industries studied.
● FMCG Industry :-
Of the four companies, here as well, 2 companies reduced their inventories, while 2 increased
their inventories. The industry average is about 7.3 %.
● Automobile :-
Of the four companies, except one company, the other three companies, reduced their inventory.
CONCLUSION
It can be concluded that the companies are not aggressively investing in R&D. There has been no
significant increase in spending on wages, either. Overall there has been no significant impact on
the trade payables, trade receivables or the inventory. Thus it can be concluded that there has been
no business model innovation in the four companies selected in the study. Neither has there been
a business model innovation in the FMCG or the Automobile companies, selected in the study.
However, the study also shows that each sector can learn the best practices from the other secto,
and significantly improve their profits. Eg, the auto sector has a better inventory management
system as compared to Pharma, whereas Pharma invests heavily into R&D. The wages in the
Pharma are the maximum, which also correlates with the R&D spend. The trade receivables by
the FMCG are the best in the comparative group, thereby confirming that Branding has an edge
over commodity products, hence, Pharma should focus on speciality branded products.
Table 1
Table 2
Table 3
Automobiles- Inventory (% of turnover)
Company 2014 2015 2016 2017 2018 2019
Ashok Leyland 15.43 9.65 10.88 11.72 5.68 8.05
Bajaj Auto 3.07 3.67 3.05 2.99 2.76 3.01
Suzuki 3.96 5.26 5.5 4.1 3.85 3.86
Hero 2.6 3.07 2.32 2.6 2.46 3.64
Table 4
FMCG- Inventory (% of turnover)
Company 2014 2015 2016 2017 2018 2019
HUL 9.8 8.45 7.9 6.85 6.9 6.34
Colgate-Palmolive 6.22 6.28 6.97 5.53 5.19 5.52
Nestle 8.09 8.57 10.04 10.22 8.9 8.36
Britannia Industries 6.62 5.56 5.48 7.71 6.95 7.45
Table 6
Pharma - R&D expenses % (% of turnover)
Company 2014 2015 2016 2017 2018 2019
Sun Pharma 5.83 6.34 7.47 6.66 7.75 6.56
DRL 9.38 11.77 8.23 9.7 12.86 10.14
Cipla 5.08 7.44 7.51 7.04 6.09 6.4
Lupin 8.09 8.38 11.11 9.16 8.85 6.73
Table 7
FMCG - R&D expenses % (% of turnover)
Company 2014 2015 2016 2017 2018 2019
HUL 0.26 0.2 0.18 0.08 0.07 0.05
Colgate-Palmolive 0.24 0.17 0.21 0.45 0.19 0.21
Nestle 0.44 0.29 0.28 0.33 0.26 0.22
Britannia Industries 0.16 0.23 0.55 0.56 0.3 0.32
Table 8
Automobile - R&D expenses % (% of turnover)
Company 2014 2015 2016 2017 2018 2019
Ashok Leyland 2.71 1.35 1.47 1.8 1.5 1.97
Bajaj Auto 3.07 3.67 3.05 2.99 2.76 1.43
Suzuki 1.48 1.29 1.02 0.8 1.01 0.83
Hero 0.49 2.57 3.57 2.23 1.48 1.6
Table 9
Pharma– Trade payables % (% of turnover)
Table 10
FMCG– Trade payables % (% of turnover)
Company 2014 2015 2016 2017 2018 2019
HUL 20.07 17.05 17.19 16.71 20.11 18.38
Colgate-Palmolive 14.05 12.81 13.14 13.18 14.07 13.49
Nestle 6.96 7.39 9.64 8.66 9.71 10.74
Britannia Industries 8.77 9.68 9.21 7.5 9.23 9.85
Table 11
Automobile– Trade payables % (% of turnover)
Company 2014 2015 2016 2017 2018 2019
Ashok Leyland 25.9 19.52 13.53 14.31 15.48 15.06
Bajaj Auto 10.12 8.11 8.58 9.19 12.05 11.87
Suzuki 11.23 11.13 12.24 10.52 12.8 11.2
Hero 8.91 10.16 9.54 8.63 9.94 10.01
Table 12
Pharma– Trade receivables % (% of turnover)
Company 2014 2015 2016 2017 2018 2019
Sun Pharma 13.68 6.58 7.01 8.6 10.75 17.31
DRL 34.51 31.8 26.66 26.98 29.79 24.16
Cipla 16.1 17.66 13.75 13.25 15.35 19.36
Lupin 21.46 20.27 31.51 24.47 32.58 30.15
Table 13
FMCG– Trade receivables % (% of turnover)
Company 2014 2015 2016 2017 2018 2019
HUL 2.91 2.54 3.33 3.15 3.83 4.38
Colgate-Palmolive 1.51 1.73 2.42 2.85 4.6 4.66
Nestle 0.93 1.01 0.96 1.06 0.88 1.08
Britannia Industries 1.71 1.86 2.11 2.09 2.45 3.76
Table 14
Automobile– Trade receivables % (% of turnover)
Table 15
Pharma– Wages % (% of turnover)
Company 2014 2015 2016 2017 2018 2019
Sun Pharma 1.46 4.67 4.6 4.36 5.57 4.95
DRL 8.91 8.27 9.26 10.86 11 10.68
Cipla 19.41 11.1 11.4 10.53 10.4 9.98
Lupin 10.73 10.79 12.17 13.55 15.05 15.61
Table 16
FMCG– Wages % (% of turnover)
Company 2014 2015 2016 2017 2018 2019
HUL 4.44 4.51 4.29 3.86 4.17 3.77
Colgate-Palmolive 5.31 5.7 5.74 5.4 6.01 5.75
Nestle 7.4 6.97 9.4 9.7 8.98 8.36
Britannia Industries 3.75 3.43 3.78 3.66 3.81 3.64
Table 17
Automobile– Wages % (% of turnover)
Company 2014 2015 2016 2017 2018 2019
Ashok Leyland 7.73 8.74 5.83 5.62 6.34 5.51
Bajaj Auto 2.78 3.04 3.2 3.4 3.44 3.43
Suzuki 2.72 2.78 2.99 2.64 3.07 3.37
Hero 3.18 3.65 4.03 3.95 3.99 4.45
Table 19
Table 20
Industry average Pharma FMCG Auto
Wages % 9.80 5.49 4.10
Trade payables % 9.75 12.40 14.04
Trade receivables % 20.57 2.41 6.13
Inventory % 19.94 7.33 6.27
R&D expenses % 8.11 0.26 1.94
Profits % 12.49 12.19 7.34
ABSTRACT
Today is the era of fourth industrial revolution. As India is a fast developing economy of the world
and Women’s plays an important role in the development of the economy of the country today.
However, the increasing crimes against the women’s in India are a matter of concern to the
developing economy. Women population of the country is substantial and the Societies are known
to be matured by the way it treats its women. Due to recent sex related crime i.e. rape or attempt
to rape and increasing eve teasing and sexual harassment at work place, a need was felt to look
into the opinion of the population of the country in the present era of Industry 4.0.
The authors tried to study the primary data collected from the respondents mainly related to
opinion regarding sex related crimes against the women and solutions to control it. Various
statistical tests were conducted including chi square, z test likert scale and pivot table to ensure
that the opinions of the respondents is given due justice.
The Authors arrive to the conclusion that that most of the victims of the crimes against the women
are ranging to about 5% and men about 2%, in all the three parameters i.e. eye-teasing, sexual
harassment and abusive behavior/incidence i.e. rape or attempt to rape and they are in the age
group of 21-35 years either single or married, with high qualification i.e. post graduation or
graduation, employed either in private sector or students. The authors are also of the view that
there is a need to take a review of the prevailing laws and amending them and also educating and
understand the people, to protect the females from sex crimes and to enable them to live a
respectful life in the society, and to enable the country to develop in the era of Industry 4.0 and
move forward respectfully towards the era of Industry 5.0 in future.
Industry 1.0 refers to the first industrial revolution. It is marked by a transition from hand
production methods to machines through the use of steam power and water power. Industry 2.0;
the second industrial revolution or better known as the technological revolution is the period
between 1870 and 1914. The third industrial revolution or Industry 3.0 occurred in the late 20th
century, after the end of the two big wars, as a result of a slowdown with the industrialization and
Because many women who experience sexual violence rarely report or come forward about their
incidences, exact rape numbers are challenging to report. While many countries have laws against
the act of sexual assault and violence, many of them are insufficient, inconsistent, and not
systematically enforced.
While people mostly hear about rape and sexual assault against women, men around the world
also experience sexual harassment, sexual assault, and rape every day.
LITERATURE SURVEY
1.1 Ms. Kalaiyarasi [2015] in her Research Paper “Violence against Women in India” has looked
into the concerns of the Women in India from the time of ancient society; medieval society and
modern society. The methodology adopted was related to secondary data and had taken a look at
a comparative statement between of crimes against women between Tamil Nadu and All India on
head-wise incidence of reported Crime against women during 2011. In this she has looked into
various crime heads i.e. Rape, Sexual Harassment, Indecent Representation of Women
(Prohibition) Act, Dowry Prohibition Act, Molestation, Kidnapping and Abduction and Cruelty by
Husband and his relatives. In this has observed that total crimes under all heads were 6950 i.e.
.3.04% as compared to All India crimes under the said heads of 228569 crimes. She has also taken
a look at the Form of Violence experienced by women throughout their lifespan from various
phases which include Pre-birth, Infancy, Girlhood, Adolescence, Reproductive Age and Elderly.
The author has also taken a look at the head-wise incidence of reported Crime against Women
during 2008 to 2012 along with percentage variation in respect of ten heads. The author concludes
stating that if these factors can be controlled then more than one form of violence can be prevented
from harming an individual or society and India would be a much better place to live in. [2]
DEFINITIONS
3.01 Eve Teasing - The term eve teasing is referred as Sexual Assault or Sexual Harassment of
women, verbally, or by making vulgar gestures or by winking, whistling or staring, in public places
such as in streets, public transportation, park and many places of public meeting. [4]
3.02 Molestation – Any person who assaults a woman or uses criminal force on any woman with
the intention to outrage her modesty is guilty of an offence under section 354 of the Indian Penal
Code. He may also do so with the knowledge that by doing so he would be outraging the modesty
of the woman. Any person who utters any word or makes any sound or gesture or exhibits any
object with the intention that it will be seen or heard by such woman or will intrude up on her
privacy is guilty of insulting the modesty of that woman. [5]
3.03 Rape – Section 370 of the IPC 1860 defines Rape as below:
• penetrates his penis, to any extent, into the vagina, mouth, urethra or anus of a woman or
makes her to do so with him or any other person; or
RESEARCH METHODOLOGY
It is an Analytical Research. The present study is based mainly on Primary Data available in form
of collecting data through a questionnaire of Google form from all spheres of population. Also
some Secondary Data from the websites are taken for comparing world rate of such abuse or
incidence against the females. The data obtained is analyzed with pivotal tables, various statistical
tools viz., Likertscale, Chi-square and Z Test.
Source: http://worldpopulationreview.com/countries/rape-statistics-by-country
Table 1 indicates the details of the countries with the highest rates of Rape (number of incidents
per 100,000 citizens). As per the world population review 2020 of the population of 2019 that
the below countries are amongst the top ten countries with the highest rates of rape (number of
incidents per 100,000 citizens):
Table – 2: Top Ten Countries with highest Rape
India ranks 93 (1.8% of the 1,366,417,754 population of 2019) in the list of 116 countries whereas
USA ranks 13th (27.3% of the 329,064,917 population of 2019). It is also further observed that
about 35% of women worldwide have experienced some form of sexual harassment in their
lifetime. In the majority of countries that have data available on rape report that less than 40% of
women who experience sexual violence seek help. Less than 10% seek help from law enforcement.
Many women who experience sexual violence rarely report or come forward about their
incidences, exact rape numbers are challenging to report. While many countries have laws against
the act of sexual assault and violence, many of them are insufficient, inconsistent, and not
systematically enforced. [8]
6.2 Primary Data Analysis and Results
Primary Data was collected in the available in form through a questionnaire of Google form from
all spheres of population through social media channels viz., WhatsApp, Face Book, Linkedin etc.,
from all spheres of population to check the opinion of the population of India related to crimes
against women’s in India and whether there should be Death Penalty for crime like Rape, to put a
check on the increasing rate instances recently in the country.
Academic Qualification wise break-up Employed wises break-up Occupation/Sector wise break-up
Academic Tot Percent Tot Percent Occupation/ Tot Percent
Qualification al age Position al age Sector al age
Below Yes 152 50.33 Public Sector 28 9.27
Matriculation 00 0.00 49.67
No 150 Private Sector 101 33.44
Under Graduate 05 15.63 Grand Unorganized
Graduate 127 42.05 Total 302 100.00 Sector 03 0.99
6.2.1.1 Gender
Table 3 represents the Gender of participants in the survey. There were 302 participants. Of
which 194 (64.24%) were Male and 108 (35.76%) were Female. The highest participation was
by Males i.e. 64.24% as compared to 35.76% by Females.
6.2.1.2 Age –
Table 3 also represents the Age-wise break up of the participants. Of the 302 participants 02
(0.66%) were in the age group of 14-21 years, 220 (72.85%) were in the age group of 21-35 years,
29 (9.60%) were in 36-50 age group and 51 (16.89%) were in the age group of above 50 years.
The highest participation was from the age group of 21-35 years i.e. 220 (7285%).
6.2.1.5 Employed -
Table 3 also represents Employed wise break-up of the participants . It was observed that out of
302 participants 152 (50.33%) participants were employed, whereas 150 (49.67%) population was
not employed.
6.2.1.6 Occupation/Sector -
Table 3 also represents the Occupation/Sector wise break-up of the participants . Of the 302
participants of the survey 28 (9.27%) were from Public Sector, 101 (33.44%) were from Private
Sector, 03 (0.99%) from the Unorganized Sector, 26 (8.61%) were self employed, there was about
NC/ Grand
Employed Yes No NS Total Occupation/ NC/ Grand
Sector Yes No NS Total
Yes 105 41 6 152 Public Sector 19 7 2 28
No 91 54 5 150 Private Sector 71 28 2 101
Grand Unorganized
Total 196 95 11 302 Sector 1 2 3
Self Employed 15 8 3 26
Students 65 38 3 106
Retired/
Homemakers 25 12 1 38
Grand
Total 196 95 11 302
NC/ NC Grand
Gender Yes No NS Grand Total Age Yes No /NS Total
Male 148 31 15 194 14-20 1 0 1 2
It is observed from above Table – 5 of Gender, Age, Marital Status, Academic Qualification and
Occupation/Sector wise it was observed that Out of 302 participants, 148 (49.01%) Males and 85
(28.15%) females totaling 233 (77.16%) (Responded that they were aware (Yes) of definition of
Sexual Harassment at Work Place. However, it was surprising that of the 44 (14.56%) of which
of which Males were 31 (10.26%) and 13 (4.30%) were females who were not aware (No) of the
definition of Sexual Harassment at Work Place and the remaining 25 (8.28%) remaining of which
15 (4.97%) Males and 10 (3.31%) females had no comments to offer regarding awareness of
definition of Sexual Harassment at Work Place.
6.2.2.1.3 - Table – 6: Awareness of Legal Definition of Rape.
Occupation/ Grand
Grand
Sector Yes No NC/NS Total
Employed Yes Yes No Total
Public Sector 19 7 2 28
Yes 91 46 15 152
Private Sector 57 36 8 101
No 97 37 16 150 Unorganized
Grand Sector 3 0 0 3
Total 188 83 31 302 Self Employed 16 4 6 26
Student 69 28 9 106
Retired/
Home Maker 24 8 6 38
Grand
Total 188 83 31 302
It can also be noticed that the maximum responses for awareness of legal definition of rape in the
age-wise parameter was between the age group of 21-35, wherein the response was 143 (47.35%)
Yes and 55 (18.21%) No. In the Marital Status also those who were Single 129 (42.71%) were
aware of the same, whereas 53 (17.55%) were not aware. As regards Academic Qualification
related parameters the Post Graduates 105 (34.77%) were maximum aware of the said definition,
whereas it was followed by Graduates with 74 (24.50%). The No’s were 43 (14.24%), followed
by Graduates 38 (12.58%). As regards those employed 91 (30.13%) were bit aware of the same.
Maximum those who were not employed 97 (32.12%) were aware of the definition. In the
Occupation/Sector wise-parameter the maximum awareness was of Student s 69 (22.85%),
followed by those employed in Private Sector 57 (18.87%).
The above table 7 in Group II i.e. regarding awareness of Crimes against Women’s in India. Aw
regards opinion towards more crimes in Urban areas it was observed that 65 (21.52%) and 41
(13.58%) Females were of the view that it is more in urban areas. Whereas 39 (12.91%) Male and
27 (8.94%) women of the view that it is not more in urban areas, whereas maximum Male opined
90 (29.81%) that they have no comments to offer or were not sure of the same, the response of
females 40 (13.245) in this regard was there.
In the other groups i.e. age-wise it was observed that the 21-35 age group was maximum of the
opinion that crimes towards women are more urban areas. The Yes was 77 (25.50%) and No was
47(15.56%). The same was with the marital status group. The singles opined in favour 66
21.86%), whereas No were 45 (14.90%). In the Academic Qualification group the Post Graduates
in support of the view were the post graduates 51 (16.89%) followed by graduates 48 (15.89%),
whereas those who were not of the same opinion (No) was also more amongst the post graduates
37 (12.25%), and followed by graduates 27 (8.94%). Those employed 63 (20.86%) and not
employed 43 (14.24%) were in support of the view. However, those not in support in employed
were 38 (12.58%) amongst the employed and 28 (9.27%), but the maximum 79 (26.16%) not
employed and next 51 (16.89%) preferred not to offer comments or where not sure of the same.
Whereas that on Occupation/Sector wise parameter the more percentage 60 (19.87%) students
were not sure or did not have any comments to offer in this regard.
Grand
Employed Yes No NC/NS Total Occupation/ NC/ Grand
Sector Yes No NS Total
Table – 8 is for the expressing opinion whether crimes against women are more in Rural Areas.
In this in the Gender wise parameter the Yes was of Male 72 (23.85%), whereas 53 (17.55%)
females of the same i.e. However, the maximum 94 (31.12%) Men followed by 41 (13.58%)
females preferred not to offer any comments or were not sure of the same. In age-wise parameter
the maximum was 100 in 21-35 age group i.e. 100 (33.12), where as in the same group 94
(31.13%), were unable to view their opinion. In the marital status the response of Yes 87 (28.82%)
was from the Singles, whereas the singles 90 (29.80%), were at the same time not sure of the
awareness of crimes against women in rural areas. In academic qualification it was 68 (22.52%)
of post graduates and of graduates 52 (17.23%), and regarding the post graduates with no
comments it was 72 (23.85%) and graduates 57 (18.87%). Whereas in employed group those
employed Yes were 69 (22.86%) and more i.e.. 78 (25.83%) were of those who were not employed
were not aware of the same. In occupation/Sector wise parameter the private sector opinioned in
favour by 53 (17.55%).
NC/ Grand
Employed Yes No NS Total
Occupation/ NC/ Grand
Yes 131 9 12 152 Sector Yes No NS Total
No 120 11 19 150 Public Sector 22 3 3 28
Grand Private Sector 87 6 8 101
Total 251 20 31 302 Unorganized
Sector 2 0 1 3
Self Employed 25 0 1 26
Student 86 9 11 106
Retired/
Homemaker 29 2 7 38
Grand Total 251 20 31 302
It is observed from table 9 which indicates opinion regarding increasing of crimes against women.
In gender wise parameter the Male were agreeable with 148 (49.01%) and Female 103 (34.11%),
whereas in age-wise group 21-35 years were maximum Yes 179 (59.27%), in marital status 164
(54.31%). In academic qualification wise parameter the post graduates were 133 (44.04%)
followed by graduates 109 (35.77%). That in employed the Yes were maximum 131 (43.38%)
and in Occupation/Sector wise parameter the private sector were 87 (28.82%), followed by
Students 86 (28.48%).
NC/ Grand
Employed Yes No NS Total Occupation/ NC/ Grand
Sector Yes No NS Total
Yes 44 94 14 152 Public Sector 8 17 3 28
No 25 111 14 150 Private Sector 29 66 6 101
Grand Total 69 205 28 302 Unorganized
Sector 2 0 1 3
Self Employed 7 14 5 26
Student 19 78 9 106
Retired/
Homemakers 4 30 4 38
Grand Total 69 205 28 302
NC/ Grand
Employed Yes No NS Total Occupation/ NC/ Grand
Sector Yes No NS Total
Yes 12 136 4 152
Public Sector 4 22 2 28
No 2 139 9 150 Private Sector 6 93 2 101
Grand Total 14 275 13 302 Unorganized
Sector 1 2 0 3
Self Employed 1 24 1 26
Student 1 100 5 106
Retired/
Homemakers 1 34 3 38
Grand Total 14 275 13 302
Table 11 is indicating victimization of sexual harassment at work place. 10 (3.31%) Females and
4 (1.32%) Male’s responses Yes that they were victim of sexual harassment at work place. In age-
wise parameter 6 (1.99%) were from the age group of 21-35 years and 3 (0.99%) were form the
age group above 50 years. The married females 8 (2.64 %) and the singles 6 (199%) were victim
of sexual harassment at work place. In academic qualification wise group 7 (2.32%) post graduates
and 6 (1.98%) graduates were victim. From those employed 12 (3.97%) and those not employed
2 (0.66%) were victim and at the same time. Whereas amongst the employed 4 (1.32%) and not
employed 9 (2.98%) preferred not to offer any comments. It is also seen that from private sector
6 (1.99%), public sector 4 (1.325) and total all together 14 (4.63%) of the survey population were
victim of sexual harassment at work place.
NC Grand
Employed Yes No /NS Total Gran
Occupation/Secto Ye NC/N d
Yes 19 126 7 152 r s No S Total
No 4 137 9 150 Public Sector 5 22 1 28
Grand Total 23 263 16 302 Private Sector 10 87 4 101
Unorganized
Sector 1 2 0 3
Self Employed 3 20 3 26
Student 3 100 3 106
Retired/
Home Maker 1 32 5 38
Grand Total 23 263 16 302
NC/NS/Not Grand
Occupation/ NC/NS/Not Grand
Employed Yes No Required Total Sector Yes No Required Total
Yes 19 24 15 94 109 152 Public Sector 5 3 3 17 20 28
No 11 13 15 111 126 150 Private Sector 12 16 7 66 73 101
Unorganized
Grand Sector 1 1 1 0 1 3
Total 30 37 30 205 235 302 Self Employed 2 5 5 14 19 26
Student 8 11 9 78 87 106
Retired/
Homemakers 2 1 5 30 35 38
Grand
Total 30 37 30 205 235 302
Table 14 indicates reporting of sexual harassment to higher authorities. It is observed that out of
6 (1.99%), 5 (1.66%) female and 1 (0.33%) male had reported. 98 (32.44%) Female and 189
(62.59%) Male have not offered any comments. In 36-50 years age group 4 (1.33%) and above
50 years 2 (0.66%) had reported. In similar way 4 (1.33%) married and 2 (0.66%) single had
reported to higher authorities. Academic qualification wise it was observed that 3 (0.99%)
graduates and 2 (0.66%) post graduates had reported. Those who were employed 5 (1.66%) had
Gran Gran
Gende Ye N NC/NS/Not d NC/NS/Not d
r s o Required Total Age Yes No Required Total
Male 1 5 11 177 188 194 14-20 0 0 0 2 2 2
Female 2 15 5 86 91 108 21-35 1 14 9 196 205 220
Grand 279 36-50 0 3 3 23 26 29
Total 3 20 16 263 302 Above 50 2 3 4 42 46 51
Grand
Total 3 20 16 263 279 302
It can be observed from table 16 related to as to whether there is political will to control crimes
against women’s in India. Of the 134 (19.20%) 76 (25 .17%) male and 58 female (19.20%)
indicate that there is political will to control crimes against women. Whereas 74 (24.50%) Male
and 31 (10.27%) female are not having positive response regarding it. Age-wise parameter
indicates 99 (32.78%) in the group of 21.35, whereas above 50 years 21 (6.95%) are positive.
Marital status wise singles 89 (29.47%) and married 45 (14.90%) are having confidence in
political will. Academic qualification wise the post graduates 72 (23.85%) and Graduates 57
(18.87%), those employed 71 (23.515) and not employed 63 (20.86%) and from the private sector
6.2.2.5.2 Table 17: Opinion whether Law Enforcement Authorities in India are slow in
reacting to crimes against the Women’s.
Table 14 indicates regarding slowness of law enforcement authorities in India in reacting crimes
against the women. In the gender-wise parameter total 272 (90.07%) agree that the law
6.2.2.5.3 Table 18: Opinion Whether Judiciary Process in India is Slow for crimes against
Women’s.
Table 19 indicates the opinion of the respondents as to whether the prevailing laws are sufficient
to take care f crimes towards Women’s in India. Of the total 44 (14.57%) 30 (9.93%) Male and
14 (4.64%) Female are of the view that the prevailing laws are sufficient to take care. However of
the 229 (75.83%), of that 143 (47.35%) Male and 86 (28.47%) Male are of the view that the
prevailing laws are not sufficient. In Age-wise parameters also in the age group 21-35 years 173
(57.28%), in marital status wise parameter Singles 158 (52.32%), Married 69 (22.85%), Academic
Qualification wise Post Graduate 125 (41.39%) and Graduates 94 (31.12%), 121 (40.70%) not
employed and 108 (35.76%), Occupation Sector wise 83 (27.48%) students and 74 (24.50%) are
of the view that the prevailing laws are not sufficient to take care of crimes towards women’s in
India.
6.2.2.6.3 Table 20: Opinion regarding prevailing laws Be amended Or Re-written with
severe Punishment for Crimes against Women’s.
Table 20 gives the opinion of the respondents regarding amendment or rewriting the prevailing
laws with severe punishment for crimes against women. Of the 259 (85.76%) respondents, 159
(52.65%) males and 100 (33.11%) female agree to it, in age wise parameters the age group of 21-
35 years 189 (62.59%), 82 (27.15%) married and 174 (57.62%) single from the marital status
parameter, 140 post graduates (46.355), graduate 109 (36.09%), employed 129 (42.71%) and not
employed 130 (43.05%), students 89 (29.47%) and from private sector 86 (28.48%) are of the view
that the prevailing laws are required to amended or rewritten with severe punishment for crimes
against women in India.
Table 21 indicates the views of the respondents regarding encountering of the rapist is the solution
for speedy justice to the victim due to delay in justice to the rape victim. Of the 126 (41.72%), 67
Male (22.18%), Female 59 (19.54%) are in favour. However, 137 (45.36%) are not in favour it
includes 99 (32.78%) male and 38 (12.58%) female. Age-wise also 88 in the age group of 21-35
total 88 (29.14%) are in favour whereas 104 (34.44%) are not in favour. The marital status wise
parameters also indicate same i.e. single 81 (26.82%), married 43 (14.24%) are in favour, whereas
95 (31.45%) single and 42 (13.91%) single are not in favour of amendment, academic qualification
wise also it appears same i.e. post graduates 69 (22.85%) and graduates 52 (17.22%) are not in
favour, whereas 77 (25.50%) post graduate, 54 graduate (17.88%) are not positive for it. Employed
also 77 (25.50%) are Yes, whereas 60 (19.86%) are No. In respect of those who are not employed
77 (25.50%) and those employed 60 (19.86%) are not in favour. As regards occupation/sector
wise parameter 58 (19.20%) are Yes, whereas students 54 (17.88%) are No, for amending the
present laws.
6.2.2.7.2 Table – 22: Opinion regarding agreeing with the ideology of Swami Sadhguru
(Isha Foundation) that there is a need to understand and educate people to stop crimes
like rape against Women’s.
Table 24: Indicates respondents responses regarding need to understand and educate people to stop
crimes like rape against women’s. Of the 235 (77.82%) respondents, 148 (49.01%) Male, 87
(28.81%) Female, age-wise the age group of 21-35 years of 175 (57.95%) are of the view that there
is a need. Also 161 (53.31%), Single, 72 (23.85%), academic qualification wise the post graduate
129 (42.72%), Graduate 97 (32.12%). Amongst the employed 107 (35.43%), not employed 128
(42.39%) and 95 (31.47%) and form Private Sector 73 (24.17%) are of the view that there is a need
to understand and educate people to stop crimes like rape against women’s as opined by Swami
Sadhguru of Isha Foundation.
6.2.2.7.3 Table – 23: Opinion regarding separate Courts in India for crimes against Women’s
Table 23 indicates the opinion of the respondents regarding having separate courts in India for
crimes against Women’s in India. Of the 247 (81.79%) Yes, 153 (50.67%) Male, 94 (31.12%)
Female, age-wise the age group of 21-35 years is with maximum Yes i.e. 172 (56.95%), marital
status wise single 160 (52.99%), married 84 (27.81%), academic qualification wise the post
graduates 142 (47.02%), graduate 95 (31.465), of the 128 (42.38%) employed and 119 (39.41%)
not employed and 80 (26.4 9%) each students and from private sector of the view that there is a
need for having separate courts in India for crimes against Women’s in India.
Table 34 indicates the opinion of the respondents regarding awarding death penalty to the rapist
for rape crime. Of the 243 (80.47%), 140 (46.36%) Male, 103 (343.11%) Male, age wise 21-35
age group 174 (57.61%), as regards marital status vice 160 (52.98%), 80 (26.505) married,
academic qualification wise3 135 (44.71%) post graduate, 101 (33.44%) graduate and of the
employed 134 (44.38%), not employed 109 (36 .09%) and occupation/sector wise 92 (30.47%),
students 72 (23.84%) are of the view that Rape should be punishable by Death Penalty.
Chi square statistics for “Gender” is computed as per the formula and below is the working for it.
In a similar way Chi square statistic for all other variables/parameters is calculated and the final
results are shown in the table <Table Number>. Workings of one variable/parameter from each
group is appended below and the remaining have been calculated in similar way. The remaining
Groups have also been calculated in similar way. A table of Accept/Reject of the Hypotheses is
as per Annex – I.
6.2.4.1 GROUP – I - LEVEL OF AWARENESS OF LAW
1) – Level of awareness of POSH (Sexual Harassment) Act -
Ho: Level of awareness of POSH (Sexual Harassment) Act does not depend upon Gender.
H1: Level of awareness of POSH (Sexual Harassment) Ac t depends upon Gender.
Observed values:
Expected values:
Ei Oi (Oi-Ei)2/Ei
125.9073 126 6.82734E-05
70.09272 70 0.000122639
68.09272 68 0.000126241
37.90728 38 0.000226767
0.000543921
∑= 0.00 Calculated
To find the difference in responses of the Male and Female, a Z Test was adopted, with 5%
significance. The formula used is as below:
Z = x̅1 - x̅2
√ σ12/ n1 + σ22/ n2
Z Test value for all the variables/parameters of the Groups is calculated as below:
Table: 40
Gender Total
Male 194
Female 108
Grand Total 302
Table: 41
Total Mean Sigma Square
n1 = 194 x̅1 = 4.10 σ12 = 1.74
n2 = 108 x̅2 = 4.31 σ22 = 1.75
Z = 4.10 – 4.31
√ 1.74/194+ √1.75/108
= - 0.21172
0.158682
The Z Test in respect of all other Groups was carried out in same manner. It was observed that It
there was no difference in responses in respect of responses of the respondents in respect of Male
and Female. i.e.
IV. CONCLUSION
The data collected was grouped into eight groups to know the opinions of the respondents in
respect of eight main heads of the various parameters to have a clear picture regarding the
understanding of various definitions, crimes against women, victimization of abusive
behaviours/incidences, reporting of the incidences, opinion towards politicians, law enforcement
authorities, judiciary etc., opinion regarding prevailing laws, solutions to avoid such abusive
behaviours/incidences. The group wise conclusion is as below:
Group – I: Awareness of Law – Under this broad head an attempt was made to see whether the
respondents of the survey are aware of the POSH (Sexual Harassment) Act, Definition of Sexual
Harassment at Work Place and legal definition of work place. It was observed that out of 302
respondents, more than 60% of the respondents were aware of law and they were in the age group
of 21-35 years and were either single or married. Academic qualification wise they were either
Post Graduates or Graduates.. Also it was observed that most of them were employed in private
sector or were students.
Group – II: Awareness of Crimes against Women’s in India – Under this broad head an attempt
was made to know the opinion of the respondents as to whether the crimes towards women’s in
India are more in Urban areas or Rural areas and also whether the crimes towards the women’s are
increasing in India. It was observed that more than 60% of the respondents were of the view that
it is more in Urban areas, whereas the remaining 40% were of the view that it is more in Rural
areas. As regards increasing of crimes against women more than 80% agree that it is increasing.
In all the three parameters it was observed that more than 70% respondents were in the age group
of 21-35 years and were either single or married and they were post graduates or graduates and
about 40% were employed and were either working in private sector or students.
Group VI: Opinion regarding prevailing laws – In this the opinion of respondents was sought
as to whether the prevailing laws are sufficient or required to be re-written. About 75% of the
respondents agree that the laws are sufficient, but 85% of them also agree that there is a need to
amend or re-written with severe punishment for crimes against the women in India. The age
groups for both the parameters were mainly from 21-35 years, single or married, with post
graduation or graduation degree, employed in private sector or students.
Group VII – Solutions to avoid such behaviours/incidents – It was thought to seek solutions
from the respondents from the given parameters as to whether in their opinion due to delayed
justice to the victim o f rape, encounter of the rapist is the solution for speedy justice to the victim.,
also as to whether the ideology of Swami Sadhguru (Isha Foundation) regarding understanding
and educating people is also one of the solutions to stop crimes against women and whether there
is a need for setting up separate courts for the crimes against women. About 45% of the
respondents are not in favour of recommending encounter of the rapist as a solution for delayed
justice to the victim. About 42% are in favour and 13% are not sure or have no comments to offer
in this regard. It is worth noting that about 78% of the respondents are of the view that there is a
need to understand and educate the people on the lines of the ideology of Swami Sadguru and
about 82% of the views that separate courts to be set up for crimes against the women’s in India.
The age group of 21-35 years, respondents either single or married, with high qualification i.e.
post graduation or graduation, employed and working in private sector have maximum opined for
this solutions.
Group VIII – Opinion regarding Capital Punishment – Due to recent rape incidences in the
country and rise in it, an opinion of the respondents was sought as to whether rape should be
punishable by death. It is not surprising to note that more than 80% of the respondents are in
favour of death punishment for the rape crime. This is opined in the age group of 21-35 by about
58% and those above 50 by 15%. They are either single (53%) and married about 27% and are
Broad Conclusion – It can be broadly concluded that most of the victims of the sex related crimes
against the women are ranging to about 5% to 5.5% and men about 2%, in all the three parameters
i.e. eye-teasing, sexual harassment and abusive behavior/incidence i.e. rape or attempt to rape and
they are in the age group of 21-35 years either single or married, with high qualification i.e. post
graduation or graduation, employed either in private sector or are students. The various statistical
tests conducted have proved the analysis and hypotheses related to sex crimes against the women
and possible solutions to it. We have seen various stages of Industry from 1.0 to now 4.0, there is
tremendous progress in science and technology which has helped the industries to flourish, and
the participation of females in the growth of the industry is more, it is felt that we have achieved
Industry 4.0 and will achieve 5.0, in the near future, but what about the injustice and sex related
crimes which are on the rise against the females and to a certain extent to the males in India. There
is therefore a need to take a review by the government authorities and other authorities to enable
the females to live a respectful life in the society.
Suitable Model - Suggested Model for taking care of sex related crimes against women’s in India
–
• Creating an awareness of various laws related to crimes against women and sex education
in the urban and rural areas too.
• Creating an environment where in crimes can be reported freely to the higher authorities,
family, teachers and law enforcing authorities.
• Those with crime records should not be allowed to contest elections.
• Avoiding political pressure on the law enforcement authority to enable them to react fast
to the crimes.
• Deadlines to be set up for disposal of cases in respect of crimes against the women.
• The laws against crimes towards women and men should be suitably amended with severe
punishment.
• Since encounter of the rapist is not a solution for speedy justice, society should be educated
and a need to be created to understand the people.
• Setting up of separate Courts for crimes against Women’s for fast disposal of cases.
• Introduction of death penalty for crimes like Rape.
• Misuse of official positions should be dealt firmly, with suitable punishments for Career
growth of the females.
• Reviewing the age of marriage and recommending marriages at proper age.
References:
Journals
[2] Kalaiyarasi R [2015] – “Violence against Women in India”. IOSR Journal of Humanities And
Social Science (IOSR-JHSS) – Volume 20, Issue 2, Ver III (Feb.2015), PP 51-55, e-ISSN: 2279-
0837-p-ISSN:; 2279-0845 – www.iosrjournals.org.
[1] https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Industry_4.0
[4]https://www.google.com/search?ei=Fa7wXcK1DtrYz7sP5-
aboAI&q=eve+teasing+definition+%2B+I pc&oq=eve+teasing+definition+%2B+ipc&gs_l=psy-
ab.3..33i22i29i30l2.23211.27247..27598 ...1.2..0.140.903.0j7......0....1..gws-
wiz.......0i71j0i22i30.9hG-2Cc8K7A&ved=0ahUKEwiClK7
im63mAhVa7HMBHWfzBiQQ4dUDCAs&uact=5
[5] http://vikaspedia.in/social-welfare/women-and-child-development/women-development-
1/molestation
[6]
https://www.google.com/search?source=hp&ei=T7PwXevBNN7ez7sPnJi72A8&q=posh+act+se
xual+
harassment+definition&oq=posh+act+sexual+harassment+definition&gs_l=psy-
ab.3...1601.12886
..15003...0.0..0.183.4823.3j35....2..0....1..gws-
[7] https://lawrato.com/indian-kanoon/criminal-law/section-375-indian-penal-code-1860-ipc-
definition-of-rape-354
[8] http://worldpopulationreview.com/countries/rape-statistics-by-country/
Annex-I
Hypotheses Tested Table – Accept/Reject
Respondents Descriptive Statistics – Hypotheses Result
Sl Question Gender Age Marital Academic Emplo Sector
. Status Qual. yment
N
o.
Introduction
Finance accompanied with technology brings about the branch of Fintech, thereby referring to the
enterprises that make use of technology to upgrade financial services and the processes associated
with it. Fintech is booming in the recent era. Fintech provides a platform to effectively manage
various operations, businesses and consumer customization. Fintech makes use of software
platforms to make the process automated thereby reducing the problems associated with traditional
platforms. Fintech is made use of in several industries such as mobile banking, insurance, crypto
currency like bitcoin, investment apps, payments, loans, credit scoring, stock trading, etc. Fintech
companies provide a mix thereby bringing technologies like blockchain, Artificial Intelligence,
data science on a united platform in to enhance safety, speed and efficiency. Now, fintech is used
to make all processes customised. A collected data compilation of published FinTech patent
applications in the 2003–2017 period was accumulated and analysed (Chen et al. (2019)). This
study revealed that publicly traded companies as a group have driven only a minor range of
FinTech innovations to date. Private firms and non-firm individuals account for about 62.7
percentage of FinTech patent filings. 57.8 percentage of the FinTech corporate filings actually
belong to technology domain outside the financial industry. Behavioral finance comprises of the
influence of psychology on the investment behavior or financial analysts and its subsequent effects
on the market outreach. The theory of Behavioral finance states that:
1. Investors are treated as “normal” not “rational”
2. They actually have limits to their self-control
3. Investors are influenced by their own biases
4. Investors can make wrong decisions due to cognitive errors
Although behavioral finance treats investors as “normal”, they still make some decision errors
which can be classified as self-deception, heuristic simplification, social influence and
emotions. Behavioral Finance is used to understand the psychology of people and which leads us
to understand the market anomalies. If the investors have complete information about the asset
pricing, pricing of securities in the market, the prospect of the company in the future, government
guidelines for investment in the securities, still they can make decisions irrationally. This happens
because of the fact that investment decisions are affected because of potential outcomes as well as
emotional outcomes. The study of behavioral finance will help investors invest in profitable areas
and back out from loss-making ones. Fintech can be divided into three categories that is the
financial industry, innovation and law/regulation. Accordingly, there are various stake holders like
consumers, players in the market and the regulatory front.
A Report on Accenture and CB Insights has described companies operating in Financial domain
as companies that cater to technologies for data analytics, payments, banking and corporate
finance, capital markets, as given by (Skan, Lumb, Masood, & Conway, 2014). The FinTech
Report: Investment Trends in FinTech (2015) by the Silicon Valley Bank as reported a sharp
growth in technology in the area of personal finance, banking, payments, investments made in the
retail domain, equity financing, field of banking and research, alongside banking infrastructure.
As per (Dapp, 2014), the rise in the field was enhanced by an apt combination of hardware
(smartphones nowadays), and various technologies in software development along with growth in
communication technologies. Banks have played a big role in adopting technologies and in today’s
era, most of the services are being provided via electronic channels to an extent that the investment
in this has become a necessity (Alt & Puschmann, 2012). This serves as a new industrial revolution
expanding its reach in the finance domain thereby having a coverage of applications, for instance,
blockchain, cryptocurrency ,digital payment services, online trading thereby transforming every
space and the way at which things operate.(Goldstein et al., 2019).The money transacted via
digital offerings is to be the growth driver in developing economies by $3.5 trillion by 2025.The
World Bank (2018) predicts the financial services sector to show a manifold increase through
mobile phones in comparison to the traditional banking services. Fintech will mould the future of
the industry (Chuen and Teo (2015)) and innovations in fintech will lead to disruption of the
operation of traditional financial markets (Lee and Shin, 2018; Chanson et al., 2018). FinTech
could increase consumer benefit and decrease in the financial crisis (Loo (2018)).
Fintech is now emerging in different countries. Organic FinTech innovation could improve
efficiencies for promoter banks, but FinTech entrants increase competition for incumbent banks
(Navaretti et al. (2018)). Fintech companies use cloud computing that disrupts the working of
traditional banks (Gozman and Willcocks (2019). The share of fintech lenders in the market has
raised by four loops in six years (2010-2016) in the US market as they take less time to process
➢ Overconfidence - Investors are highly optimistic about their own investment decisions and
feel they have adequate information. They can also incur huge losses if they only
concentrate on their own abilities and ignore other factors.
➢ Disposition effect (Shefrin and Statman (1985)) - Investors tend to sell high selling stocks
to increase gains and hold low selling stocks to delay losses. Both gains and losses will
affect the final investment decisions.
➢ Herding effect (Shiller (2000) and Kahneman and Tversky (1979)) - Here, investors tend
to follow the decisions of other investors rather than relying on their own information. This
can lead to price deviations and reduced returns
➢ Mental accounting (Thaler (1985)) - Investors divide their investments into various
portfolios on the basis of their mental categories according to their idea of maximization
of returns and minimization of risks. They might not always be profitable but satisfy the
emotions of the investors.
➢ Confirmation bias (Dickens (1978)) - Investors have preconceived impressions and this
results in the fact that they align towards this information and ignore other information.
➢ Hindsight bias ((Fischhoff and Beyth(1975)) - Here the investor makes a cause and effect
relationship between two events in investment decision making even though there is no
relationship.
➢ House money effect (Thaler and Johnson (1990)) - There is a direct relationship between
profits and risk.
➢ Endowment effect (Kahneman et al. (1990)) - Investors give a lot of importance to what
they currently hold and don’t want to make any changes. Due to this, they can miss out on
profitable opportunities and such opportunities may remain at a low level.
➢ Loss aversion (Benartzi and Thaler (1995)) - Investors take more risks when there are
chances of loss and don’t take any risk when there are sure chances of profit.
➢ Framing (Tversky and Kahneman (1981)) - Risk-taking decisions depend on the
presentation of information. When the information is provided in the positive frame,
investors avoid risk to make sure profits and when the same information is provided in the
negative frame
➢ Home bias (French and Poterba (1991), Tesar and Werner (1995)) - Investors feel a sense
of belongingness towards domestic companies and are more inclined to invest in them even
if they give lower returns.
➢ Self - attribution bias (Bem (1967, 1972)) - People attribute their success to their own hard
work and intelligence and blame their failure on others or outside factors
➢ Conservatism bias (Edwards (1982)) - Investors stick to their own beliefs and forecasts and
don’t consider other factors.
Objective(s) of Research:
Methodology:
The paper reviews a multi-year research, which is secondary in nature, and the published
information available in the journals, public domain, white papers, and survey reports available on
the web on Behavioral Finance, emerging technologies based in the area of Finance, and the inter
dependability of the two fields on each other. We conducted a survey in the form of a questionnaire
to understand the factors that influence investment behavior. The various parameters include the
demographics, the sector people want to invest in, popularity of various financial instruments,
external factors that influence investment behavior etc.
The questionnaire collected as a part of the primary survey comprised of questions that took the
demographic information like age, qualification, city of residence and annual income. These were
taken to take into account how different age groups behavior towards investments and that income
group always plays a vital role in the same. About 60% of the respondents were of the age bracket
(16-30), about 20 % were of the age of (31-45), 10% were of the age bracket (46-60) and remaining
10% of above 60 years of age.
Another question was to know the most important factor for people while investing. The different
factors included short term goals, long term goals, high ROI (Return Of Investment), low cost of
investment, high profits, intuition, personal beliefs, peer pressure / social status, past returns, future
policies and company policies.
The next question in line was to know the preference sector of the respondents, out of FMCG,
Automobile, IT, Consulting, Media, Manufacturing, Retail and others. The most popular sector
emerged to be FMCG and the least being Automobile.
Another question was to know the financial instruments people were more likely to invest in, out
of equity shares, debts, bonds, securities, the more popular ones being equity shares and bonds and
insurance was more popular in the respondents in the age bracket of (41-60) and above.
The industry comprising of FinTech industry covers the following core areas: finance and
investment, operations and risk management, payments and infrastructure, data security and
monetization, and customer interface. The distribution of investment in the FinTech that most
popular in the areas of online lending, peer to peer lending, mobile wallets etc. The distribution is
given as follows:
Customization of services is being offered by FinTech thereby reducing costs and offering
personalized products. Indian banks have been much more progressive in their approach by
increasing their partnerships with FinTechs, like as Kotak 811 and SBI Yono. ICICI Bank is
empowering a neobank called Open. It began with the launching of identity in the form of Aadhaar
and then moves like Pradhan Mantri Jan Dhan Yojana to store money and then platforms like UPI
Despite all the advancements in the area of Financial Technology, Cybersecurity and privacy
issues have been a major concern. Global businesses have recorded almost 30 million security
breaches in the past. The data obtained from the RBI depicts that the banks have lost Rs.252 crore
to cybercrime between April 1, 2014 to June 30, 2017 .
In 2016, Reserve Bank Information Technology Pvt. Ltd. was being set up by the Reserve Bank
of India to cater to the needs of the cybersecurity for the bank and the entities. In 2017, the
government of India announced to set up a Computer Emergency Response Team for the financial
sector, that would analyze, information on cyber incidents in sector in addition to sending forecast
information along with alerts.
The third aspect deals with the relation of the two concepts, that is the dependability of behavioral
finance on FinTech. As per (Hyun-Sun Ryu paper titled,” What makes users willing or hesitant to
use FinTech?”, Software College, Sungkyunkwan University, Suwon, The Republic of
Korea,2017)
Conclusion
The brewing concept of FinTech poses various questions to know the detailed workings and the
upcoming changes that these technologies would bring about in the era. Our paper helps to
understand the concept in detail and how gradually it is gaining ground in today’s era. Besides,
Investments were always a part of the system since ages but the nature and behavior of investment
has come a long way. Since the oncoming of FinTech, various options have opened up leading a
way to various modes of payments, investments etc. Not only that, trust has been a major
foundation of investments, since a lot of security breaches, privacy attacks, cybersecurity issues
have been coming up, that poses a threat to the field but initiatives have been taken by the
government to improvise on the same. Our paper has covered all the three objectives, thereby
providing the analysis for the same.
Our Study composed of dealing with FinTech and Behavior of Investment and exploring the link
between the two segments. Our study comprised of a limited a set of respondents, which can be
refined to elaborate the research. Furthermore, more analysis can be taken ahead to know the
nuances of investment behavior. Alongside, detailed work can be done on the change in investment
behavior with respect to various financial instruments which is not elaborated in our research.
References:
Skan, J., Lumb, R., Masood, S., & Conway, S. K. (2014). The boom in global Fintech
investment: A new growth opportunity for London, Accenture report. Retrieved from
https://www.cbinsights.com/research-reports/Boom-in-Global-FinTech-Investment.pdf.
Accessed on February 3, 2016
Tallon, P. P. (2010). A service science perspective on strategic choice, IT, and performance in
U.S. banking. Journal of Management Information Systems, 26(4), 219_252.
The FinTech revolution. Retrieved from http://www.economist.com/news/leaders/21650546-
wave-startups-changing-financefor-better-FinTech-revolution. Accessed on March 14,
2016.
Dapp, T. (2014). FinTech _ The digital (r)evolution in the financial sector: Algorithm-based
banking with the human touch. Frankfurt am Main: Deutsche Bank Research.
College of Software,Sungkyunkwan University, Suwon, The Republic of Korea, and Kwang Sun
Ko Department of Financial IT, Kim & Chang, Seoul, The Republic of Korea
Hochstein, M. FinTech (the Word, That Is) Evolves, (2015). The American Banker. Retrieved
from http://www.americanbanker.com/bankthink/FinTech-the-word-that-is-evolves-
1077098-1.html. Accessed on February 3, 2016.
Chen, H., Wigand, R.T. and Nilan, M.S. (1999), “Optimal experience of Web activities”,
Computers in Human Behavior, Vol. 15 No. 5, pp. 585-608.
Alt, R., & Puschmann, T. (2012). The rise of customer-oriented banking _ Electronic markets
are paving the way for change in the financial industry. Electronic Markets, 22(4),
203_215.
Goldstein, I., Jiang, W. and Karolyi, G.A. (2019), “To FinTech and beyond”, Review of Financial
Studies,Vol. 32 No. 5, pp. 1647-1661.
Lee, C.H., Bian, Y., Karaouzene, R. and Suleiman, N. (2019), “Examining the role of narratives
in civic crowdfunding: linguistic style and message substance”, Industrial Management & Data
Systems, available at: https://doi.org/10.1108/IMDS-08-2018-0370 (accessed June 27, 2019 (Lee
and Shin, 2018; Chanson et al., 2018
Flavian, C., Guinalıu, M. and Gurrea, R. (2006), “The role played by perceived usability,
satisfaction and consumer trust on website loyalty”, Information & Management, Vol. 43 No. 1,
pp. 1-14.
(Parthasarathy and Bhattacherjee, 1998; Rao et al., 2001,Chandra et al., 2010; Sun, 2009; Sun,
2013).
Baur, A.W., Bühler, J., Bick, M. and Bonorden, C.S. (2015), “Cryptocurrencies as a disruption?
Empirical findings on user adoption and future potential of Bitcoin and co”, Proceedings of the
Conference on e-Business, e-Services and e-Society, Delft, pp. 63-80. (Hyun-Sun Ryu Software
College, Sungkyunkwan University, Suwon, The Republic of Korea,2017)
Ryu, H. and Ko, K. (2019), “Understanding speculative investment behavior in the Bitcoin context
from a dual-systems perspective”, Industrial Management & Data Systems, available at:
https://doi.org/10.1108/IMDS-10-2018-0441 (accessed August 22, 2019).
Sullivan, Y.W. and Kim, D.J. (2018), “Assessing the effects of consumers’ product evaluations
and trust on repurchase intention in e-commerce environments”, International Journal of
Information Management, Vol. 39, April, pp. 199-219.
Syed Aliya Zahera, Rohit Bansal (2017), “Do investors exhibit behavioral biases in investment
decision making? A systematic review”, Department of Management Studies, Rajiv Gandhi
Institute of Petroleum Technology, India, Vol. 10 No. 2, 2018 pp. 210-251.
Vikas Sangwan, Harshita, Puneet Prakash, Shveta Singh (2019), “Financial technology: a review
of extant literature”.
Xiuping Hua, Yiping Huang, Yanfeng Zheng (2019), “Current practices, new insights, and
emerging trends of financial technologies”, Industrial Management & Data Systems Vol. 119 No.
7, 2019 pp. 1401-1410
Alka Purohit
Assistant Professor
Saraswati College of Engineering,
Navi Mumbai.
Research Scholar
Jamnalal Bajaj Institute of Management Studies
University of Mumbai.
Abstract
India is confronting the Fourth Industrial Revolution. The Fourth Industrial Revolution represents
a fundamental change in the way we live, work, educate ourselves and relate to one another. It
presents a challenging phase in human development, enabled by extraordinary technology
advances, evolved as a result of earlier three revolutions. These technical advancements merge the
physical, digital and human worlds into work and life. The Fourth Industrial revolution also
impacts the higher educational sector, thereby creating immense growth, as well as, trials to face.
Market and socio economic changes impact education and the methods of imparting education,
namely, the Full time conventional as well as the Open and Distance learning (ODL) modes.
Higher education provides people the means to earn and support their existence.
This paper explores the prospects of how the Industry 4.0 as a revolution forces us to rethink the
techniques and approaches that higher education can develop, creating support for all those, who
are unable to study through a regular full time mode for certain reasons. The research adopts both
descriptive and exploratory methods to study and find out the parameters which ODL program is
already covering and the possible gaps which might impact the satisfaction, employment and
growth needs of the learners. The research also studies the deployment of ODL programs, in the
light of technology-driven transformations made possible, as a result of the Fourth Industrial
revolution. The outcome may create massive opportunities to coach everyone and create more
value for the stake holders, within the available educational resources.
The researcher has undertaken IGNOU (Indira Gandhi National Open University) as a
representation for ODL programs. The secondary data sources were analysed to find out the
methods, operations and consumption of ODL programs. Primary data was collected and analysed
by means of structured survey. The researcher also attempts to explore factors affecting the ODL
programs, and suggest ways to minimise any existing potential gaps to further increase student
satisfaction aiding development of Open and Distance learning Program, benefiting all stake
holders.
A. Key words: Open and Distance learning (ODL) program/ courses, Industry 4.0, ICT,
IGNOU, Higher education(HE)
Introduction:
“The whole purpose of Quality education is to turn learning into earning, currentsituation into
better solution and talent into meaningful living.” T Y Howard
Higher education today has transformed itself, confronting barriers posed by the dynamic
world economies, uncertain times and preparing students for the jobs which didn’t exist
some time ago but are existing today. Open and Distance Learning (ODL) system gives
opportunity to citizens who are separated by distance, time, as well as who are living at
geographically disadvantageous locations of the country.
In India, Higher education through Distance and Open learning consists of Indira Gandhi National
Open University (IGNOU), State Open Universities (SOUs), Institutions and Universities offering
education through Correspondence Course Institutes (CCIs) in conventional dual modes. ODL
mode gives flexible approach of working, independence to current workers, students and more
exposure towards further learning to all alike including women and adult senior learners.
The Indian government’s Distance Education Council sets and enforces academic standards of
Open and Distance Learning programs, publishing a list of recognized programs and subject areas.
Preparing students to sustainable employment options holds the key to make them enter the
Fourth Industrial revolution.
The emergence of Industry 4.0 is driven by rapid technology progress.
The concepts like, IOT, Big data analytics, Artificial intelligence (AI), Cloud computing,
Simulation, Robotics, Key technologies, Augmented Reality (AR) are being used to create more
meaningful and competitive boost to the business with integrated ERP systems, that spans not
only inventory and planning, but also financials, customer relationships, supply chain
management, and manufacturing execution. It digitizes, gives real time data.
Industry 4.0 is trending, touching the ODL education with various technical opportunities. The
education and businesses are restructuring and striving to produce the workforce for this new world
and the educational experience to match it.
Fourth Industrial Revolution (Industry 4.0) and Futuristic approach of Higher education:
• The term, Industry 4.0was originally coined by ‘Kagermann’ in 2011 while referring to the
Fourth Industrial revolution, which is gradually changing the ecosystem around people.
• Education providers are collaborating with Industry 4.0 to train the current population for
upcoming jobs and using effective technical platforms to disseminate HE ODL courses.
Possibilities of Adopting Elementsand Skills of Industry 4.0 for Higher education modes:
• Adopting elements of technical interface and skills of Industry 4.0 into the methods of
imparting ODL program can create better educational service and experience for learners.
(Universities of the future Report, www. universitiesofthefuture.eu)
AI, combined with CPS gives smart solutions, enables decision making, and creates new
processes for operations and quality control. IOT objects communicate with each other
combining knowledge of sciences.
Problem solving
Supported Learning:
Supported learning addresses Learner deficits, which can be tackled by coaching on several
competencies. (Mike Hamilton- Director, TSTL Technology,2019, www.digitalinclusion.co.za)
The factors and the demand drivers influencing the Open and Distance Learning program is clearly
observed for a country as vast as India.
• Vast geography and remote locations far from main city
• Senior and Adult learning
• Female literacy and higher education empowerment covering Indian demography
• Working on the job population for career development, time flexibility, digital modes of
delivering contents have increased demand of ODL programs across all sectors.
• Technological growth with digital platforms like, SWAYAM, SAKSHATe-Repository
connects ODL students via CEC e-content,‘e-PG-‘Pathshala’, Virtual classrooms, MOOCs
via NPTEL National Program on Technology Enhanced Learning.
• Providing Literacy for all at minimum cost: “Open and distance education enabled and
delivered through information and communication technology (ICT) holds the promise to
address the questions of access, and provide new, alternative forms of capacity building.”
(NKC, 2009, page 4)
• Global players have brought both change and competition: Appearance of new global
Universities offering on-line ODL programs. Today, ‘Coursera’ reaches out to 40 million
people and 1900 businesses all over the world and operates with 16 well-known
universities, such as University of Stanford, Princeton, Michigan, etc. Course certificate
recognized by companies like Google, IBM, and more. (www.coursera.org)
The University has established 8 Regional Centers in the North-East Region with special
attention to disadvantaged sections of the society and regions adding special study centers in
the backward areas and districts with low female literacy rate.
IGNOU has programs, ranging from purely academic to technical, professional and
vocational at various levels leading to award of Competency Certificates, Diplomas,
Bachelor’s, Master’s and Doctor’s degree to successful candidates. Many of these
programs are modular in nature.
• International Activities:
IGNOU offers its programs in other countries, which include United Arab Emirates (UAE)
countries, SAARC countries, under SAARC consortium for Open and Distance
Learning (SACODIL) and Global Mega Universities Network (GMUNET).
- India is third major donor in COL, after United Kingdom and Canadaand represented
through Secretary, in-Charge of HE on the Board of Governors and COL committee.
Theoretical Framework:
Location convenience
Timing flexibility
Utilization of ICT
Literature review:
Planning Commission Approach Paper: As we proceed into the new age Fourth Industrial
Revolution 4.0, Planning Commission’s Approach paper to the 12th Five Year Plans holds ground
which clearly states that, “There is a need for a clear focus on improving the employability of
Graduates. Indian Higher education is organized into ‘General’ and ‘Professional’ streams.
General education’ which is an excellent foundation for successful knowledge-based careers, often
fails to equip Graduates with necessary work skills due to poor quality.”
Choudhary and Shankar 1, (2016), mentions in their paper, that the quality of ODL program
needs to grow with the changing and practical times in terms of employment opportunities, skill
development, study material provided, career counseling at various stages of students, quality of
relevant study components, to ensure better job opportunities which the students are lacking. But
the paper does not talk specifically about the Upcoming challenges of the ODL program to suit the
Industry 4.0. The paper states a clear need of up-gradation of content in higher studies or skill
specific studies to attract quality employers since a lot of students took job other than their domain
specific areas.
(Bordoloi2)Past research work done on the Open and distance learning program expresses that
ODL program is vital to the large population of a country like India and can provide skill-based
learning empowering the human resource to suit the up - coming challenges of the Industry. The
challenges have been pointed out with regards to larger aspects like access to education, equity
and employability, deriving long term benefits from education received, developing life skills, soft
skills, access to technology, quality, innovation and research.
(Ally, Wark3):Mentions of ODL to the Fourth Industrial Revolution (4IR) is much required, since
there is an urgency to adopt the technologies both in content and application; such as AI (artificial
intelligence, Robotics, Internet of Things (IoT), and data analytics in education according to
Sustainable development Goals for educationand is “to ensure inclusive and equitable quality
education and promote lifelong learning opportunities for all” as per United Nations Sustainable
Development Agenda, 2030.
(Dr. Liza Simmons4, 2015,) conveys in COL’s Strategic planning Report,(2015-2021) that, COL
has identified “education” and “skills development” as the two pillars of its Strategic Plan 2015–
2021. The theme is “Learning for Sustainable Development” and reflects COL’s commitment to
strengthening human capital through quality learning opportunities that lead to livelihoods and
empowerment. COL will draw on its expertise and experience in open, distance and technology-
enhanced learning to increase access, reduce costs and enhance the quality of learning for all.
(Mohammad, Aly,)5 The study on ‘Learning for Sustainable Development in the Fourth Industrial
Revolution’ by calls for scope for further research in their paper mentioning that Case studies, Cost
verses benefit analysis of research across all sectors, cultures, and geographic locations to develop
a more comprehensive, perspective to deal with the global challenges of implementing 4IR
technologies or synergistically attaining Sustainable development goals.
Research Methodology:
The paper adopts both Descriptive and exploratory research methods. The data for the research
was conducted on the basis of both Secondary and Primary data sources of information.
Research Design:
The study was designed to provide relevant information, both qualitative and quantitative,
regarding Open and distance learning programs to take informed and constructive decisions
looking at the major concerns of respondents.
Both Secondary sources and Primary sources were used for Data collection
Primary sources:
Primary data was sourced through structured questionnaire sent across to respondents of Open and
Distance learning program by means of web-based form, to approx. 121 respondents, keeping in
view, the requirements and variables identified from the literature review.The respondents who
are either stake holders related to ODL program or to students who have completed any course
through ODL mode.
Secondary sources:
The secondary sources include data extracted from Reports of MHRD 2016, IGNOU Tracer
Universities of the Future Report
- Understanding India Report, British council, 2014
- IGNOU Tracer Studies Report, 2016
- Report on All India Survey on Higher education, 2015-16, 2017-18,2018-19.
- Department of Higher education, MHRD, Govt. of India
- Report by UNESCO (2002)
- Human development Report, 2016-17
- Planning commission Report, 2014-17
Population and sample:
Convenience sampling
The survey questionnaire received around 43 responses
Dependent Variable:
Student satisfaction
Independent variables:
Data Analysis:
Interpretation: More Graduates opted for the ODL courses, followed by Postgraduates and
Undergraduates
Interpretation: Most centers were Wi-Fi enabled, used ICT platforms and e-library, Website
information display at some centers, online exam & result facility used. At some centers, there was
no technical facility.
Q6. How is the Regularity of lecture conducted/ relayed at the ODL study center?
Interpretation: Syllabus was mostly updated, followed by somewhat updated syllabus. Rarely
updated at a few centers.
Q8. Is Career counselling provided at your center?
Interpretation: Most respondents were not sure of the facility. Respondents equally responded to
No counselling facility at some centers and some centers gave such facility.
Q9. Is Placement/ Employment assistance given at your ODL study center?
Interpretation: Soft Skills development courses was opted by most respondents, followed by
Personality development and Additional language learning courses. Technical skillscourses ,
Cyber security and Industrial management were opted by few respondents.
Q 11. What were the reasons of joining an ODL program?
Interpretation: Respondents expressed for Career development as main reason for joining ODL
course, followed by Additional knowledge / skill learning and Additional degree.
Interpretation: Respondents were not sure of the course help in getting, followed by some
who indicated ODL course help in employment. Few did not opt for course help.
Q 14. Are the lectures ODL program interactive and incorporate fun activities?
Interpretation: Flexible of timings was most preferred, followed by flexible curriculum and
Freedom of choosing subjects. Technology support was preferred by few respondents followed by
better options of course and attending daily lectures was not a concern.
Interpretation: The majority of respondents gave an affirmation to the Value for money for ODL
course followed by some who were not sure. Less respondents gave negative response.
Q18. Any other feedback about the ODL program (by respondents)
Recommendations:
Based on the analysis of Secondary and Primary data and with reference to the Elements
and Skills of the Fourth Industrial Revolution, the following recommendations can be made
benefitting all stake holders of the ODL program, enhancing student satisfaction.
References:
A tracer study of IGNOU graduates, Choudhary, Shankar, 2016
http://journalijcar.org
www.ignou.ac.in
Transforming and empowering higher education through Open and distance learning, in India,
Ritimoni Bordoloi, State open University, 2018
www.emraldinsight.com
Dr. Liza Simmons, Chair Commonwealth, Report on
http://oasis.col.org/
www.mhrd.gov.in
www.sakshat.ac.in
Learning for Sustainable Development in the Fourth Industrial revolution
Fourth Industrial revolution and the paradigm change in engineering education
Rustem Sakhapov, Svetlana Absalyamova, 2018
www.doi.org
Annual Report on Higher Education, 2018-19,
www.aishe.gov.in
ABSTRACT
The contemporary organizations in the twenty first century have become a hub for cross cultural
activities. Workforce diversity is an assortment of people descending from various cultures and
conditions, all working together in harmony to achieve the same organizational goals. This paper
aims at exploring workforce diversity and its impact on productivity. The paper with the help of
an employee survey emphasizes that communication and effective teamwork leads to increase in
productivity.
Keywords: Human Dimensions, Workforce Diversity, Productivity, Organizational
Communication, Inter-culturality, Cultural Differences, Millennial
INTRODUCTION
Human Dimensions can be represented by workforce diversity and its inter-culturality. It is a
heterogeneous assortment of people descending from various cultures and conditions, all vibing
and working together in harmony to achieve the same organizational goals. Here, diversity shows
that the workforce of any organization must comprise of employees having varying demographics
like age, gender, ethnicity, religion, race, geographical locations culture and language; or simply,
lifestyles.
No two human beings can be considered similar; mentally, or physically, Workforce diversity aims
at bringing divergent people together, who converge at the same point; the point being
organizational goals and objectives. This draws and attracts calibre from other disciplines, and
creates its own unparalleled unique field. It is influenced by a number of disciplines such as
psychology, engineering, sociology, behaviorism and economics. Also, professional qualifications
and the behavioral attitude that comes along with it, have a great impact on the workplace
dynamics.
In the current global economy, there exists competition at every stage. Every individual,
organisation or even a country as a whole, is highly interdependent on each other. For instance, a
Sri Lankan might use a phone designed at United States, with components made in Mexico and,
assembled and ware-housed at India. For any organization to thrive as a part of the global economy,
they have to hire a quality, diverse workforce; as for any organisation, human resource is an asset
of the highest order while will drive them towards excellence (Ankita Saxena, 2013).
Millennials are more drawn towards real-time feedback, socially engaging experiences and access
to handy mobile phones. Being born in the digital era, they are well-versed with technology; they
LITERATURE SURVEY
For years, researchers have been studying workforce diversity in various organizations at various
levels. With every new study or survey, new developments arise which play a vital role in the
implementation and maintaining of a diversified divergent workforce. Kanu (2008) surveyed that
the organisation, Goldman Sachs has stretched its discussion from domestic to international level
with additional 30,000 employees descending from about 160 countries.
Jakob Lauring believes that workforce diversity is a necessity for organizational growth as well as
for the economic development of any country (Jakob Lauring, 2009). He also says that diversity
can be in the form of qualifications, skills and knowledge, and that sharing of knowledge acts as
an important tool for any organization to grow from within and excel.
Radha Mohan states that it is amazing to have a culturally competent workforce but managing it
can be equally challenging as building up the workforce (Radha Mohan Chebolu, 2007). Sharbari
Saha and co-authors agree with this and further say that an organization is not competitive enough
in the global market if it does not possess a diversified workforce (Sharbari Saha, Dewpha
Mukherjee Patra, 2008). Kulin Patel and authors focus on diverse workforce planning when
mergers and acquisitions take place. They say that a merger is like a marriage in which employees
from both companies must be adaptable and show compatibility (Kulin Patel and Anuradha
Sriram, 2010).
Marie and co-authors believe that there exists both positive as well as negative impact of workforce
diversity on the company; positive impacts such as rise in innovation and creativity and negative
impacts such as conflicts and workforce politics (Marie-Élène Roberge , Rolf van Dick, 2010). A
study conducted by Ferraro, Gupta and Jandit concentrates on the fact that a diverse workforce
consistently increases workplace productivity (Ferraro, 2001; Gupta, 2008; Jandit, 2003). Daniel
V. trusts that having a diverse workforce with no conflicts is one of the greatest challenges in the
business scenario (Daniel Vloeberghs”, 2005). He further says that diversity in an organisation
stands for equality.
The business landscape is an ever-changing platform with new upcoming business models, new
business plans, new competitions and new technologies. It has become of utmost importance to
keep up with this, by constantly thinking on your feet, discovering unconventionally thinking
mechanisms and having the courage to try out never-tested-before techniques or solutions.
This can all be summed up with: Having the best of both worlds. Workplace diversity helps in
maintaining, rather, increasing performance by embracing and encompassing behaviour and
For example, The Indian Premier League (IPL), international cricket players from various
countries come, practice together from overseas and give their best performance as a team. This
can only be possible when the players respect each other’s cultural heritage as well as cultural
differences; moreover they are willing to incorporate the best techniques form across the globe
into their sportsmanship, to achieve a single task, winning the league.
On conducting a survey with 125 employees at India, working at various organizations, I have
discovered that 63.2% people would agree to help a complete stranger at a workplace, irrespective
of their origins. 89.5% people are willing to interact with new work-mates who completely differ
from them. Only, 21.1% people prefer to hang with people from their same region over people
from other regions. And 73.7% people would whole-heartedly participate and initiate inter-
cultural work events.
CONCLUSION
The contemporary organizations in the twenty first century need to inculcate cross cultural
activities and behaviour; taking into account the Millennial needs. Diversification with a perfect
blend of all cultures is an important aspect for any organization to attain excellence and equality.
With the above statistics and generation woke-ness in mind, I would like to propose the
developments of a Zaeden Approach should take place. The Zaeden Approach will serve as an
REFERENCES
1. Ferraro, G. P, (2001) “Global brains: Knowledge and competencies for the twenty-first
century” Intercultural Associates, Inc.
2. Ephraim A. Okoro, Melvin C. Washingto, (2012) “Workforce Diversity And Organizational
Communication: Analysis Of Human Capital Performance And Productivity” Journal of
Diversity Management
3. Kanu, K, (2008) “The new workforce : Black Enterprise” ABI/INFORM Global.
4. Jakob Lauring, (2009) “Managing cultural diversity and the process of knowledge sharing: A
case from Denmark” Scandinavian Journal of Management
5. Radha Mohan Chebolu, (2007) “Culture Compatibility The Way Forward” HRM Review
6. Sharbari Saha, Dewpha Mukherjee Patra, (2008) "Cross-cultural Issues Intricacies and
Ignorance" HRM Review ICFAI University Press
7. Patel Kulin & Sriram Anuradha, (2010) “Culture assessment in a Cross Country Deal:
Exploring the role of organizational culture and cultural compatibility in an M&A
transaction” Global HR, Human Capital
8. Marie-Élène Roberge , Rolf van Dick, (2010) “Recognizing the benefits of diversity: When
and how does diversity increase group performance?” Human Resource Management Review
9. Bogaert, S, Vloeberghs, D, (2005)“Differentiated and individualized personnel management:
Diversity management in Belgium” European Management Journal
10. Saxena, A. (2014) “Workforce diversity: A key to improve productivity” Procedia Economics
and Finance
Abstract
We are today a connected world. This paper studies the global internet penetration as
also the India internet penetration. The use of Social media platforms by consumers has
grown by leaps and bounds greatly contributing to our concept of a connected world.
The mobile phone- especially the smartphone as a device is in use for several purposes
and has become very close to the consumer, it is a personal owned item. In recent years,
the usage of apps has multiplied. This research paper seeks to understand consumer
behavior in an interactive world- hrs being spent on a daily basis by consumers on the
mobile phone which then is re- defining social behaviour. Through this research study
we get an understanding of Indian consumer behaviour with respect to the social
platforms being commonly used, the apps being downloaded, the usage of dual sims
and therefore different numbers for different purposes.
More than 10 apps are being downloaded by a consumer irrespective of age group
which is related to a willingness and a mindset to explore technology.
Statistical Modelling has been done and taken through four iterative processes and
models to get an acceptable model.
Keywords- internet users, social media platforms, apps in various categories,
dual sim usage, reasons-installing and uninstalling an app.
Introduction
When I was in college in the ‘70s, there was nothing like the internet. Today, we
cannot imagine the world without the internet. We all have come to believe that all
research should commence on the internet through a “Google search.” It is our first
step for finding information on any subject. As the years go by, we all believe that we
are all connected, which we are! We are all so connected and yet there is a loss of the
personal touch….This research study provides a snapshot of the consumer behaviour
in India in a connected world, how habits are changing, what the consumer is leaning
towards. The initial section of the paper provides the Macro Global and the Macro
India scenario on internet users and the trends that are becoming pre-dominant.
Global Scenario
The internet penetration across counties is tremendous. It has grown by leaps and
bounds over the last decade. North America and North Europe have a 95% internet
penetration rate amongst the population. Globally, there are 4.48 billion active
While looking at the data between 2005 and 2019, the worldwide active internet users
have grown from a base of 1.1 billion in 2005 to 4.1 billion in 2019.
0.
5
2005 2006 2007 2008 2009 2010 2011 2012 2013 2014 2015 2016 2017 2018 2019
Year
Source: Statista
The top 10 countries for internet penetration are:
Country
200
10
0 2015 2016 2017 2018 2019 2020 2021 2022 2023
The mobile phone is seen as a necessity by all classes of consumers in urban India
and its usage has spread to rural India too.
The news reports on the overall telecom market in India in the last two years indicate
a lot of turmoil. There has been strong competitive play amongst the leading players
Bharti Airtel, Vodafone-Idea with the entry of Reliance Jio.
As per news reports, in March 2019, India’s overall mobile user base dropped from
1180 mn to 1160mn. Two major carriers- Bharti Airtel and Vodafone-Idea subscriber
base reduced considerably. Analysts believe that both these players were scrubbing
and have been removing the inactive base of subscribers from their customer base.
Reliance Jio on the other hand grew its subscriber base to exceed 350mn as was
indicated to the author by a senior person from Reliance Jio in a meeting with the
author in Oct 2019.
Reliance Jio considers itself as a company in the business of Digital Services
providing 4 G connections. The company has a future focus on 5G. The growth push
from Jio focussed significantly on Distribution in both urban and rural India.
The high growth of mobile phone usage and India becoming the second largest
country in number of internet users, is attributed to India having a young population,
the growing, aspirational middle class in India and bringing in first time users in
rural India.
The aspirational aspect of the middle class plays a large role. A large number of internet
users in India are mobile phone internet users and smartphone usage in our country is
significant.
The statista estimate for smartphone users is 374mn in 2019.
Table 1.
Research Study
We at SDA Bocconi Asia Center- Center of Excellence-India Lab, undertook a
consumer research study with the following objectives:
Objectives
1. To study the mobile phone behavioural usage patterns and preferences of
social media among consumers in India
2. To gain an understanding of how consumers behave across mobile apps,
sites and services they use- on their mobile phones
3. To discover insights and understand what drives consumers to install,
engage, and uninstall apps across categories-on their mobile phones
Research Methodology
1. Secondary research undertaken on the internet of data sources: Statista, Sannmar
4s, ET- press reports to understand current Macro Global trends and Macro India
trends.
2. A research tool for a field study was prepared covering the above
objectives and pretested.
3. The Research tool was modified and finalised after the pre-test and field team of
Sample Details
A sample size of 1452 consumers was achieved across Most states in India.
A demographic analysis of the sample has been done on age, gender, states and
professional profile.
Age: The sample covered all age groups. Age profile has been shown graphically.
Approximately 73 % of the sample is in the age group 16-35 yrs, 24% from 36-55yrs,
and the balance above 55 yrs
Fig 1
Fig 2
Government Employee
537, 37% Home-maker
183, 12%
Junior working professional
Middle working professional
Other
287, 20%
191, 13%
Retired
9, 1%
9, 1%
25, 2%
Google Pixel
Nokia
• With respect to Feature phones, the brands used are: Samsung, Nokia and Reliance Jio
Total
0% 15%
0-2 hours
More than 6
• The phones are used for calling 33%, for social networking-30%, and Whatsapp-27%.
• Whatsapp has taken the place of texting. The next in order are entertainment,
mobile payments and texting.
Total
1%
Social Networking
3%
30%
Whatsap
3% 1% p
(blank)
Total
0%
10-15
27% 15-20
23%
20-25
5-10
7%
15% More than
4% 4%
0 to 3
28%
17% 4 to 7
8 to 11
12 to 15
More than
47% 15 NA
The top 10 Ranking of the categories from which apps are downloaded are:
1. Social Networking
2. Entertainment
3. Online shopping
4. Food Delivery
5. Music
6. News
7. Gaming
8. Travel
9. Utilities
10. Health and fitness
Trends in Usage of Apps
• 75% of the sample use between 1-7 apps most frequently.
• The average number of Apps downloaded by the
sample is 4. The top 3 apps being used in the sample are:
1. Whatsapp
2. Instagram
3. Facebook
The top 3 categories where apps being used the most:
1. Social Networking
2. Entertainment
3. Music
Fig 11
Fig 13
Developing a model
The Regression
Model Used Model 1:
Cellphone usage was regressed on age (X1), ownership of smartphone (X2), number
of apps used (X3) and no. of sims (X4).
Model Summaryb
Std. Error
Mode l Adjusted of the
R R Square R Square Estimate Durbin-Watson
1 .339a .115 .113 1.60107 1.930
ANOVAa
Sum of Mean
Model Squares df Square F Sig.
Coefficientsa
95.0%
Unstandardized Confidence Collinearity
Coefficients Interval for B Statistics
Std. Lower Upper
Model B Error t Sig. Bound Bound Tolerance VIF
1 (Constant) 3.283 .452 7.263 .000 2.396 4.170
x1 -.030 .004 -8.094 .000 -.038 -.023 .898 1.114
x3 .043 .006 7.686 .000 .032 .055 .913 1.096
x4 .305 .086 3.537 .000 .136 .474 .962 1.039
x2 .505 .419 1.205 .228 -.317 1.328 .983 1.018
a. Dependent Variable: y
It was seen that while the F ratio denoting the usability of the model was significant,
the adjusted r^2 of the model was low at 11.3%. Further, X2 was insignificant. The
model did not exhibit a high degree of multi-collinearity or autocorrelation. But Breusch
Pagan test and White’s test both indicated the presence of heteroscedasticity.
Model 2:
As more than 99% of the sample taken were owners of smartphones, it was felt that
there was a lack of sufficient variability in the ownership of smartphone dummy
variable. X2 was dropped from the model and Y was regressed on X1, X3 and X4. The
results were as follows:
Model Summaryb
Adjusted
R R Std. Error of Durbin-
Model R Square Square the Estimate Watson
2 .338a .114 .112 1.60132 1.928
ANOVAa
Model Sum of df Mean F Sig.
Squares Square
Regression 478.164 3 159.388 62.158
Coefficientsa
95.0%
Unstandardized Confidence Collinearity
Coefficients Interval for B Statistics
Std. Lower Upper
Model B Error t Sig. Bound Bound Tolerance VIF
1 (Constant) 3.777 .190 19.928 .000 3.406 4.149
x1 -.031 .004 -8.206 .000 -.038 -.023 .903 1.108
x3 .044 .006 7.794 .000 .033 .055 .918 1.090
x4 .311 .086 3.608 .000 .142 .480 .965 1.036
a. Dependent Variable: y
It was seen that though there was a marginal improvement in the F ratio, but the adjusted
r^2 was still low at 11.2%. But all the variables were significant, there was no
multicollinearity problem or autocorrelation. However, the model suffered from
heteroscedasticity.
Model 3:
A log model was considered to overcome the heteroscedasticity problem by
regressing ln y on ln X1, ln x3 and ln X4. The log model is given below:
Model Summaryb
Mode R R Square Adjusted R Std. Error of Durbin-
l Square the Estimate Watson
1 .370a .137 .135 .55252807987 1.927
ANOVAa
Sum of Mean
Model Squares df Square F Sig.
1 Regression 69.914 3 23.305 76.336 .000b
Residual 442.056 1448 .305
Total 511.970 1451
a. Dependent Variable: lny
Coefficientsa
95.0%
Unstandardized Confidence Collinearity
Coefficients Interval for B Statistics
Std. Lower Upper
Model B Error t Sig. Bound Bound Tolerance VIF
1 (Constant) 1.632 .180 9.070 .000 1.279 1.985
lnx1 -.339 .044 -7.704 .000 -.425 -.252 .891 1.122
lnx3 .270 .027 9.881 .000 .217 .324 .908 1.102
lnx4 .138 .043 3.216 .001 .054 .223 .960 1.042
Though the model showed all regressors to be significant, the adjusted r^2 was still
low at 13.5% (but significant) and the heteroscedasticity persisted.
Model 4:
The reason for the heteroscedasticity was because of the limited data range of the
regressors, especially age and the number of apps. White’s test in the case of model 2
showed that the square of the residuals was significantly related to X1^2 and X3^2.
As a remedial measure, the model was transformed by dividing by X1. The results
were as follows:
Model Summaryb
Adjusted
R R Std. Error of Durbin-
Model R Square Square the Estimate Watson
1 .692a .478 .477 .06024177094 1.983
ANOVAa
Sum of Mean
Model Squares df Square F Sig.
1 Regression 4.819 3 1.606 442.641 .000b
Residual 5.255 1448 .004
Total 10.074 1451
a. Dependent Variable: ybyx1
b. Predictors: (Constant), x4byx1, x3byx1, onebyx1
This model had an adjusted r^2 of 47.7% and a higher F ratio. All the variables
were significant. However, the heteroscedasticity still persisted as the data was
cross sectional and measured in ranges/slabs. While more model options could
have been developed, it would be time consuming and expensive. It was decided to
go ahead with this model as the adjusted r^2 was higher than the earlier models.
Conclusions
There are several interesting Learnings from the Research:
1. It is the smartphone mobile device which is dominating the Indian market currently.
2. The mobile phone has become a part of an individual’s persona, not just the brand
owned but also the number of hours being spent on the phone using various
platforms and apps. The Indian consumer seems to be very absorbed with the
mobile phone.
3. The average time being spent by an individual on the phone is 3.96 hrs per day-
based on the sample, which is 28 hrs per week.
4. This medium is therefore very close to the consumer, and will have to be
considered in all communication and marketing strategies.
5. There is a trend of dual sims being owned and used by individuals, 44 % of the
sample are using dual sims to achieve their objectives.
6. The telecom operators should understand this behaviour of individuals and
accordingly prepare sales and marketing plans
7. A large number of consumers are willing to pay upward of Rs 20,000 for their
phones and wish to own the best. Therefore, phone ownership is very aspirational.
This fact is captured by smartphone manufacturers and reflects in the advertising
/communication of various brands.
8. Since users are calling and accessing various platforms- social networking,
entertainment, and music using the mobile- the mobile has become an intrinsic
part of the consumers life.
9. All industry sectors must be aware of this and reach out through this medium to
interact with the consumer. The type of communication would depend on the
sector, the industry.
10. Key cities in India are witnessing a great amount of road traffic because of the
Acknowledgements: To develop this research paper, support has been taken from
SDA Bocconi Asia Center- IMB2 students- Vani Tarika and Anmol who worked
relentlessly at every stage of the research and analysis, Spouse-Rajendra
Grewal,Son-Govind Grewal- for brainstorming, Visiting Quantitative Professor-
XIMR-Chitra Chandrasekhar and Essen Printers and Stationers
INTRODUCTION
India has a long history of philanthropic philosophy embedded even in our ancient scriptures of
Vedas. The NGOs formed since the colonial as well as post colonial periods are the reflection of
the benevolent virtues and values in Indian society. We have around 4 million NGOs running for
the welfare of society by working on the issues like alleviating poverty, tackling marginalization,
enlightening about environment, achieving women empowerment, safeguarding human rights,
improving educational facilities, solving various problems of rural backwards & urban slum
population, etc. But when we try to assess the quality and quantity of the work done by these
institutions, we come across the lacunae in the process of such evaluation. Firstly, the entire sector
is mostly disorganized in respect of their registration, fulfillment of their financial needs as well
as availability of steady and stable supply of effective manpower. No doubt NGOs in our country
are playing an important role in the development of masses and the balanced growth of economy,
but the social impact that the very number of these organizations is expected to achieve is not up
to the mark. What can be the right approach towards the social work these institutions dream of
accomplishing? The concept of ‘Social Entrepreneurship’ in which the institution engaged in the
social activities tries to be independent in its financial requirements through its business can be the
panacea for the problems of the NGOs.
OBJECTIVES
1.The term NGO (Non Governmental Organization) was initially used by UN in 1945 for
describing any non-profit, voluntary citizens' group which is organized on a local, national or
international level. The transnational federations like Red Cross to the Grass-root or community
based organizations independent from Government control & without profit making motives were
covered under the term.
Many such NGOs played an important role in India in assisting the Government in its endeavor
of trying to bring about a balanced growth of the Nation. But in bsence of the proper controlling
& auditing machinery the NGO Sector in our country is largely in a disorganized
form. Till early 21st Century most of them depended on foreign resources for their
funding. As per the records of Ministry of Home Affairs, in year 2006 Rs.7,877 crore ($US 1.85
b) which was 90% of the total formal funding of Indian NGOs was received from foreign sources.
Around 2005, Indian Government took initiative in changing this trend. But even today there is no
central mechanism to recognize their total number as well as quantitative or qualitative evaluation
of their activities.
2.Emergence of Social Entrepreneurship: A new breed of social leaders with the motive of bringing
about a sustainable social change has emerged in the business world. Its origins can be traced to
the early 1980s, starting with a business trend called cause-related marketing. In simple words it
is a business trading for social purposes. Bill Drayton, a civil rights activist who had studied
Gandhi's work, founded the nonprofit social enterprise Ashoka in 1980. While traveling in India,
he came across innovators whose creative ideas for change were not well understood by their
communities. Ashoka championed these public innovators, a term that later evolved into “social
entrepreneur.” Today, Ashoka supports more than 2,000 entrepreneurial fellows in more than 60
countries as they scale their ventures.
RESEARCH METHODOLOGY
The paper is based on secondary data retrieved from URL. It largely makes use of facts and figures
from the official websites of Government of India and Home Ministry. An E book is also referred
to.
FINDINGS
The social entrepreneurship does not have a long history as that of NGOs. But, in the short span
of their beginning they have proved themselves better over the traditional NGOs in following
respects-
1. Their financial sustainability makes them independent in their pursuit of social change.
2. They are able to make broad-based, long-term impact by their innovative ideas.
3. They include the beneficiaries in the process of solution instead of giving them a passive role.
The time and energy required for fund raising activities are utilized in the actual productive and
marketing processes.
CONCLUSION
Leila Janah- Social Entrepreneur who died recently at a very young age had described the
challenges of being a social entrepreneur on her blog - ‘We are fighting the battle of birthing a
REFERENCES:
https://www.britishcouncil.org/society/social-enterprise
http://www.yourarticlelibrary.com/sociology/sociology-of-development
http://www.theglobaljournal.net/article/view/981/
https://www.adb.org/sites/default/files/publication/
https://www.intrac.org/resources/monitoring-evaluation-guide-small-diaspora-ngos/
https://www.investopedia.com/terms/s/social-entrepreneur.asp
https://journal-jger.springeropen.com/articles/10.1186/s40497-018-0087-5
https://pitt.libguides.com/findingdata/ngostats
Abstract
Digital transformation has rapidly changed the face of business practices. The popular video
streaming platform “youtube” has become a very influential platform for business promotions. The
viewers on youtube can avoid watching the advertisement (ads) through “skip ad” option. This
makes the efforts of marketers go wasted. Present study is aimed at understanding the factors that
influence the early generation Z viewership patterns towards advertisements. For this purpose, 100
responses have been collected through a structured questionnaire from the Gen Z residents of
Mumbai city. The findings identify the dominant contributors that affect the viewership of
advertisements on youtube. It provides for better prospects towards developing business strategies.
Keywords: Youtube, Generation Z, Business Strategies, Advertisements, Viewership
Introduction
YouTube was launched on 14 February 2005 in San Mateo, California, United States by Jawed
Karim, Steve Chen, Chad Hurley. One of the co-founders, Jawed karim uploaded the first ever video
on the video sharing website titled ‘Me at the zoo’. Initiating with such humble beginning Youtube
has innovated itself with various upgradation over the time. They include viewer ratings, below-
the line-comments, live streaming, offline videos, content algorithms, voice recognition, YouTube
premium and Youtube music. It has helped YouTube to retain its edge and now it has become one
of the most prevalent video streaming and sharing platforms. Here are some statistics from
Youtube’s official website.
• Around 2 Billion logged-in users use YouTube each month and every day, people watch over
a billion hours of videos generating billions of views.
• Around 70% of YouTube watch time comes from mobile users.
• Local versions have been launched in more than 100 countries.
• You can use YouTube in a total of 80 different languages (which covers 95% of the Internet
population).
YouTube is estimated to be the second largest search engine after Google. Over the time, Youtube
has become an extremely desirable platform for content creators. 50 million of the total users are
content creators who upload 576,000 hours of video to YouTube every day. Many ‘YouTubers’
(Content creators who post videos on Youtube to gain revenue) have become world famous
celebrities with creating and posting compelling content on the platform. They earn based on
number of views for their video and number of subscribers. The content is localized in 91 countries
in 80 different languages. With such huge reach, Youtube has become an effective medium for
YouTube facilitates data driven advertising. Particular ads are shown to potential buyers and
people which are interested in that particular product. The algorithms for the same are backed by
search history of a user with the help of two giant search engines of the world. Those are Google
and Youtube. Hence the results are phenomenal. YouTube ads fall under three categories: Non-
skippable ads, bumper ads and True View ads. Non-skippable ads are, as the name suggests cannot
be skipped. Business who are looking for little build up can have such ads. They are paid as per
cost-per-mile bases which gives more control over ad spend. Bumper ads are the bearable ads
which last for 6 seconds at most. They are short and can be less troublesome for viewers. True
view ads are the skippable ads which appear at the beginning or in middle of the video. They are
great place to get started as they are relatively cheaper.
True view ads are most popular compared to other promotion tool on Youtube. True view ads do
not have any specific time limit and also involve low risk. Advertisers only pay when ad is not
skipped or desired action is taken by a viewer. Hence, as true ads are skipped after 5 seconds, not
a single buck is spent on an uninterested viewer. In 2018, Google came up with ‘TrueView for
reach’ for optimizing ads based on campaign goals. It enables an advertiser to pay per thousand
views (CPM-Cost per 1000). The duration of TrueView ads is between 6 seconds to 30 seconds
which boosts recall value for the ad. All of these features make TrueView ads very efficient for
mass reach but also ‘skip ad’ feature makes it challenging for companies. Because they have to
make ads so interesting in first five seconds that viewers don’t skip it.
There are plenty of reason why people skip ads. Most of the viewer’s skip ads out of habit. Even
when the ad is continued, it doesn’t have enough involvement of the viewer as he is more inclined
towards watching the video. This attention worsens when the viewers are travelling or engaged in
other activities while watching videos. Lot of advertisers are struggling with making engaging ads.
Whether it is a TV commercial or Youtube video ads, maintaining consumer attention is substantial
with respect to today’s tedious competition and rise of Gen Z viewers. Early Gen Z group involves
people born between the years 1995 to 2015. This age group has influence from Gen Z as well as
Gen Y people. Hence analyzing video viewing behavior of this group becomes significant. This
age group is exposed to traditional entertainment mediums such as Television as well as modern
platforms such as OTT and various application. Hence the shift rate of this group is higher than
the other two groups. The study talks about what are such element which can be used to maximize
the output of TrueView ads on YouTube with respect to early gen z group.
The Interactive Advertising Bureau (IAB) and its Mobile Marketing Center of Excellence says
that Gen Z and millennials are more accessible via mobile phones than any other medium of
advertising. The first of generation Z and last of the millennials are more prone to be influenced
by ads on mobile phones than an average mobile user. Mobile shopping is comparatively more
active than the other generation. Almost 75% of the population conduct shopping on Mobile
phones. Gen Z and young millennials are tomorrow’s primary customers (The Interactive
Advertising Bureau, 2015).
According to Evans, correlation which lies within 0.40 to 0.59 is considered to have a moderate
relationship and correlation which lies within 0.6 to 0.79 is considered to have a strong
relationship. While watching skippable ads on YouTube, viewers have strong relationship with
the entertainment factor of the video that follows the ad. Hence while making the skippable ads on
YouTube, the advertisement agency should focus on the ‘entertainment’ factor. Hence the ads
should be fun and enjoyable. Another important factor is ‘credibility’. It has moderate positive
relationship with viewer’s attitude towards skippable ads. Hence the ad should be able to convey
a sense of trust and confidence. On the negative side, ‘irritation’ was found to have negative
relationship with the viewer (The Interactive Advertising Bureau, 2015).
Social media platforms and technology have connected to Gen Z at a level which no other
generation before it, was connected. They connect via Snapchat, Instagram having no geographical
boundaries. Their community of friends is offline as well as online. Gen Z are fluent in media
multitasking i.e. shifting to various apps while doing other work. They work on computer while
having many tabs open with YouTube/Netflix running in the background. While watching TV they
might be on phones. Hence, they rarely pay attention to one thing. A social shift has also occurred
in how families interact with each other and spend time together. Earlier a television took place
where all the furniture in the room was directed at. Entertainment options were largely prescribed
by media providers. Now families still spend time together but there are high chances that each
member would have their own personal device in their hand consuming their own media (Madden,
2017).
Online and offline life of Gen Z is easily mingled up. They are connected to social media almost
all the time. This constant existence on social media leads them to feeling depressed. Hence to
relive from this they go on video streaming websites like YouTube. In a broad sense, this
generation crave for feel good videos like videos of slime or dogs doing activities or web series
and short stories. According to the survey by Visual Objects, YouTube is the most visited website
In YouTube true view ads, viewers decide how much of advertiser’s information is to acquire
which is not present in the conventional television media, beside this feature YouTube charges
advertisers only when viewer watches the entire ad. This proves that more advertisements are
watched when a viewer expects the subsequent information to be helpful in making a decision.
Hence if the viewer is relatively certain about the advertisement, positively or negatively, he or
she can move on to his or her desired content without the cost of delay. In two-sided market where
platforms like YouTube sell their ads that are served to viewers. It is found that use of skippable
ads leads to more viewers on the platform relative to the traditional ad format. Therefore, with
more viewers on the platform, it sells more advertising. Under certain conditions. In some
situations, the shift from the traditional to the skippable ad format is Pareto movement. Hence,
skippable ads guide the viewers to more preferred information that is meaningful with viewer’s
perspective. Ultimately, viewer obtains direct benefit by interacting on the platform where viewers
are predisposed to advertise products. (Dukes, Anthony J., Qihong Liu, and JieShuai, 2019)
Research Methodology
Research design
Random sampling method is used to collect the primary data. Secondary data is collected from
various journals, websites, articles and survey reports. The study is a descriptive research and
universe represents YouTube users. The analysis of the data is done with the help of the statistical
tools available.
Sample Design
Scope of the study is restricted to Mumbai city only. The universe consists of people using
YouTube within the age group of 16 to 26 years old. The sample size includes total number of
100 people. Random sampling method is used to collect primary date via structured questionnaire.
A google form was circulated among the samples and some people were interviewed for pilot
Questionnaire design
A structured questionnaire was circulated via Google forms. There are total 10 category of
questions out of which, first two questions emphasize on the demographics of the sample size.
Question number 3 to question number 5 aim to seek data about general YouTube behavior of the
sample size. Lastly question number 6 to question number 10 helps to provide research specific
information. All the questions except the first, are close ended questions for easy and objective
analysis of the data.
Table 2 indicates the frequency of the respondents skipping the ads. Out of the total sample size,
there are 3 people who rarely skip the ads, 5 people skip an ad sometime, 31 people often skip an
ad and 61 people always skip an ad.
Table 3 describes various reasons why the respondents skip an ad. Most of them i.e. 45 of them
skip it because they want to skip to next video quickly. Following, 19 of them skip it because the
Table 4 describes frequency of respondents watching ads after ‘skip ad’ option is available. 63 of
them watch ads rarely, 28 of them do it sometimes and only 9 of them watch the ad even after
‘skip ad’ option is available.
Table 4: How often people watch ads after ‘skip ad’ option is available
Availability of 'skip ad' option
Frequency Percent Valid Percent Cumulative Percent
Valid 1 63 63.0 63.0 63.0
2 28 28.0 28.0 91.0
3 9 9.0 9.0 100.0
Total 100 100.0 100.0
(Tone (Happy, Sad, angry etc.) -1, Music -2, Actor/Actress -3, Poppy Colors/ Funkiness -4, Catchy
voice-5, Recent internet sensation-6, Celebrities like Stand-up comedians-7, Generic theme
(Cricket, Love etc.)-8, YouTube stars-9). As shown in the above table, 28 out of 100 respondents
consider generic theme as a reason to skip an ad 9 people considered tone of the ad as a factor to
skip it. After that poppy colors/ funkiness and music is selected by 19 and 12 respondents
selectively. There are only 11 respondents who skip ads because of actors. Other than these catchy
voices (3), recent internet sensation (10) and celebrities like standup comedians (7) have been
selected by few respondents.
Table 6: Factors that made the person recall a particular ad
Recalling factor
Frequency Percent Valid Percent Cumulative Percent
Valid 1 15 15.0 15.0 15.0
2 23 23.0 23.0 38.0
3 11 11.0 11.0 49.0
4 7 7.0 7.0 56.0
5 7 7.0 7.0 63.0
6 5 5.0 5.0 68.0
7 6 6.0 6.0 74.0
8 25 25.0 25.0 99.0
9 1 1.0 1.0 100.0
Total 100 100.0 100.0
Table 6 reflects the factors that make the person recall an ad. (Tone (Happy, Sad, angry etc.) -1,
Music -2, Actor/Actress -3, Poppy Colors/ Funkiness- 4, Catchy voice-5, Recent internet
sensation-6, Celebrities like Stand-up comedians-7, Generic theme (Cricket, Love etc.)-8,
YouTube stars-9). It is found that 23 respondents recalled the ad because of the music it had. 25
people were able to recall the ad because of ad’s generic theme like love or cricket. Tone and actors
as a factor were chosen by 15 and 11 respondents respectively. Other than the stated factors catchy
voices funkiness and recent sensation were chosen by very few respondents.
Table 7 reflects the factors that the respondents consider while not skipping the ad. (Duration of
the ad-1, If it’s a movie trailer-2, Favorite actor/actress-3, Woke advertisement (Social message)-
4, Knowledge addition- 5, Humor-6, Curiosity-7). As shown in the above table 49 respondents
chose curiosity as a factor they will consider while watching the ad. 10 respondents chose movie
trailer as another factor to be considered while not skipping the ad. 9 respondents also considered
the ads which has knowledge addition in anyway. Along with it, 9 respondents check if the ad has
got any social message. Factors like humor was considered for 11 and duration of the ad was
considered by 8 respondents.
Table 8: When a person is most likely to skip the ad
Most likely to skip before
Frequency Percent Valid Percent Cumulative Percent
Valid 1 26 26.0 26.0 26.0
2 30 30.0 30.0 56.0
3 10 10.0 10.0 66.0
4 8 8.0 8.0 74.0
5 26 26.0 26.0 100.0
Total 100 100.0 100.0
Table 8 shows when the respondent is most likely to skip an ad. (Before Web series-1, Before
Music videos-2, Before Movies-3, Before Stand up/DIY/Vlogs-4 and Before any short video-5).
30 respondents of the total are most likely to skip an ad before the music video. 26 respondents
are likely to skip ad before web series and short videos. Only 10 respondents are likely to skip an
ad before a movie and lastly 8 of them are likely to skip it before a stand up or DIY video.
Findings of the Study
As stated in the Table 1, most of the respondents were within the age group of 19 to 24. Although
there is considerate amount of respondents within the age of 16 to and 18 and 25 to 26, the result
is inclined towards this age group. As stated in the Table 2 and Table 3, most of the people always
skip the ad and reason behind skipping the ads selected by most of the respondents is that they
want to skip to the next video quickly. 31% of the respondents often skip ads and some of the other
reasons behind skipping ad are prolonged time, boredom or the ad doesn’t raise interest. With
reference to Table 4, most of the people rarely watch ads after ‘skip ad’ option is available. Only
9% of the respondents watch ads even after the option is available. Considering Table 5
respondents selected generic themes to skip an ad. Ads having a generic theme like love, cricket
etc. were skipped more as compared to those who have poppy colors. Adding catchy voices in the
ad did not add a significant value for the respondents. Tone of the ad and the generic theme were
ABSTRACT
The handloom industry in India is carrying its excellence in craftsmanship from decades. Jeetram
– a skilled handloom weaver of Chhattisgarh state has kept this traditional handloom weaving alive
from generations along with his family.
But from past two-three years, there have been major economical changes due to which, Jeetram
is in dilemma whether to carry forward the same or opt something else for his livelihood. With
introduction of new technologies like power loom and cloth mills, this beautiful hand woven art
of weavers like Jeetram is at jaws of death. There has been an increase in price of yarn which is an
essential component in the production of handloom products. The study tries to find out how local
weavers are being affected by the changes mentioned above.
The present study is presented in the form of a case describing and exploring the factors responsible
for this dilemma. Data is collected as an interview with Jeetram.
KEY WORDS :
Handlooms, Weavers, Economical changes
JEETRAM:
The handloom industry in India is one of the leading industries from ancient history and conquers
a unique place in our country. The industry also plays a very important role in India’s economy.
In case of employment, it is the second largest sector after agriculture.
But the worth of Indian handloom along with the weavers has gradually come to an end over the
years. Against all odds, weavers like Jeetram are still continuing to go with this old tradition of
handloom weaving. Jeetram, a 35-year old local handloom weaver from Sakti of Janjgir district
has been in this profession since many years. His family (refer to Annexure I) includes his father
Rammohan from whom this art of weaving has been inherited. Including he and his father the other
members in his family are his wife, Sarita and their two kids-Bablu and Radhika. The handloom
weaving has been their only source of livelihood since past generations. The society in which he
and his family reside consists of people who are into the same line of profession. The society of
weavers gained this tradition of weaving from their forefathers and they were doing immensely
great in past but the future of weaving has become unpredictable as per the current situation.
INDUSTRIAL OVERVIEW:
The loom which is manually operated either with the help of hand or leg or both are generally
termed as “handloom” (refer to Annexure II). Handloom is not just a word in India but a
representation of the ancient Indian culture. Handloom was known to the Indians since Indus
Valley Civilization. Thus, the handloom weaving in India is said to be as old as mankind itself.
DILEMMA OF JEETRAM
Along with all these major challenges, there is always more to the troubled handloom weavers’
plight, says 35 year old Jeetram. According to him, carrying out day to day operations is becoming
Rammohan
(Father of Jeetram)
(Father of Jeetram)
Jeetram
&
Sarita
(Wife of Jeetram)
Radhika Bablu
Radhika Bablu
(Daughter of Jeetram)
(Daughter) (Son (Son)
of Jeetram)
ANNEXURE II - Handloom
REFERENCES:
(DOC) SURVIVAL OF THE SMALL PRODUCER: CASE STUDY OF
https://www.academia.edu/6769031/SURVIVAL_OF_THE_SMALL_
PRODUCER_CASE_STUDY_OF_HANDLOOM_WEAVER
Borgohain, Ananya. “Weaving out of Trouble: Handloom Industry Looks at Budget 2018 to
Solve Woes.” The Economic Times, 16 Jan. 2018. The Economic Times,
https://economictimes.indiatimes.com/small-biz/sme-sector/weaving-out-of-trouble-handloom-industry-
looks-at-budget-2018-to-solve-woes/articleshow/62518039.cms?from=mdr
https://shodhganga.inflibnet.ac.in/bitstream/10603/164069/19/19_chapter%2012.pdf
Issues and Challenges of Handloom Industry in India Issues and Analysis @ Abhipedia Powered
by ABHIMANU IAS.
https://abhipedia.abhimanu.com/Res_page.aspx?enc=66YrnIdxW08ZW9dsp4ETWw==.
VANDITA MISHRA | Amity University, Noida | AU - ResearchGate. Retrieved February 7,
2020, from https://www.researchgate.net/profile/Vandita_Mishra2
ABSTRACT
The concept of psychological well-being argues that well-being is not just about being happy, it is
about living a life which is worth living. Higher Level of Psychological Well-Being is an Indicator
of Positive functioning. It also has positive relation with health, long life and mental health. This
research is undertaken to understand the level of psychological well-being among management
students and also to see possible gender differences if any. A primary study is conducted to
understand the distribution of psychological well-being domains in a pre-defined sample. In all
295 students are studied on Ryff’s well-being scale and results are analyzed through descriptive as
well as inferential statistical analysis. The results show high level of psychological well-being in
management students. Personal growth perceived is higher compared to other well-being domains.
Also the data is negatively skewed for all aspects and also for overall wellbeing score. However,
there is no significant gender difference in the levels of psychological well-being.
Key Words: Psychological well-being, Ryff’s scale, Management students, Personal growth,
Gender differences
INTRODUCTION
The focus on leading a healthy life not just physically but mentally and emotionally as well brings
us to the concept of well-being. Understanding well-being among plays an important role as this
impacts an individual’s mental health and positive psychology. A focus on well-being considers
how people feel and function, and how they evaluate their lives. Well-being talks about the way
in which people evaluate their lives with regard to their own appraisals of how life is going, or
particular aspects of their lives. Well-being covers elements which lead to a happy and fulfilling
life.
Well-being
Well-being plays a central role in creating successful and healthy work environment. Focusing on
well-being at work presents an opportunity to benefit organizations by helping working individuals
feel happy, satisfied and content in their roles. Research shows that people who have good
standards of well-being at work are likely to be more loyal, more creative, and more productive
than individuals with poor standards of well-being at work. For decades, organisations have tried
to nurture these qualities through employee engagement strategies; however, engaging employees
is just one part of the story. Improving well-being at work implies a more rigorous approach, which
focuses on helping employees to strengthen their personal resources, flourish and take pride in
Psychological well-being
Psychological well-being (PWB) refers to the theory and the measurement scales developed and
advocated by Ryff. C (1989). In her seminal paper, "Happiness is everything, or is it? Explorations
on the meaning of psychological well-being” she differentiates PWB with subjective well-being
(hedonic well-being). Ryff attempted to combine different conceptions of well-being from the
ancient Greek to the modern psychological such as theories of Individuation from Carl Jung, Self-
actualization from Abraham Maslow and others.
Carol D. Ryff explored the meaning of Psychological Well-Being by studying the extensive
literature. She derived six aspects of well-being (self-acceptance, positive relations with others,
autonomy, environmental mastery, purpose in life, and personal growth). Three hundred and
twenty-one men and women, divided among young, middle-aged, and older adults, rated
themselves on these six measures along with instruments prominent in earlier studies (affect
balance, life satisfaction, self-esteem, morale, locus of control, depression). Results discovered
that aspects like positive relations with others, purpose in life, autonomy, and personal growth
were not strongly present in prior assessment indexes, hereby supporting the assertion that key
aspects of positive functioning have not been symbolised in the empirical research arena.
Ryff’s study was based on the fact that there has been negligence in the task of defining the
essential features of psychological wellbeing. He argued that much of the prior literature is founded
on conceptions of well-being that have little theoretical rationale as a consequence of which, theory
on psychological well-being has neglected important aspects of positive functioning. An
alternative framework of psychological well-being, based on the integration of several theoretical
domains is presented and operationalized in this research.
The research also brings attention to the fact that the literature on psychological well-being was
not, in its inception, strongly theory guided. Instruments, earlier developed for other purposes,
became the standard bearers for defining positive functioning. The six aspects of psychological
well-being conceptualized by Ryff (1989) are autonomy, personal growth, self-acceptance, life
purpose, mastery, and positive relations.
Autonomy: There is considerable emphasis in the prior literature on qualities like self-
determination, independence, and the regulation of behavior from within. Self-actualizers are
described as people showing autonomous functioning. This person is also described as having an
internal locus of evaluation, whereby one does not look to others for approval, but evaluates
oneself by personal standards. The process of turning inward in the later years is also seen by life
span developmentalists to give the person a sense of freedom from the norms governing everyday
life.
Self-acceptance: The most recurrent criterion of well-being evident in the previous perspectives is
the individual's sense of self-acceptance. This is denned as a central feature of mental health as
well as a characteristic of self-actualization, optimal functioning, and maturity. Life span theories
also emphasize acceptance of self and of one's past life. Thus, holding positive attitudes toward
oneself emerges as a central characteristic of positive psychological functioning.
Positive relations with others: Many of the former theories stressed on the importance of warm
and trusting interpersonal relationships. The ability to love is seen as a central component of mental
health. Positive relatedness comes with strong feelings of empathy and affection for all human
LITERATURE REVIEW
The literature on psychological well-being has progressed rapidly since the emergence of the field
over five decades ago. The studies show that psychologists and other social scientists have taken
huge steps in their understanding of the factors influencing psychological and subjective well-
being.
Well-being is a complex construct concerning with optimal experience and functioning. Research
on well-being is derived from two broad perspectives: the hedonic approach, which focuses on
happiness and defines well-being in terms of pleasure accomplishment and pain avoidance; and
the eudaimonic approach, which focuses on meaning and self-realization and defines well-being
in terms of the degree to which a person is fully functioning. These two views have given rise to
different research attentions and a body of knowledge that is in some areas different and in others
complementary. New methodological developments concerning are also allowing researchers to
explore the field and formulate new questions for the same. (Ryan and Deci 2001)
A study on psychological well-being aspects of Asian elders (Thai elders) was carried out by a
group of researchers. Psychological well-being is an important aspect of life quality for older
adults. Asian elders may have a distinctly different perspective from Westerners concerning the
meaning of psychological well-being. Using qualitative research methods, this study focused on
the views of Thai elders. In-depth interviews and focus group discussions were conducted with 67
Thai people aged 60 and over. Transcripts were analysed resulting in the identification of five
dimensions of well-being: harmony, interdependence, acceptance, respect and enjoyment. When
compared to research in the United States, some of the dimensions of psychological well-being
were distinct while others were overlapping. (Ingersoll-Dayton, et al. 2001)
OBJECTIVES OF STUDY
The present study has following objectives.
1. To understand well-being and its hedonic and eudaimonic views.
The study aims to understand the conceptual and theoretical framework of well-being in terms of
its domains Psychological well-being and subjective well-being. The study also focuses on
understanding the various domains psychological well-being in depth.
2. To assess psychological well-being and its subscales in management students.
The research undertaken attempts to assess the psychological well-being through its subscales
(Self-acceptance, Positive Relation, Autonomy, Environmental Mastery, Purpose in Life and
Personal Growth) of post-graduate students of management studies and see where students stand
in terms of psychological well-being scores. The study also tries to see if there is a difference in
psychological well-being with respect to gender.
HYPOTHESIS
Based on the objectives, following hypothesis will be tested.
H1: There is no difference in distribution of Autonomy, Environmental Mastery, Personal Growth,
Personal Relations, and Purpose in life and Self-Acceptance scores.
H2: There is no difference in proportions of psychological well-being scores across categories of
gender.
RESEARCH METHODOLOGY
Research design: Descriptive research is undertaken to understand psychological well-being and
its facets. The same factors are studied for a pre-decided sample through a survey questionnaire.
Top notch management institutes from Mumbai are considered for a primary analysis of traits
exhibited by their students.
Sampling design: Random sampling is used. Total 295 management students are surveyed. The
survey was floated online as well as manually to all full time MBA students of sample institutes.
Questionnaire design: This paper uses 42 items set of Ryff’s scale. The reliability coefficient of
Ryff’s scale for each trait is given below.
RESULTS
In all, 295 students were assessed on Ryff’s psychological well-being scale out of which 209 were
males and 86 were females. It is generally observed that management courses have more number
of male participants. The students were assessed on the Ryff’s psychological well-being scale and
the results are as follows. Management students demonstrated higher ratings in overall
psychological well-being. Students’ self-report about personal growth was quite high. The data
showed negative skewness which supports general research observation that people tend to give
higher ratings to themselves.
in
Psychologica
Environment
l Well-being
Acceptance
Autonomy
al Mastery
Relations
Personal
Personal
Purpose
Growth
Self-
life
All Low 35 43 10 25 25 40 13
High 260 252 285 270 270 255 282
Total 295 295 295 295 295 295 295
Male Low 21 30 7 17 19 29 10
High 188 179 202 192 190 180 199
Total 209 209 209 209 209 209 209
Female Low 14 13 3 8 6 11 3
High 72 73 83 78 80 75 83
Total 86 86 86 86 86 86 86
Purpose in life
Psychological
Acceptance
Well-being
Autonomy
Relations
Personal
Personal
Mastery
Growth
Self-
in
Environment
Acceptance
Autonomy
al Mastery
Relations
Personal
Personal
Purpose
Growth
Self-
life
Low 35 43 10 25 25 40
High 260 252 285 270 270 255
Total 295 295 295 295 295 295
Chi-square test
Chi 27.858
df 5
p value 0.0000388
DISCUSSION
Psychological well-being refers to how people evaluate their lives. These evaluations may be in
the form of cognitions or in the form of affect. The cognitive part is an information based appraisal
of one’s life that is when a person gives conscious evaluative judgments about one’s satisfaction
with life as a whole. The affective part is a hedonic evaluation guided by emotions and feelings
such as frequency with which people experience pleasant/unpleasant moods in reaction to their
lives. The assumption behind this is that most people evaluate their life as either good or bad, so
they are normally able to offer judgments. Further, people invariably experience moods and
emotions, which have a positive effect or a negative effect. Thus, people have a level of subjective
well-being even if they do not often consciously think about it, and the psychological system offers
virtually a constant evaluation of what is happening to the person. Psychological well-being can
also be defined in terms of internal experience of the respondent and their own perception of their
lives.
Higher level of psychological well-being is an indicator of positive functioning. It also has positive
relation with health, long life and mental health. Psychological well-being also has strong influence
on academics and job performance. Previous literature proves association of high psychological
well-being to high income and better performance at workplace. It is also found to be related to
physical health. If a society regularly assesses well-being, people will provide their attention on it
and learn more about its causes. Psychological well-being is therefore valuable not only because
it assesses well-being more directly but it has beneficial consequences.
CONCLUSION
Despite some minor limitations, the Ryff Scales of Psychological Well-Being is a valid and reliable
measure of psychological well-being. It can aid colleges and universities in understanding the
degree to which their students are self-accepting, are pursuing meaningful goals with a sense of
purpose in life, have established quality ties with others, are autonomous in thought and action,
have the ability to manage complex environments to suit personal needs and values, and continue
to grow and develop. Although the instrument does not measure all dimensions of well-being, the
LIMITATIONS
One limitation of the Ryff scales is that it relies on self-reported assessments of psychological
well-being. As with all self-report instruments, students may respond in ways that are socially
desirable rather than reveal their actual response to each statement.
REFERENCES
Abbott R, Ploubidis G, Huppert F, Kuh D, Croudace T: (2010) An evaluation of the precision of
measurement of Ryff’s Psychological Well- Being Scales in a population sample. Soc Indic Res;
97: 357.
Anat Shoshani, Sarit Steinmetz, J Happiness Stud (2013) “Positive Psychology at School: A
School-Based Intervention to Promote Adolescents’ Mental Health and Well-Being” Journal of
Happiness Studies. 15. 1289-1311. DOI 10.1007/s10902-013-9476-1
Aristotle: The Nicomachean Ethics. New York, Oxford University Press, 1925.
Atkinson, Rita, L.; Richard C. Atkinson; Edward E. Smith; Daryl J. Bem; Susan Nolen-Hoeksema
(2000). Hilgard's Introduction to Psychology (13 ed.). p. 437
ABSTRACT
The objective of this paper is to provide a comprehensive understanding of the concept of Logistics
4.0, which is a part of Fourth Industrial Revolution (Industry 4.0) and its implications on resource
planning, warehouse management systems, transportation management systems, etc. This paper
discusses about various challenges associated with implementation of Logistics 4.0 along with its
applications. This paper is one of the attempts to draw attention towards the implications of
Logistics 4.0 and implementational challenges, as most of the recent studies are discussing the
technological shift and change in manufacturing and logistics processes. The concepts are
presented by integrating the existing literature with logical beliefs.
RESEARCH DESIGN
The research described in this paper has largely been carried out through journals, consultant’s
reports, literature reviews, websites, and articles. Throughout the development of paper, the main
purpose is to understand the logistics required for industry 4.0 with implications, challenges, and
applications of logistics 4.0 on different industries. The methodology enabled to gain an overall
understanding of logistics 4.0 and development in different industries to improve efficiency and
customer satisfaction with the help of Industry 4.0.
The research tries to answer following questions:
1.What different technologies are associated with Logistics 4.0, their impact and uncertainties
associated with them?
2. How will Logistics 4.0 impact different functions of the industry?
3. What are the challenges associated with implementation of Logistics 4.0 and what are its
applications?
OVERVIEW
In a current global market, technological innovation and customer demands for advanced
technology and services promote the emergence of new challenges, which is changing industry
drastically. This transformation will definitely influence how organizations will be managed
according to the new incentives, customer satisfaction, environmental and context configuration.
Although some sectors like the automotive, technology and biology industry, with the innovation
and overall increased efficiency taking lead on the industry changes, others will have to follow
technological evolvement. This change is being done very quickly, allowing us to touch on the
new industrial revolution, commonly known as the fourth industrial revolution (Industry 4.0). This
INDUSTRY 4.0
Industry 4.0 is originated from a German government project that promotes the computerized
manufacturing in 2011. Industry 4.0 is also referred to as the “fourth industrial revolution” since
the first industrial revolution that took place in the 18th century. The first industrial revolution
improved the productivity of the iron and textile industries by using steam power, and the second
industrial revolution took place just before WWI and created reduced manufacturing cost by using
electric power to create mass production. With the development of personal computers and the
internet in the 1980s, the third industrial revolution transformed the economic landscape.[2] After
the term Industry 4.0 was revived in 2011 by the German economic development agency, the
fourth industrial revolution builds on the third, leveraging emerging technologies (or Industry 4.0
technologies) such as Additive Manufacturing, Advanced Robotics, Artificial Intelligence,
Autonomous Vehicles, Blockchain, Drones, Internet of Things, etc.
Unlike the previous three, Schwab [3] argues that the fourth industrial revolution is fundamentally
different because it leverages connectivity and communication among billions of devices. These
emerging technologies along with voluminous real-time data will transform the manufacturing and
service operations along a global supply chain, and change the interactions between humans
(consumers and supply chain partners) and machines. Currently, many companies are exploring
LOGISTICS 4.0
Logistics 4.0 is a narrower term than Industry 4.0 in spite of having similar assumptions. “Logistics
4.0” can be defined by two approaches. As regards the short-term approach Logistics 4.0 is defined
as firm and mutually related processes between independent members with the use of large
amounts of data. As to the medium-term approach Logistics, 4.0 is defined as autonomous, self-
organizing systems within other systems. Logistics 4.0 is logistic systems which consist of
independent subsystems. The behavior of the subsystems depends on other surrounding
subsystems. This term also means process automatization and organization and the Industry 4.0
support. The Logistics 4.0 definition combines two aspects: processual (supply chain processes
are a subject of the Logistics 4.0 actions) and technical (tools and technologies that support internal
processes in the supply chains). Logistics 4.0 has the aim to enlarge the supply chain members’
efficiency and performance. The supply chain is based on decentralized decision-making
structures. The above objectives are to be achieved by performing vertical integration of members
related to hierarchical subsystems in the organization and horizontal integration related to the
cooperation between external legal entities. Due to the similarities between the Logistics 4.0 and
Industry 4.0 concepts, the former one is based on its typical features, i.e. digitalization,
automatization, networking and mobility.[6] The Logistics 4.0 technologies are based on using
drones, sensors, self-steering vehicles, Big Data, GPS. virtual reality glasses, intelligent
transporters, gates, forklifts and automatic vehicles [7] are the concepts that are dedicated to
different industries. The Logistics 4.0 concept implementation advantages are savings in human
work, high standardization of linking logistic functions to information pieces and the use of
equipping logistic enterprises with the newest technologies. The disadvantages are high investment
costs and the IT supply network possession requirement.
Internal
Quality of
organisational
data
barriers
Challenges
in Logistics
4.0
Limited actual
implement- Data security
ation
Information
system
CONCLUSION
1. Since the fourth industrial revolution is taking shape, its common agreement in
organizations and businesses is that there is a need for improvement in technologies used
in logistics.
2. Both industry 4.0 and logistics 4.0 are complex systems that will need great technological
and environmental changes. Companies need to understand and analyze the current market
need and use relevant and effective technology.
3. Logistics 4.0 has a capacity to improve the effectiveness of the entire supply chain and it
can help to increase customer satisfaction by monitoring the real-time data and providing
personalized solutions.
4. There are few challenges to make logistics 4.0 compatible with Industry 4.0 but in the near
future the companies will overcome the challenges and use the logistics 4.0 to make the
efficient use of Industry 4.0.
REFERENCES
1. L. Barreto et al., Industry 4.0 implications in logistics: An Overview, Procedia Manufacturing
13 (2017).
2. Rifkin, J. (2011). the Third Industrial Revolution: How Lateral Power Is Transforming Energy,
the Economy, and the World.
3. S. Schrauf, P. Berttram, 2016. Industry 4.0: How digitization makes the supply chain more
efficient, agile, and customer-focused.
4. McKinsey Global Institute, Digital Globalization: The New Era of Global Flows, 2016.
5. Frank et al., Industry 4.0 technologies: Implementation patterns in manufacturing companies,
International Journal of Production Economics 210, 2019.
6. Pfohl, Burak & Kurnaz, The Impact of Industry 4.0 on the Supply Chain, Hamburg International
Conference of Logistics (HICL), At Hamburg, Volume: 20, 2015.
7. DHL Trend Research, Internet of Things in Logistics. A collaborative report by DHL and Cisco
on implications and use cases for the logistics industry, 2015.
8. PwC’s future in sight series, The future of the logistics industry, 2016.
ABSTRACT:
Cyber Crime is rising as an intense risk not only in India but also all over the world. There is
misuse of data from mobile phone apps, computers and laptops. The web world has its advantages
and disadvantages. Everybody has access to the internet. Sharing of data through various platforms
is quite frequent. People have so many ways to get data but are unaware that the free sharing can
cost their credentials or privacy may be hindered. This study measures the awareness of
cybercrimes through apps installed on smart phones. Random sampling method has been used to
collect the data and statistical analysis is done. We have found that majority of respondents are
aware about the mobile apps related cybercrimes. However, they do not know the preventive
measures to avoid mobile apps related cybercrimes.
Keywords: Cyber Crime, Apps, Privacy
INTRODUCTION:
People's perception and attitude towards computer ethics and information security significantly
affect the way they use information technology (Mansur Aliyu.et.al, 2010). “With data costs falling
by 95 per cent since 2013, India will see internet users rise by about 40 per cent and number of
smartphones to double by 2023” (McKinsey, 2019). Indian mobile data users consume 8.3 gigabits
(GB) of data each month on average, compared GB for mobile users in China and 8-8.5 GB in
advanced digital economy of South Korea. Indians have 1.2 billion mobile phone subscriptions
and downloaded more apps 12.3 billion in 2018 than residents of any other country except China
(ET, 2019). Today’s young generation has made Google and Facebook part and parcel of their
everyday affairs but many are unaware of the damage it may cost through the free data. In exchange
of the free data it accesses the data available on the apps. People connect with each other through
emails, chat rooms, and social media platforms etc. With many mobile paid apps available people
are unaware of the damages it may cost to them. Initially many apps offer free services, however
later charge for the same services. Right from astrology, dating to banking, shopping and education
many options are available. These apps ask for information such as email address. Email address
is a way of getting first-hand information and if the email address is not secure, it can leak many
crucial information of the users. The World Wide Web may help citizens to overcome various
issues but everything has its advantages and disadvantages. Many studies found that there is an
increase in the fictitious world of people and they have forgotten the real world and are happy to
stay and live in their fictitious world which in case is hampering the self of human beings. Parents,
academicians and policy makers should spread awareness about cybercrimes among the millennial
because they get victimized easily and are prone to commit crime through computers and mobile
apps.
RESEARCH GAP:
There has been a considerable length of discussion on the cybercrimes through internet hacking
websites, via personal computers but there is not enough focus on mobile apps related cybercrimes.
Now a day’s mobile phones are no more safe. Just by sharing a link one’s phone may get affected
and can cause many tremendous damage to the person data. Many researches have been done
pertaining to cybercrimes via laptops and computers but very few researches caters to the segment
of cybercrimes through apps because people are unaware about the permission settings of the
phone and apps itself. Life has become simple for transaction just by entering the CVV behind the
Card and the payment is done. But very few are unaware that when we download the apps for use
there are several permissions sought to access data on our mobile phones. Until we do not grant
permission, the app may not work. This is the first step towards privacy hindrance. We accept the
permissions because we want mobile apps to work and hence we ignore the permission settings
part which is very crucial. Hence, this research paper attempts to study whether people are aware
of the crimes caused by the apps installed on phone or while sharing via different platforms.
THEORETICAL FRAMEWORK:
Independent Variable Moderating Variable Dependent Variable
Age Group
Synchronization Cyber Crimes
Purpose
Security for apps
Personal Postings
HYPOTHESES:
H1: People are aware of the fact that cybercrime can be cause through mobile apps.
H2: Unawareness of permission settings in mobile apps leads to an increase in cybercrimes.
H3: Unawareness about the terms and conditions of app during installation in mobile phone
increases cybercrime
H4: Unawareness of security of apps leads to an increase in cybercrimes
H5: Unawareness of preventive measures towards cybercrime through mobile apps.
RESEARCH METHODOLOGY:
The study area was Mumbai, Thane and Navi Mumbai regions. Targeted sample size was
250. But only 180 responses were received. Out of which 120 were from male respondents and 59
from female. One respondent was not willing to share the gender status. So the analysis was
conducted on 180 responses. Only the respondents’ perspective has been considered to check the
awareness regarding mobile apps related cybercrimes. Primary data was collected from
respondents with the aid of structured questionnaire. Questionnaire had combination of open ended
and closed ended questions. Data analysis is conducted by simple statistical analysis.
Interpretation: From the above figure, it is inferred that the most used social media app is
WhatsApp wherein we can exchange so many other media formats followed by Instagram,
Facebook, Tinder, TikTok, Reddit.
2. Form which of the following platforms do you download the apps? (In this question, user
may select more than one option)
Interpretation: From the above pie diagram, it is inferred that majority of the respondents blindly
grant all the permissions that allow the app to use the features of the mobile followed by 35.6% do
not grant the permission, while 27.2% may or may not grant all of the permissions.
4. Once the app is installed in your device, do you have controls for the permissions?
Interpretation: From the above chart, it is inferred that majority of the respondents control the
permission an app can access after the installation of the app. Some respondents are not aware of
the setting to control the permissions.
5. Do you read all the terms and conditions of app during installation in your phone?
Interpretation: From the above chart, it is observed that 35% of the respondents change their
passcode sometimes, followed by 32.2% which change it rarely. 25% of the respondents change
password frequently. 6% of the respondents never change the password. Lastly, 1.5% who forget
and reset the passwords.
7. How often do you update mobile apps?
Interpretation: The above figure shows that the majority of the respondents have the feature of the
automatic update when connected to the Wi-Fi. Some respondents update the mobile apps
Interpretation: Above figure, shows that almost 60 % of the respondents do not install software,
which are available for preventing apps from viruses while 40%, do install such software.
9. Do you update your mobile operating system regularly?
Interpretation: From the above chart, it is inferred that 49% of the respondents update the mobile
operating system frequently followed by 31% who update it sometimes then 40% of the respondent
who do it rarely and followed by the remaining respondents who never update the mobile operating
system.
10. Do you use third party apps or any other security features in you mobile to protect your
apps?
Interpretation: From the above chart, it can inferred that majority of the respondents don’t know
about the safeguard measures adopted to prevent cyber-crime through mobile apps.
12. Are you interested to know more about how to prevent cybercrimes through mobile apps?
Interpretation: Majority of the respondents are willing to know more about cybercrimes through
mobile apps.
CONCLUSION:
• Majority of respondents download app from play store, which might not always authentic
source to get the apps.
• When asked about awareness of cybercrime results revealed that people are aware about
the cybercrimes happening through mobile phone. Hence, we accept H1, that is, people are
aware about the fact that cybercrimes can be cause through mobile apps.
• Question regarding granting the permission of apps through mobile phones revealed that
majority of respondents grant the permissions to use our data on mobile blindly. Hence, we
RECOMMENDATIONS:
• It is recommended that awareness should be created among people so that they do not
easily fall prey to the cybercrime.
• People should check the permission of the apps and should read terms and conditions
before installing it blindly.
• Always go through the instructions given by the developers of the app to be installed. Also,
go through the comment given by existing users in the comment section on the platforms
like Play store or App store for the threats.
• Always check the authenticity of the links given in the social media messages as these links
might lead to phishing websites.
• Most people have misconception that if the app is available on the official store of Google
or Apple, then it is secure. However, that is not the case. Recently there have been
incidences where applications on Google Play were found to contain malware, which
misused user’s data. If you feel that an application is requesting permission that it does not
need, then do not install the app or decline those permissions. If Swiggy is asking
permission for flashlight app or to read your received message or record audio then you
should know that something is problematic with the app.
• Many cafes provide their customers with free internet access, which may seem convenient
but might be used by attackers to steal your confidential data as they lack proper security
measure.
• In order to deal with cyber threats, organizations need to put in place a multi-layered
strategy that covers prevention, mitigation, and reaction and that takes a holistic approach,
focusing on people, processes, and systems.
Abstract
The MSME sector has shown impressive potential, MSME plays a vital role in shaping the economy by
creating jobs opportunity. The globalization has opened avenues for outsourcing , ancillary units and create
ancillary production houses. However, MSME also faces a number of operational and performance
challenges to the growth story , cost of operation, talent ( acquisition and retention and retention ) and credit
availability to name a few roadblocks for growth. There is inadequate capital infusion compounded by
insufficient planning or inputs on credit requirement resulting is cash flow concerns impacting the
profitability. In the VUCA ( Volatility, Uncertainty, Complexity and Ambiguity ) world , MSME is most
challenged unit with fixed expenses on the rise, operating margin strain , employees (including training and
development ) are some of challenge for growth.
MSME will be a new class of Prosumers, Producers and Consumers to install and benefit from clean and
green power. The primary objective of this research paper is to sensitize the MSME entrepreneurs to
embrace sustainable power generation methods to reduce the energy bills and how it will contribute to
techno economic welfare of the region and the country, considering that an energy generated by distributed
generation is directly proportional to resources saved. In this descriptive and exploratory research, the
researcher will be selecting five MSME companies and will try to understand the buyer behavior and policy
enabler and how they plays an important role to promote and motivate the installation of Rooftop solar on
the plant. The paper after introducing the concerns of the MSME entrepreneurs, will emphasis to know
how the reducing operating costs resulting in increased profits and will understand how prospective
entrepreneurs can conveniently embrace the solar rooftop solutions and enjoy the benefits of saving and
ecowarriors status. The researcher will be suggesting and generating a techno-commercial model based on
certain selection criteria to act as an enabler in decision making for MSME. The Techno-
commercial model is designed to work with MSME’s to address the concerns of power. The model
attempts to work with MSME’s to understand and reduce power aspect of the operating
cost. The secondary research has also plan to cover following aspects like Solar Technology and solutions,
Solar Rooftop Policy in state of Maharashtra, Finances , Awareness and Cost benefit ratios etc.
Keywords: Technology Acceptance Model, Rooftop Solar, Solar Installation Resistance, MSME
profitability
The study of PV potential on the roof available for installation of roof tops solar with direct impact on
commercial and economical perspective is not address. In another study of various buildings and utility
features affecting the use of building for PV on the roof top in Kingdom of Saudi Arabia and environmental
assessment of rooftop PV with uses of tools such as PV syst, RET screen will be helpful for system design
calculations (Asif, Hassanain, & Nahiduzzaman, 2019).
There is a gap in research as there no specific study which covers the techno economics assessment and
commercial advantage of adoption of RTPV. This study is to address the gap and contribute on this
subject. It aims to create a model utilization of roof and potential area available for PV installation for
MSME, the model is based on 4 installation in MSME with different types of building roofs in Mumbai
and Pune region. It also plans to undertake detailed commercial feasibility of PV application on building
rooftops considering both Government policy and utility tariff post installations.
The Distributed Generation power through Roof top Solar PV will strength the Distribution Grid creating
surplus energy to be distributed to new industries and unelectrified villages reducing the grid outages and
increasing the performance of the grid. The concept of distributed generation operates in two ways
(i)reduce the load on the utility , (ii) reducing the transmission and distribution losses creating an efficient
and optimized distribution network. This importance of electricity was enabler to United Nations
Sustainable Development Goal 7 “ensure access to affordable, reliable, sustainable and modern energy for
all” (United Nations, 2017) This goal reflects the focus of most developing countries on “electrification,
[which] is virtually synonymous with modernization of the rural energy sector” (Kumar, Mohanty, & Palit,
2009). The techno-commercial view point in this model will descried the adaptation of technology as
solution and importance of Solar Rooftop for MSME. This research is based on site survey as assessment
of utility bills as received from MSME in Mumbai and Pune region. The qualitative approach based on 4
parameters, (1)Area of the roof available, (2) solar modules installation , (3) Electricity bills and (4)
Payback analysis
Rooftop solar is established technology and resistance to implementation has to be managed by following
factors
Feasibility Study
The study will act as understanding catalyst for the objective of MSME and installation, it will cover the
availability of shadow free area, type of grid connection, connected load, with reference to the feasibility
of installation of rooftop project it will determine the practical procedure and financial aspect of installation
of rooftop solar project.
Policy
Power in India is a state subject, hence all the state can introduce policy based on the long terms horizon
and planning. Government of Maharashtra has initiated net-metering policy in Sept 2015 to encourage the
rooftop in the state. However there is a proposed amendment in Maharashtra Net-metering Regulation 2019.
The Government will levy a grid support charge for all the installation over 10 KW. All the installation
over 10 kW government of Maharashtra proposed to levy grid support charges for using the grid as storage
and infrastructure supporting solar installation. This is called Grid Support Charges (GSC) , this charge will
put additional burden on the payback depending on the quantum of the GSC.
(MERC, 2019)
5. Research Methodology
The researcher has collected primary data, from a questionnaire and visit to the site and locations of 4
companies. The secondary data collected from Directorate of Industry, Maharashtra, Ministry of New and
Renewable Energy, Delhi. The purpose of the collection of data is to understand the policies, to analysis
bases of strength and weakness to find gaps and appropriate solutions to bridge the gaps.
Secondary research : Maharashtra is a progressive state with over 223,000 MSME registered with
Directorate of Industries, The region lies between 19° 39' N and 75° 18' E. with predominantly tropical
climate. This study is selected based on the selection of MSME or Small installation with based on MSME,
office, power consumption patterns, Roof area Available and low grid outage. The location for the study
are Mumbai Metropolitan region (MMR ) and Pune District.
• Registered MSME’s registered in Maharashtra 223000
• Investment by MSME in Maharashtra US $ 8 Billion investment in plant and machinery
• Spread over 6 Business Zone, and 242,000 Sq Km
• Employing over 27 Million work force
The study focuses on two regions MMR and Pune district that houses MSME. The selection of the two
regions are based on the opportunity and leading district in Maharashtra. MMR region was selected based
on the requirement. The results show a potential of 2190 MW for Mumbai city with median efficiency
panels, at an annual average capacity factor of 14.8%. (Rhythm & Rangan, 2015). Pune district was
selected based on the leading district in Maharashtra with over 50 MW installed in roof top. (Nandamuri,
2020). However there are no reports on MSME potential in MMR and Pune region.
The study aims to create to specific region level analysis of requirements and proposed a business model
for adaptation of Roof Top PV installation on MSME, the specific interest to increase the awareness on
the installation and successful deployment of solar projects. The model is confidence building measure to
entrepreneurs, MSME business owners and financial institution for investment in RTPV.
The model address the following questions (i) How to optimize the solar generation based on the current
renewable policy? (ii) Payback calculation based generation and tariff.
Demand Load
Total Area Shadow free Area Annual Consumption
Savings
First Year Saving ₹ 1,623,570.00
Utility Tariff
Utility Company MSEDCL
Energy Price 10.86
Prosumers Profile
25000
20000
UNITS
15000
10000
5000
0
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
MONTHS
Economic Parameters
IRR 48%
Total Savings for 20 Years ₹ 52,060,117.29
Payback period 3rd year
Payment Overview
Utility Tariff
Utility Company MSEDCL
Energy Price 13.1
Inflation Rate for Energy Price YOY 4%
Yearly Electricity Generation inkWh/A 148,500.00
Prosumers Profile
Units Consumed Solar generation based on Simulation
20000
15000
10000
5000
0
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
Table 3 A / Site Identification and Survey : Venus Furniture Pvt Ltd: Case 3
Sr No. Table General Information
Name of MSME Unit
1 owner VENUS FURNITURE PVT LTD
2 Contact Details 9869732284
3 Type of Industry Commercial office
Solar generation
Month Units Consumed Simulation Revised Consumed
1 6291 7910 -1619
2 5334 8440 -3106
Payment Overview
Investment for 70 kW ₹ 3,780,000.00
Depreciation @ 40% ₹ 1,512,000.00
Income tax Slab 25%
Income tax saving ₹ 378,000.00
Net Investment ₹ 3,402,000.00
Savings
First Year Saving ₹ 1,810,454.10
Second Year Savings ₹ 1,864,043.54
Third Year Savings ₹ 1,919,219.23
PROSUMERS PROFILE
Solar generation based on Simulation Units Consumed
15000
10000
5000
0
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
Prosumers Profile
Units Consumed Solar generation based on Simulation
60000
40000
20000
0
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
8. Significance
The intension of the study is to create to specific understanding on techno-commercial feasibility in MSME
and stakeholders including financial institution. The study will also region level analysis of requirements
and proposed a business model for adaptation of Roof Top PV installation on MSME, the specific interest
to increase the awareness on the installation and successful deployment of solar projects. The model is
confidence building measure to entrepreneurs, MSME business owners and financial institution for
investment in RTPV.
9. Limitations
There is downward price trend in the solar modules of Solar modules prices, this prediction of the prices
are not in control. The installation base will increase with proactive policies from the state government.
Distribution companies may delay mass scale Rooftop installation by using the policy to delay the growth.
10. Conclusion
There is direct relation between sunlight and solar PV generation , it will safe to say sunlight is like fuel
and RTPV is an vehicle to capture the fuel. We have factored following parameters
• PV-electricity production,
• Units consumed from grid or billed by the utility company for 12 months period
• PV-panels effectively used in the building,
• solar radiation in the plane of the panels
Based on the primary selection of the data, the RTPV will payback in 3-4 years, based on the tariffs. Post
the payback the installation will help reduced the levelized cost of electricity (LOCE). The expected life
to the project is 25 years with increase of taxes or surcharge to support grid as proposed by Govt of
Maharashtra the internal rate of return will be in the north of 25%.
Reference
Asif, M., Hassanain, M. A., & Nahiduzzaman, K. M. (2019). Techno-economic assessment of application
of solar PV in building sector A case study from Saudi Arabia. Smart and Sustainable Built Enrironment,
34-52.
Behura, A. K. (1999, 12 31). The role of reason in human actions: a study. University of Hyderabad.
Kumar, A., Mohanty, P., & Palit, D. '. (2009). Approach for standardization of off-grid electrification
projects. Renewable and Sustainable Energy Reviews , 1946–1956.
Lee, S., Srinivasan, I., Menghong, F., Prashant, S., & Maji, S. (2019). DeepRoof: A Data-driven
Approach For Solar Potential Estimation Using Roo op Imagery. Applied Data Science Track Paper.
Anchorage, AK, USA.
MERC. (2019). Maharashtra Electricity Regulatory Commission (Grid Interactive Rooftop Renewable
Energy Generating Systems) Regulations, 2019. Retrieved from MERC ;Statement of Reasons-Grid
Interactive-RRE-Regulations,2019 pdf: https://www.merc.gov.in/faces/merc/common/outputClient.xhtml
MNRE. (2019, July 26). Benchmark costs for Off-grid Solar PV Systems and Solarisation of Grid
Connected Agricultural Pumps for the Year 2019-20. Retrieved from MNRE.GOV.IN:
https://mnre.gov.in/content/benchmark-costs-grid-solar-pv-systems-and-solarisation-grid-connected-
agricultural-pumps
Osborne, M. (2019, January 16). Global solar PV installations reach 109GW in 2018 - BNEF. Retrieved
from https://about.bnef.com/new-energy-outlook/#toc-download: https://www.pv-tech.org/news/global-
solar-pv-installations-reach-109gw-in-2018-bne
Pandey, R. R., & Arora, M. S. (2016). DISTRIBUTED GENERATION SYSTEM: A REVIEW AND ITS
IMPACT ON INDIA. International Research Journal of Engineering and Technology.
Parikh, A. M. (2020, Jan 20). Maharashtra Proposes Grid Charges on Net Metering Rooftop Solar
Systems Over 10 kW. Retrieved from https://mercomindia.com/: https://mercomindia.com/maharashtra-
proposes-grid-charges-net-metering-rooftop-solar/
Rhythm, S., & Rangan, B. (2015). Estimation of rooftop solar photovoltaic potential of a city. Solar
Energy, 589-602.
United Nations. (2017). SUSTAINABLE DEVELOPMENT GOAL 7. Retrieved from Report of the
Secretary-General, Special edition: progress towards the Sustainable Development Goals:
https://sustainabledevelopment.un.org/sdg7
Abstract: This research paper looks at Mergers and Acquisitions of Indian public sector banks
from human resource point of view and the impact on employees that have happened in Indian
banking sector. This research paper focuses on the management of human resources in the process
of mergers and acquisitions. The paper also analyses and recommends steps that banks should
consider during the merger of banks. The paper suggests different parameters that should be taken
into consideration during mergers. The findings suggest that to some extent M&A’s has been
successful in Indian banking sector but productivity from employees have declined.
Keywords: - Mergers, Acquisition, Job Satisfaction, Organizational Commitment
Introduction
Many research conducted have stated that human resource function is the most complicated
organizational issue in mergers. Human Resource management issues like reward strategy, service
conditions, employee relations, compensation and benefit plans, pension provisions, law suits and
trade union actions are critical to the viability for the deal and merger plan. Training and
development initiatives can play an important role during the period of announcement, closure,
and the post amalgamation stage. Organizations have to create such open spaces, where employees
have the opportunity to discuss their personal concerns and work out as to how they might need to
adjust. Change management sessions also help employees in understanding how individuals and
organizations typically react to change. People become committed to a merger when they believe
it is built on a sound strategy and offers personal benefits in terms of financial incentives and other
opportunities. It should meet their emotional needs as well. It is always advisable to attend to the
decisions of human resource very quickly, that is, within 100 days of merger announcement in
order to avoid uncertainty, which would lead to employee morale erosion and the exit of key talent.
All the HR issues such as selection, retention and promotion opportunities need to be effectively
communicated to the staff, while emphasizing on the degree of transparency and fairness in order
to establish credibility. In the cases of voluntary mergers like Times Bank' and 'Bank of Madura',
the acquired banks have guaranteed employment to all the employees and minimized the scope for
conflicts. A merger is a deal to unite two existing companies into one new company. There are
several types of mergers and also several reasons why companies complete mergers. Most mergers
unite two existing companies into one newly named company. Mergers and acquisitions are
commonly done to expand a company’s reach, expand into new segments, or gain market share.
An acquisition is a corporate action in which a company buys most, if not all, of another firm's
ownership stakes to assume control of it. An acquisition occurs when a buying company obtains
more than 50% ownership in a target company. As part of the exchange, the acquiring company
often purchases the target company's stock and other assets, which allows the acquiring company
to make decisions regarding the newly acquired assets without the approval of the target
company’s shareholders. A merger is generally defined as the joining of two or more different
organizations under one common owner and management structure while an acquisition is the
References:-
1. Rani, Saxena Chhavi; Indu, Bhargava.Advances in Management; Indore Vol. 8, Iss. 3, (Mar 2015):
26-28.VOLUME NO. 8 (2018), ISSUE NO. 04 (APRIL) ISSN 2231-100
2. Kaur, Gagandeep(2015) Perception of bank employees' towards working environment of selected
Indian universal banks The International Journal of Bank Marketing; Bradford Vol. 33, Iss. 1,
(2015): 58-77.
3. Aziri, B. (2011 ), " Job satisfaction: a literature review ", Management Research and Practice ,
Vol. 3 No. 4, pp.77 - 86 .
4. Devi, V.R. and Nagini, A. ( 2013 ), " An investigation of factors influencing job satisfaction of
employees in banking sector of India ", International Journal of Research in Organizational
Behavior and Human Resource Management , Vol. 1 No. 3, pp. 107 - 115 .
5. Kamal, R. and Sengupta, D. (2009), "A study of job satisfaction of bank officers ", Prajnan, Vol.
XXXVII No.3, pp. 229 – 245
6. Kumari, G. and Pandey, K.M. (2011), " Job satisfaction in public sector and private sector: a
comparison ", International Journal of Innovation, Management and Technology, Vol. 2 No. 3,
pp. 222 - 228.
7. Goyal K.A. and Joshi Vijay, Mergers in Banking Industry of India: Some Emerging Issues, Asian
Journal of Business and Management Sciences, 1(2), 157-165, Retrieved From Www.Aibms.Qrg/
Articlepdf/Aibms, 1231.Pdf (2011)
8. Ishwarya J (2019), “A Study on Mergers and Acquisition of Banks and a Case Study on SBI and
its Associates”, Conference Proceeding Published in International Journal of Trend in Research
and Development (IJTRD), ISSN: 2394-9333
Abstract
The present education system in management colleges is focused solely on imparting theoretical
concepts and do not accord importance to soft skills which are primarily sought by industry
at entry level .
In this context , the self-perceived rating of soft skills is important for management students as
they need to know and realise the current status of their ability w,r,t English proficiency ,
interpersonal skills, problem solving and decision making , creativity , emotional intelligence,
conflict management stress management ,time management , team skills and leadership skills
in relation to expectations of the industry .
It is only when they the current state is known can the gaps be identified and necessary action
be initiated to bridge the gap to reach the desired state.
For this to happen , the students would need to introspect and identify the soft skills areas of
deficiency wherein they would need to acquire focused training from an employability
perspective.
This paper captures the collective perception of management students w,r,t industry relevant
soft skills and their current state of proficiency .
Key Words
Perception , Focused Skills training , Soft Skills, Employability
Introduction
Talent is the basis for competition and need to be nurtured in management institutes . Supply
chain refers to a mindset to be developed by management institutes which would cater to the
needs of the industry by providing adequate training and development opportunities for the
students in the college. .
It is widely believed that what is taught in management colleges is not relevant for industry and
that what is relevant for industry is not taught in management colleges.
There have been a number of surveys conducted to this effect to gauge the needs of the industry
and ways to address them from an employers ,employees and faculty perspective . It would be
Literature Review
Research Method
A primary research was carried out thru a survey .
The Questionnaire was newly designed, developed , reviewed and administered using Google
Forms to 400 + management students across five management institutes located in Mumbai
offering the MMS course of Mumbai university ..
The survey responses were then collected and analysed .
One
out of every five ( 20 % ) feel that they are below average in written English
One out of every ten students ( 10 % ) feel that they are below average in reading English
Two out of every five students feel that they are below average in their awareness of How to
say in a given situation
One out of every eight students ( 12 % ) feel that they are below average in their ability to
listen to other
Three out of every ten ( 30 % )students feel that they are below average in interpersonal skills
Three out of every ten students ( 30 %) feel that they are below average in their skills of self
reflection
Three out of every ten students ( 30 % ) feel that the are below average in their ability to
critically analyse situations
One out of every four students feel that they are below average in their ability to solve
problems and take important decisions
Three out of every ten ( 30 % ) students feel that they are below average in their awareness of
emotional quotient
Four out of very Ten students ( 40 % ) feel that they are below average in their awareness to
improve emotional quotient
Three out of every ten ( 30 %) students feel that they are below average in their time
management skills
One out of every eight students ( 12 %) feel that they are below average int her ability to
build and work in a team
One out of every four students (25 % ) feel that they are below average in their overall
management skills
Three out of every ten students ( 30 % ) feel that they are below average in their leadership
skills
13 to 24 25 to 36 above 36
Nil 0 to 12 months months months months
Below
Average 68 23 10 9 1 111
Average 102 39 12 8 7 168
Above
Average 68 31 17 8 7 131
410
X1 79
X2 31 Xg 410
X3 13 27
X4 8
X5 5
SS between 145475
MSS
df 4 BET 36368.86
ANOVA
Case 2
1 to 12 13 to 24 25 to 36 above 36
Nil months months months months
Below
Average 79 30 8 5 4 126
Average 115 48 24 14 8 209
Above
Average 40 23 7 5 2 77
234 101 39 24 14 412
X2 34
X3 13 Xg 27
X4 8
X5 5
SS within 1 13 25 9 16 64
1369 205 121 36 4900 6631
1444 114 36 9 5776 7379
14075
MS
Fcal between 0.075845
MS within
F tab@ 4,10 df α =0.05 is 5.96 .
Below Above
Average Average Average
Male 70 133 52 255
Female 55 77 33 165
125 210 85 420
Chi Sq -
= ( O-E )^2
O E O-E O-E^2 /E
70 75.89 -5.89 34.69 0.46
133 127.5 5.5 30.25 0.24
52 51.6 0.4 0.16 0.00
55 49.1 5.9 34.81 0.71
77 82.5 -5.5 30.25 0.37
33 33.39 -0.39 0.15 0.00
1.78
Correlation Analysis
Case 1
Ability to write in
English X
Ability to speak in
English Y
Correlation
Coeff r = 1582 1582 1582 0.936 93.6
1508 * 1895 Sq rt (2857660 ) 1690
We conclude that there is a high positive correlation ( 93.6 % ) between each students
perception of his / her ability to keenly observe and comprehend a situation with that of what to
say in given situation ..
Case 3
Below Above
Average Average Average
Below
Average 75 37 12 124
Emotional
Awareness Average 42 108 24 174
Above
Average 20 58 42 120
137 203 78 418
Chi Sq =(O-E
O E O-E (O-E )^2 )^2 /E
75 41 34 1181 29
37 60 -23 539 9
12 23 -11 124 5
42 57 -15 226 4
108 85 23 552 7
24 32 -8 72 2
20 6 14 203 35
58 58 0 0 0
42 22 20 384 17
109
Above
Below Average Average Average
Below Average 71 62 16
Ability to
Comprehend Average 31 129 56
Above Average 0 24 32
102 215 104
O E O-E (O-E)^2
71 36 35 1218
62 110 -48 2334
16 14 2 5
31 52 -21 455
129 110 19 349
56 53 3 7
0 14 -14 184
24 29 -5 21
32 14 18 330
Conclusions
Communication skills in English have been identified as indispensable workplace tools for success
in business (Hynes & Bhatia, 1996). English is considered the primary prerequisite qualification
for employment. The knowledge of English is considered one of the employability skills. The
survey indicated that the ability to speak in English is dependent on medium of instruction thus
clearly indicating that English medium students have an advantage over vernacular medium
students when it comes to speaking in English ,
It was inferred that that there is no difference in Interpersonal skills of various groups of students
with work experience .This would mean that focussed training need to be imparted to students
as experience in an organisation (even up to three years ) do not necessarily ensure
improvement in interpersonal skills ..
We conclude that interpersonal skills is independent of gender of students and that there is no
significant difference in interpersonal skills among males and female students It was also
possible to establish the dependency of conflict management skills on emotional awareness of
students.
In case of the soft skills listed in the questionnaire which include english proficiency , listening
, interpersonal skills ,introspection, critical analysis, creativity ,decision making, emotional
intelligence, conflict management ,time management ,stress management ,team management ,
overall management and leadership skills it was found that on an average about 50 % of students
rated themselves just “ average “ and about 30 % of students rated themselves “ below
average ” necessitating the need for industry relevant focused skills training to be imparted
at management colleges .
References
1. Graduate Business Students' Preferences for the Managerial Communication Course
Curriculum - GE Hynes, V Bhatia - Business Communication Quarterly, 1996 –
journals.sagepub.com
2. A Managerial Perspective: Oral Communi cation Competency Is Most Important for Business
Students in the Workplace Jeanne D. Maes -TG Weldy, ML Icenogle - The Journal of
Business …, 1997 - journals.sagepub.com
3. Awayiga, Onumah, and Tsameny (2010) - Management Theory, Research and Practice for
Sustainable Development in Africa: A Commentary from a Practitioner's Perspective – Vincent
Bagire , Juliana Namada
4. Technical and non‐technical education and the employability of engineering graduates: an
Indian case study - V. K. Gokuladas https://doi.org/10.1111/j.1468-2419.2010.00346.x
5. Technology management education in MBA programs: a comparative study of knowledge
and
skill requirements Debasish N Mallicka Abhijit Chaudhuryb
https://doi.org/10.1016/S0923- 4748(00)00019-9
6. Communicative approach to soft and Hard skills :A Chaturvedi, A Yadav,
S Bajpai - Journal VSRD-International of business
7. Becoming a Leader: Early Career Challenges Faced by MBA Graduates :
************
Abstract:
Basic Income {BI} is simply providing a large portion of people in a country with a guaranteed
amount of money every month with some or no strings attached. There have been various research
on how people would spend that money and we have various insights on what impact does it cause
to the people and is it effective or not.
In the year 2017, then CEA Arvind Subramanian proposed a Quasi-Universal Basic Rural Income,
providing socially and economically people with guaranteed pay of Rs. 18000/year instead of the
other various schemes run by the government in support of the Farmers and Daily Wage Workers.
[a]
In the same way I am proposing BI for all the unemployed youths losing jobs due to automation
and industry 4.0.
In this paper, I would cite the reason why BI is important for uplifting the poor with various
insights from different countries and how to implement BI for the people losing a job due to UBI
in India, how much it would cost to the government and who will pay for it.
Keywords: Basic Income, Universal Basic Income, Negative Income Tax, GST, Gross Income,
Revenue per employee, Digital Services Tax, OECD.
Introduction:
With the increase of Technology from 1985-2015 there has been a shift of jobs from Agricultural
to Other sectors. Even though Technology took jobs it created jobs as well, but with the rise of the
Industry 4.0, even the people who drive the industry are sceptical about the impact on jobs this
revolution will have.
It is estimated that a total of 56 million jobs will be lost due to Automation by 2030 in India alone
and a whopping 800 million jobs of the total 2800 million workforce around the globe. Agriculture,
forestry, fishing, transportation and warehousing are among sectors where job losses from
automation will be the most acute for India’s workers.[1]
With such adverse effects going to occur due to Automation there is a Global outcry against it,
even to the extent that people have started having their doubts on Capitalism.
To tackle the problem of unemployment there are many methods, one of them which is grabbing
attention is Universal Basic Income or Negative Income Tax.
Figure 1[1]
Literature Review:
From June 2011- March 2012, a pilot program of basic income was done in the state of Madhya
Pradesh, where people with income lower than $100/month were given $4.4/month per adult and
$2.2/month per child.
On observation, it was found that there was a dramatic improvement in assets, especially in the
tribal village, the poorest of the villages. For example, the percentage of households which had at
least one bed went up from 35.5% to 83%. Mobile phone ownership increased from 9% to 61%
and the ownership of scooters or motorbikes rose from 3% to 30%. By the end of the project, the
proportion of children with normal weight for age had increased from 39% to 59%, the effect was
greater on girls (25% increase) than on boys (14% increase) and the proportion of households
reporting sufficient income to satisfy food needs rose from 52% to 78%.[3]
Figure 2
Research Method:
NIT for unemployed people:
UBI and an NIT designed to achieve the same redistributive effect would impose the same
marginal rates of taxation on other sources of income, but that the overall tax burden required to
fund an NIT would be much smaller than for an equivalent UBI.[2]
The cost mentioned above will not be exact cost, it may not be eve near the exact cost as many of
the data is not available, and we can’t be sure that the informal sector may even have a PAN card.
As you can notice that the unemployment level in the youth of India is in the range of 40 million
and the data we used here is just touching 3 million. So, you can be pretty sure that the program
will cost around 15X the cost estimated in the data. The data above doesn’t even exclude people
with low educational qualifications.
Hence the cost can be near Rs.36238,66,99,890/year or Rs. (3.5-4)0000,00,00,000/year i.e.
0.175-0.2% GDP.
The cost above is stated just to give a rough idea that how much the program can cost the Indian
Government.
With this estimation, I would like to propose take-back rate(t) slabs for the proposed NIT, since
our country is very diverse, and the cost of the project is also high I propose slabs.
Gross Income (GI) t(Rural) t(Urban)
Rs. 0<GI<80,000 12% 12%
Rs. 80,000<GI<120,000 9% 10%
Rs. 120,000<GI<150,000 5% 8%
NIT for Individual (for HUF multiply GI by 1.67)
5% 5%
12% 15%
18% 20%
28% 30%
3. Digital Tax, this is a new way to tax the companies of the digital economy, the Model
of French digital services tax can be followed, we even have various models from a
different organisation like the OECD and with an international effort to tax the
MNCs is also underway. The Indian government also has its version of digital tax
known as equalisation levy which is at 6% earning Rs. 939 crores in 2017-18 which
must increase as internet companies use tax havens to avoid paying taxes, the
government should come up with an idea to tax the big tech firms doing business in
India.[8]
Since the IGST revenue generation per month is around Rs. 50,000 crores.[10] So, the increase in
revenue if we increase all the rates by 5% is R.2500 crores/ month or Rs.30,000 crores/year.
Hence, since the rates at which we estimate to increase the numbers is less than the above example
we conclude that the revenue generation by an increase in IGST rates will be higher than the above
example.
So, the total revenue from both the taxes is approximately Rs.42,000 crores which cross our
estimated requirement of Rs. 40,000 crores.
Conclusion:
As we have seen above the Project is not impossible and not way too expensive if implemented
properly, though I agree that the Data is inadequate, the project can be implemented.
So, the government must start pilot programs of its own to get the complete data and picture all
the pros and cons of this project and even project an almost exact estimate of the cost of the project.
The research available right now is not sufficient to come to a decisive conclusion as the Basic
Income plan in India is in its early stages.
Basic Income in India is far but not too far and not inevitable, and to overcome the possibility of
extreme job losses due to Automation, this is an excellent method and with NIT we can even check
the Income of most of the citizens bringing all jobs into formal sector as well as NIT also costs
less than UBI.
References:
a. Quasi-Universal Basic Rural Income (QUBRI): The Way Forward
1. Jobs Lost, Jobs gained: What the future of work will mean for jobs, skills, and wages by
McKinsey Research Institute November 2017 Report.
2. The Relative Cost of a Universal Basic Income and a Negative Income Tax, Philip Harvey,
Rutgers University, December 2006
3. India’s Basic Income Experiment by Rasmus Schjoedt.
OBJECTIVES
1. To understand the concept of AI & AR
2. To review the literature in the area of AI & AR
3. To analyze the factors responsible for the effectiveness of AI and AR
4. To identify the causal relationship between the factors responsible for effectiveness when
combining AI & AR and demographic factors
RESEARCH METHODOLOGY
In this study, Qualitative and Quantitative research approaches (which include exploratory as well
as descriptive) have been used in order to dig out the factors viz. Awareness, Level of Adoption
Usability and User Interface adopted to measure the combining effectiveness of AI and AR with
special reference of Furniture Industry.
• Primary data has been collected by conducting online survey along with structured
interview.
• Secondary data has been collected through research journals, various websites and books.
Cronbach’s Alpha is calculated as a measure of internal consistency. The closer the value, the
greater is internal consistency of items in the instrument being assessed.
It is observed from the Table no – 4.1 that reliability statistics for the entire project having the
value 0.737 i.e. above 0.7. Therefore, all items are suitable for conducting Factor Analysis.
TESTING OF HYPOTHESIS
Objective 3- To analyze the factors responsible for the effectiveness of AI and AR.
H0 factors are identified will not measure the effectiveness of combining AI and AR.
H1 factors are identified will measure the effectiveness of combining AI and AR.
Table no - 4.2
KMO and Bartlett's Test
Kaiser-Meyer-Olkin Measure of Sampling Adequacy. .803
Approx. Chi-Square 543.457
Bartlett's Test of Sphericity Df 91
Sig. .000
The test comprises of Kaiser-Meyer-Olkin (KMO Test) and Bartlett’s Test adequacy which
was followed to test the case to variable ratio for analysis being conducted, applied and to check
the suitability of component analysis.
As shown in Table no – 4.2, result of KMO and Bartlett’s Test produce the value of 0.803 and
0.000 respectively. Then, the suggested value 0.6 and 0.05 for Factor Analysis to be suitable. Our
significance value is less than 0.05, which denotes that the sample is adequate.
Hence, it shows that the factors identified through the responses from different responses
from different age groups and gender was suitable and valid to study the problem.
Therefore, H0 were rejected.
Table No – 4.3
Rotated Component Matrixa
Component
1 2 3 4
Q1 -.012 .157 -.106 .751
Q2 -.115 .653 -.112 .052
Q3 .141 .020 .211 .636
Q5 .380 .633 .230 .198
Q6 .584 .216 -.036 .353
Q7 -.085 .447 .639 .092
Q8 -.058 .119 -.870 -.009
Component 1 – Usability
(Q6, Q10, Q11, Q13, Q14, Q15)
Component 2 – User Interface
(Q2, Q5, Q9, Q12)
Component 3 – Level of Adoption
(Q7, Q8)
Component 4 – Awareness
(Q1, Q3)
Objective 4 – To identify the causal relationship between the factors responsible for effectiveness
when combining AI &AR and demographic factors.
H0 - Demographic factor doesn’t have a significant impact on the factors identified to measure the
effectiveness of A & AR.
H1 - Demographic factor does have a significant impact on the factors identified to measure the
effectiveness of AI & AR
FINDINGS
A sample size of 160 population was taken, out of which 153 respondents were studied.
• The three major factors which played an important in measuring effectiveness of
combining AI and AR were Awareness, Level of Adoption Usability and User Interface.
• It has been found that now a day’s people frequently use online platform for purchases.
• The study revealed that 50% of the respondents believe that utilization of AI and AR
maximizes cost while 34% believes that it doesn’t and the remaining respondents were
confused.
• Majority of the respondents agree with the fact that use of combined technologies of AI
and AR leads to ease of shopping, reduced purchasing time and has improvised the
visualization of products as well as made customization easy.
• Mixed views were received regarding whether the combination of AI and AR improves
transparency between customers and retailers.
CONCLUSION
• The results revealed that there is a positive impact of identified factors i.e. Awareness,
Level of Adoption Usability and User Interface on the effectiveness of combining two
technologies together.
• It was also established that the identified drivers have a relationship with demographic
factors as they help companies to measure the effectiveness and adopt marketing strategies
accordingly.
• The combination of AI and AR technology will overall give a new edge to the furniture
industry and will help customers in better decision making.
• As per the results, male’s awareness is more and it impacts the usability of males. Similarly,
in females though the awareness level is less it influences the usability of female is more
as compared to male respondents.
• Effectiveness of combining AI and AR gets influenced as per age group, so companies can
use these two technologies together by targeting age group of 26-30years as all factors i.e.
Awareness, Level of Adoption Usability and User Interface have the highest mean rank.
FUTURE SCOPE
The study can be carried forward by considering the Geographic factors, whether it has or doesn’t
have a significant impact on the factors identified to measure the effectiveness of AI and AR.
REFERENCES
Bibliography
1. Al-Sukkar, A. S., Hussein, A. H. M. M. A., & Jalil, M. M. A. (2013). The Effect of Applying
Artificial Intelligence in Shaping Marketing Strategies: Field Study at the Jordanian Industrial
Companies. International Journal of Applied Science and Technology, Jordan, Global Society of
Scientific Research and Researchers (GSSRR).
KEYWORDS
In-app advertisement ,Advertising, Millennials, Mobile
INTRODUCTION
1.1 The rise of mobile industry
At the helm of 2018, India has become a success story of mobile adoption with the penetration of mobile
devices not only confined to the tier 1 cities of India. Such is the pace of the rise of the industry that it is
expected that in 2022, mobile penetration will reach 90%. This fact makes this study highly relevant to the
times.
A major force behind this rise is the advent of Jio, in 2016. Now, even rural people could access the internet
due to the highly relevant factor of affordability. Such is the situation of the market that there might be a
mobile in every household but not a desktop. Jio is what made mobile marketing a technique for the masses.
Mobile penetration apart, what has grasped the modern marketer’s imagination is that India had become
the world’s fastest rising economy for mobile apps with the steep rise of 41% in the first quarter of 2018.
To really talk about how localized the apps have become, let us take the case of Neighbourly, an app that
is customized to the needs of the Indian consumers. The app is a source of information that is hyperlocal to
the consumer where the consumers ask their neighbours in real time, with the ability to offer these solutions
in local languages. Thus reaching a whole new demographic who may or may not speak English.
India also holds the distinction of being the fifth country in the world with the highest volume of downloads
of games, following the US, China, Brazil and Russia. What makes the Indian market so special for the
mobile and the advertising industry is that most of the population is youth and the industry of mobile gaming
fails to show a sign of fatigue.
India lies at an interesting crossroads of demography. One is that India, has one of the highest population
in the world, with most of its population young. Majority of the population is millennials which is a good
omen for the Indian market. Coupled with all this, is that the disposable income of the average Indian is on
the rise. Though the growth of the millennial generation hasn’t always been a smooth story. With major
events shaping their minds and an almost unlimited access to technology, vis-à-vis to information,
marketers must realize that they are dealing with a new kind of consumer, one who is active and willing to
take part in the economy.
Following are some of the consumer behavioral patterns that define the millennials
• There is a lot more significance given to personality and feeling. 60% of all millennials are inclined
to buy because they feel it expresses their personality and makes them feel good
• Millennials live with the belief, “If you love it, share it.” Social media has become a stronger
proponent in their daily scheme of things. They are 13% more likely to be influenced in purchase
through social media than the previous generations. They are opinionated and community driven.
They prefer engagement and every touch point matters to them.
• Millennials do not pledge loyalty without reason. They are soulful in their purchase and wander as
look to connect in essence with a product or brand or an experience.
• Millennials prefer the experience over the narrative of the experience; traditional advertising. Such
is the desire for experience that they are often willing to pay a premium for it.
• Millennials prefer to trust word of mouths as against advertisements. There is a strong sentiment
of peer influence among the millennials that cannot be ignored. One of the things that could be
adopted by the marketers to influence millennials is through influencer marketing.
• Millennials are highly detailed and personalized in their demands. They seek relevance, not only
in the functional aspect of the product but also the essence of the brand and how they resonate with
the core values of the brand.
• Millennials are high independent thinkers.
• Millennials are highly skewed towards devices that can be connected T.V. rather than the old and
traditional form of T.V.
• They are highly distracted which turns into bare program engagement and even lower memorability
scores.
OBJECTIVES
The objective of this research is to understand the perception of millennials towards in-app advertising.
Many organizations nowadays shifting towards mobile applications to get in touch with their customers &
alongside to make sufficient revenue they started in-app advertisement. This in-app advertisement with the
help of AI examines the likelihood of the customers and show them the ads based on their preferences and
recent searches. The main motive behind conducting this research is to identify whether the millennials
who are majority of smartphone users in the country are liking the in-app advertisement, just ok with in-
app ads or hating it.
4.1 Introduction
What we’re trying to achieve here is to recognize what ticks the customer, what turns him/her off and what
factors are important to millennials when it comes to advertising and in-app advertising in specific. A
sample of 30 was conducted to understand the millennials and their behaviours towards in-app advertising.
We first began with asking the basic fundamental questions about the individual like name, age and gender.
Then we moved on to asking whether the respondent had a smartphone to ensure the relevance of the
research to the respondent. This was followed by questions addressing the frequency of usage and whether
the respondent preferred to use an app or a browser. Then to further understand our target, we mapped out
the usage pattern of the respondent to understand which genre of application catches the millennial’s
attention. The higher is the audience base of a certain genre, the higher is the value of that application in
terms of advertising. We then identified factors that were liked and disliked about ads on each of the existing
platforms that were a part of the daily life of the target and based on that we asked their treatment or their
response of the ads they encountered over these platforms, specific to the platform. Once we established
their likes, dislikes and behavioural responses we ventured further into their attitudes towards location based
advertising due to its high relevance in the context of in-app advertising and further we ventured into the
area of branded content as it is ultimately, a different to look at apps and ads on the mobile device
4.2 Questions
1. Name
7. From a scale of 1-10 how open are you to mobile advertising? (1 - Lowest, 10 - Highest)
8. Rank your personal smartphone usage pattern (Rank 1 - Most used, Rank 10 - Least used)
a. Gathering information e. News
(Google/Bing) f. Streaming services
b. Social Media g. Payment Services
c. Gaming h. E-Commerce
d. Text/call
9. What do you like about these platforms? (Options: Informative, engaging, entertaining, relevance
to the app in use, credibility)
a. Social Media e. Streaming Services
b. Games f. Payment Services
c. News g. E-Commerce
d. Google/Bing
10. How do you treat the ads in the platform? (Options: Purchase, download, Click, Skip)
a. Social Media e. Streaming Services
b. Games f. Payment Services
c. News g. E-Commerce
d. Google/Bing
h.
11. What do you dislike about the ads on these platforms? (Options: Intrusive, irrelevance, Size,
position, pop up, video, offensive, repetitive)
a. Social Media e. Streaming Services
b. Games f. Payment Services
c. News g. E-Commerce
d. Google/Bing
12. From a scale of 1-10, how open are you in giving your location when apps demand it? (1 - Lowest,
10- Highest)
13. From a scale of 1-10, how open are you in receiving location based advertising? (1 - Lowest, 10 -
Highest)
14. From a scale of 1-10, how open are you the idea of apps as branded content? (1 - Lowest, 10 -
Highest)
DATA ANALYSIS
Fig1
Fig 2
Fig 3
Fig 5
Fig 6
Fig 8
Fig 10
Fig 11
Fig 13
Fig 15
Fig 17
Fig 19
Fig 21
Fig 23
Fig 25
Fig 27
Fig 28
Fig 31
Fig 33
Fig 35
Fig 37
Fig 39
Fig 40
6.1 Inference
In the research conducted, 60% were of the age of 25-31, while 40% were of the age 21-24. 53.3% were
female and 46.7%; male. Not surprisingly all had smartphones and majorly spent 6-8hrs a day on their
smartphones, followed by 3-5 hrs. This indicated that mobile had the biggest portion of attention of the
modern millennial consumer. Almost all of them preferred apps over browser, while being fairly open to
the idea of adverting and mobile advertising. We also encountered a certain paradox of people not
comfortable revealing their location but didn’t outrightly oppose location based advertising. Major usage
drivers were Google, social media and games followed by the rest. The users preferred a certain kind of
ad on specific platforms, like:
• Games - entertaining, engaging
• News - Informative
• Google - Informative and credible
• Streaming - Relevance and entertaining
• Payment - Relevance to the app, credibility
• E-commerce - Credible, Relevance to the app in use
While most of them were skipped, a majority of them were also clicked followed by personalized
behaviour varying from platform to platform. Like people were more prone to downloads on social media
and gaming apps and purchase on new and payment services.
Across platforms, ads which were repetitive, intrusive to the experience of the app, like pop up ads were
unpopularly disliked.
Due to the existence of multiple touch points where the millenials interact with the brand due to the use of
multiple devices, millenials are in the active pursuit of connection so as long as the advertising is relevant
and connects to the target audience, there is a massive positive response.
Coming to the inclination to mobile advertising, the acceptance is definitely higher as the maximum
screen time that millenials get are from mobile devices and the applications they use.
Considering that millennials are looking for connection, it is no wonder that branded content and branded
apps have a positive feedback. For they are more immersive in their experience of the brand at the
comfort of the millennial's homes.
Millennials are a highly curious breed and mostly use their phones to search information develop their
knowledge. They are also social animals and spend most of their time on social networks, connection,
sharing, liking and opinionating about issues that are important to them. With the rise of hyper casual
games, millennials are also stuck to their screen playing games that require little mental effort but also
2. https://www.forbes.com/sites/forbesagencycouncil/2018/06/04/understanding-the-research-on-
millennial-shopping-behaviors/#5fdd2eef5f7a
3. https://www.nielsen.com/us/en/insights/news/2017/millennials-on-millennials-a-look-at-viewing-
behavior-distraction-social-media-stars.html
4. Adoption of sensor based communication for mobile marketing in India - Abhishek. Indian Institute
of Management, Ahmedabad, India, and Shravan Hemchand, Whitman School of Management,
Syracuse University, Syracuse, New York, USA
6. Enhancing customers’ continued mobile app use in the service industry, Seonjeong (Ally) Lee,
Kent State University, Kent, Ohio, USA
7. Is this mobile coupon worth my private information? Consumer evaluation of acquisition and
transaction utility in a mobile coupon shopping context. Hyunjoo Im Department of Design,
Housing, and Apparel, University of Minnesota, St. Paul, Minnesota, USA, and Young Ha
Department of Family and Consumer Sciences, California State University, Long Beach,
California, USA
9. Understanding the Orientation of Gen Y Toward Mobile Applications and In-app Advertising in
India, Varsha Jain, Ketaki Bhave and Subhadip Roy
Abstract:
India has achieved self sufficiency in food grain production through use of fertilizers, high
yielding varieties, mechanization of farms and use of pesticides. Crop protection chemicals plays
vital role to reduce food losses cause by pest and diseases. Although consumption of pesticide in
India is lower than other develop countries, production and consumption of pesticide in India show
steady growth leading to biggest issue of environmental and human health problems. Present
investigation was undertaken to study awareness of farmers towards usage of Pesticides in India
and related Issues and Challenges. Information base on available review of literature and other
authentic data sources.
Analysis of literature revealed that majority farmers adopt crop protection measures on advise
by Pesticide dealers . No farmer followed CIBRC(Central Insecticide Board Registration
Committee) guidelines for pest management. The recommended dose, time and frequency &
number of application of the pesticides are generally overlooked by the farmers. Lack of awareness
, low education regarding the undesirable health and environmental effects was observed to
influence the approach of the farmers towards adopting requisite protective measures, unsafe
pesticide handling. Pesticide use raises a number of environmental worries, including human and
animal health hazards. This has resulted into short term and long terms Impact on respiratory
system, nervous system, reproductive system of humans. Also pose serious threats to environment
and non target organism. Hence biggest challenge is to increase awareness among farmers,
pesticide applicators and dealers towards judicious use of pesticide and safe handling to avoid
impact to human health and environment. Promotion of alternative pest management strategies
such as use of IPM(Integrated pest management), use of biopesticide, botanical pesticide , is
essential to reduce usage of chemical pesticides. Farmers should be encouraged to get information
on Pesticide usage from Agricultural Universities and extension workers, Mobile APP and
farmer portal developed by Ministry of Agriculture, Govt .of India .etc. . There is a tremendous
scope for agricultural extension activity through which stewardship can be achieved.
Key words : Pesticides, Ministry of Agriculture ,CIBRC, Crop protection, Environment
1. Introduction :
India is basically an agricultural country . Agriculture plays a vital role in India’s economy. 54.6%
of the total workforce is engaged in agricultural and allied sector activities (Census 2011) and
accounts for 17.1% of the country’s Gross Value Added (GVA) for the year 2017-18
As per the Land Use Statistics 2014- 15, the total geographical area of the country is 328.7 million
hectares, of which 140.1 million hectares is the reported net sown area.
This has been possible due to improved means of cultivation, use of sophisticated technology, use
of fertilizers etc. In order to meet the growing demand of food, fertilizers are used to increase
productivity while Agrochemicals are used to control pest and diseases. On an average , 16.80 %
of major crop loss in India due to pest and diseases . This annual loss caused by pest and disease
estimated to be US 35877.32
Crop protection chemicals plays vital role to reduce food losses cause by pest and diseases.
Pesticides though not desirable are inevitable to prevent pre-harvest and post-harvest losses which
have assumed significance importance during recent times in agriculture. Introduction of synthetic
pesticides in agriculture has over shadowed the traditional methods of plant protection and
contributed to Food security.
Indian farmers are not aware of the cost benefit ratio for use of pesticides due to lack of awareness
on optimum pesticides use hence per capita consumption of pesticides of India stands at
0.27(kg/Ha) which is lower than other developed countries like China (13.06 kg/ha), Japan (11.85
kg/ha), Brazil (4.57 kg/ha) and other Latin American countries which in turn lowers food
productivity causes loss of crops caused by pest attacks. ( FICCI Report 2019)
The recommended use of pesticides vis-a vis their effectiveness on wide range of pests, provoke
the farmers to use them against pest of other crops also, on which they are not recommended to
boost their economy. Though strict regulations have been laid down by international agencies like
WHO, EPA(Nyakundi et al, 2010) , in India agencies like Central Insecticide Board and
Registration Committee(CIBRC) and Food Safety and Standard Authority of India (FSSAI) the
recommended dose , time and frequency of application of the pesticides are generally overlooked
by farmer (Gagan et al,2016) Various crops tend to be sprayed heavily up to the time of harvest,
and then shipped directly to market with no waiting period and moreover many are consumed
whole. This create a very significant potential for pesticide residues causing negative health effects
on consumers . Pesticide poisoning is a major global health problem in the recent days. At the
same time no much attention is given to requisite safety measures to be adopted and the
recommended mode of application for different kind of commonly used pesticides.
Ill effects of pesticide on human, animal and environmental health have also been well established
as they may enter into the environment through a variety of channels( percolation through soil and
ground water), as a part of run off water thus entering into surface water bodies, as aerosols when
applied as sprays, as residue in various plant parts , soil and water . Apart from affecting the target
pests they also influence the native micro and macro flora of the agricultural soils and water.
Currently there is a boom in the global pesticide market and new insecticides, fungicides;
herbicides are being introduce with greater level of activity. There is however need for a conscious
efforts to minimize the hazards to human beings and environment. There is a growing awareness
Thus this study focused on overall trend of pesticides usage in agriculture and attempts to assess
the perception and awareness of farmers and consumers on health hazards due to pesticide use
,base on available review of literature. And Other authentic data sources.
3.Objective of Study :-
A. To present an overview of Pesticide Industry in India
B. To study the Trend and growth of Pesticide Industry in India
C. To evaluate awareness of Indian farmers about pesticides usage.
Table : 2 Crop losses caused by insect pest to major agricultural crops in India
Hypothetical
Production in Moderate Value
Actual absence of of estimated
production(Million losses(million losses (USD
Crop Tones ) estimated loss in yield Tones) Million)
Total(Million
% Tones)
Cotton 58.17 30.00 24.93 83.10 15767.69
Rice 106.65 25.00 35.55 142.20 8467.36
Maize 24.26 18.00 5.33 29.59 1268.41
Rapeseed 7.88 20.00 1.97 9.85 1026.70
other
oilseeds 15.16 12.00 2.07 17.23 1215.55
Groundnut 9.71 15.00 1.71 11.43 1172.13
Pulses 19.78 15.00 3.49 23.27 2285.29
Coarse
seeds 19.03 8.00 1.65 20.68 378.20
Sugarcane 352.14 20.00 88.04 440.18 3160.25
Wheat 93.51 5.00 4.92 98.43 1135.75
16.80 35877.32
Source : Indian Journal of Entomology , 77(2): 165-168(2015)
D. To highlight the positive and adverse effects of pesticides on human being and farm
output.
4.Literature Review
In India Pesticides were introduce in 1948 but production was started in the year 1952 mainly
benzene hexa chloride (BHC) . Technical grade manufacturer of Agrochemicals make high purity
In India there are about 125 technical grade manufacturers, 800 registered formulators, more than
1,45,000 distributors and 60 technical grades pesticides. Around 80% of the generic and non-
generic pesticides are manufactured by major Indian manufacturing and multinational companies.
1. Insecticides: Insecticides provide protection to the crops from insects by either killing them
or by preventing their attack. Industry is dominated by insecticides accounting for 60% of
overall demand. E.g. Malathion, Chlorpyrifo, Cypermethrin etc.
2. Fungicides: Fungicides are used to control diseases on crops and are used to protect the
crops from the attack of fungi. Fungicides comprises only 18% of total pesticides market
share with its application in fruits, vegetables and rice etc. e.g. Mancozeb, Sulphur ,
Auzoxystrobin.etc.
3. Herbicides: also called as weedicides are used to kill undesirable plants comprises 16%
market share Bispyriback sodium, Glyphosate, Paraquat etc.
14000
12000
10000
Import Rs.CR.)
8000
Export( Rs.Cr.)
6000
4000
2000
0
2013-14 2014-15 2015-16 2016-17 2017-18 CAGR(%)
60000
50000
40000
30000 Consumption
20000
10000
0
2010-11 2011-12 2012-13 2013-14 2014-15 2015-16 2016-17 2017-18
1. Ganganpreet Singh Brar et al, 2015-16 conducted survey on various aspects of pesticide
usage like knowledge of farmers about pest managenment in Cauliflower and brinjal,
perception of the kind and frequency as well as severity of pests and diseases, awareness
of farmer, safety measures followed during pesticide application and IPM(Integrated pest
managenmnet practices ) etc. collected from district of Himachal Pradesh, India namely ,
Hamirpur, Bilaspur and Una . Information was collected from 150 farmers of selected
district.
Majority of farmers were varied between 21 to 50 years. 14.25% has received no formal
eduction, 21.89% were below secondary level, 25.36% were educated up to secondary
level 30.85% were complted senior secondary schooling.
Survey study revealed that about 57% of respondents were mainly dependent on the advice
of pesticide dealers, followed by relatives/friends (23.66%) as well as information from
public extention system personnel(19.33%) No farmer followed CIBRC guidelines for pest
management. It was observed that most of the farmers stored the pesticides bottles
(81.33%) at safe places in their house. 18.66% placed the bottles in usafe areas without any
safety measures. For farmers ,disposal of empty bottles was not a safety concern. Majority
farmer (61.66%) sold or reused the empty bottles after washing. 18% farmers adopted safe
disposal methods like crushing/ burying in the soil. Only 23.33% farmers disposed the
empty bottles fields. It was found that 36% farmers used self protection. Majority of
2. Himani Tyagi et al., 2012-13 conducted suryvey in Faridabad district , Cauliflower and
Tomato cultivating areas of Haryana to gather information on various aspects of pesticide
usage i.e. type, frequency , dosage etc. farmers perspectives on issues related to health
effects, economic aspects etc. as well as pest management practices.
Total 100 farmers having various levels of educational qualification were randomly
selected for collecting the data.
The result of the study revealed that Efficiency of pesticide for pest control was identified
as the most important factor that influences the choice of pesticide by farmers. 58%
respondents agreed that pest control is the crucial factor behind selection of pesticide and
42% farmers pointed out cost of the product as the driving factor for the same.
Recommendation and advice of dealers( 24%) and the fellow farmers (20%) were also
major contributing factors towards deciding the time of application of the pesticide.
However, 16% confirmed the pesticide application on regular basis throughout the crop
season without considering the presence of pest or disease symptoms. 16% farmers
continue the application even during harvesting. This indicates unregulated , rampant and
careless pesticide usage practices among the farmers that lead to serious environmental and
health problems.
The observations regarding the adoption of adequate safety and protective measures
related to pesticide application practices were quite disappointing. . Lack of proper
awareness and education regarding the undesirable health and environmental effects was
established as the chief cause behind this approach of the farmers. 56% farmers did not
adopt any kind of safety measures and precautions while applying the pesticides except
covering their mouth and nose with cloth. In some cases it was found that inspite of
awareness on this issue, farmers were unable to use protective materials due to cost factor.
Partial safety measures were adopted by 38% of the farmers. Taking complete protective
measures like wearing protective clothing, hand gloves, goggles, nose –masks and taking
bath immediately after application etc was reported by mere 3% of them. As a result of
continuous and long term exposure of the farm workers to pesticides in various forms and
conditions chronic health effects were confirmed by the respondents like nausea , vomiting
gastrointestinal problems , dizziness, allergy blurred vision etc.
3. Shetty et al, 2010 carried out study in 28 district from 12 Indian states base on type of crops
grown and pesticide consumption pattern to collect information on awareness of pesticide
usage pattern. Study revealed that 71% farmers did not follow the optimum dose or number
of sprays as per recommendation as the current dosages were not effective to control
increased intensity and incidences of pests and diseases in agro- ecosystem since pests have
developed resistance .it was observed that most of the respondents followed their own
5 . Suryawanshi et al, 2016, study on the farmers’ education and perception levels in the pesticide
predominant zones of Jalgaon district Maharastra (India) was done to have a base line data on the
use and misuse of pesticide under various cropping situations. Information from 100
farmers was collected through formal and informal personal interviews about their perception of
pesticides usage.
From the Study area it is revealed that Agriculture workers in the study area had a lack of
knowledge regarding pesticide use. Due to lack of knowledge and education regarding the
undesirable health and environmental effects was established, unsafe pesticide handling reported
by the interviewed group of farmers.
87% farmers not using protective measures during Pesticide application. 45-46% farmers observe
pesticide health symptoms of Blue red vision and Vomiting. 77% Farmers do not have knowledge
of Pesticide residue. 62% faremers through empty pesticides containers in field.
6. Sucheta et al 2019 , conducted study in Tijara Tehsil of Alwar district, Rajasthan , for the
period 2016-2018 to assess the consumption pattern of pesticides, the farmer's knowledge about
pesticides and there use in the agriculture field. it is revealed that only 34.8% farmers have
complete knowledge of pesticide application, 76.2% farmers never ready label on pesticide bottle,
47% farmers only use mask at the time of pesticide application, 72.8% farmers through empty
pesticide containers on the field. 49.8% farmers has been observe low health hazards effects such
as Headche,itching, dizziness after pesticide application .
4.4 Positive and adverse effects of pesticides on human being and farm output.
With the introduction of pesticides, farmers have been able to increase crop yield from the limited
land resources. Pesticides allow farmers to maximize the benefits of other valuable agricultural
tools, such as high quality seeds, fertilizers and water resources. Pesticides are therefore an
indispensable tool for the sustainable production of high quality food and fibers. Pesticides
contribute to enhanced human health by preventing disease outbreaks through the control of rodent
and insect populations. They enable farmers to produce more crops per unit area with less tillage,
thus reducing deforestation, conserving natural resources and curbing soil erosion. Pesticides are
also critical for the control of invasive species and noxious weeds. Pesticides used in stored
products can prolong the viable life of the produce, prevent huge post-harvest losses from pests
and diseases and protect the grain so it is safe to eat.
4.4.2 Pesticide Hazards :
Ideal pesticides must act selectively against certain pest organisms without adverse effects to non-
target organisms. However, it is difficult to achieve absolute selectivity and most pesticides are
also toxic to humans and other non-target organisms. Pesticide use raises a number of
environmental worries, including human and animal health hazards. Food products contaminated
with toxic pesticides are associated with severe effects on the human health. More than 95% of
sprayed insecticides and herbicides reach a destination other than their target species, including
non-target species, air, water and soil.
Vidhisha et al ,2014 reviewed potential adverse effects of pesticides on different organs systems.
Three main routes of pesticide entry into human body , Via dermal, inhalation and ingestion.
Pesticide spray mixtures in contact with broken skin are considered as the main route of dermal
entry. Pesticide spray mixtures in contact with broken or perspiring skin are considered as the main
route of dermal entry. Direct inhalation occurs only for volatile pesticides and the risk they
imposed is directly proportional to the degree of volatility of the respective product. Oral ingestion
occurs through occupational, intentional or accidental pesticide use when very small amount of
spray mist enters the nose and mouth and is swallowed during spraying. In human beings, pesticide
poisoning may result either from a single dose of pesticide ‘Acute’ or through the repeated intake
in small quantities ‘Chronic’ which accumulate in the body in the form of residues. Human
exposure directly or through diet may result in acute and delayed health effects. Acute pesticide
poisoning symptoms include allergies, hypersensitivity, giddiness, double vision, headache,
dermal abrasions etc Long term effects associated with pesticides include leukemia, lymphomas,
soft tissue sarcomas, brain, bone and stomach cancers, damage to the central and peripheral
nervous system, reproductive disorders, birth defects, disruption of the immune system and death
. Respiratory tract dysfunctions mainly occur in farm workers who are directly involved in the
Punit kumar et al l 2017 , conducted study of Malwa region of Punjab , The study showed that
the region was facing an unprecedented crisis of environmental health linked to indiscriminate,
excessive, and unsafe use of pesticides, fertilizers, and poor groundwater quality. The region has
been described as India’s “cancer capital” due to abnormally high number of cancer cases, which
have increased 3-fold in the last 10 years. Studies of the region have also highlighted a sharp
increase in many other pesticide-related diseases, such as mental retardation and reproductive
disorders. The most affected individuals were the agricultural workers who were directly exposed
to pesticides. The high use of pesticides, along with environmental and social factors, was
responsible for the high concentration of pesticide residues in the food chain of this region.
During 2017-18, under the Department of Agriculture, Cooperation & Farmers Welfare, Ministry
of Agriculture & Farmers Welfare sponsored central sector scheme, “Monitoring of Pesticide
Residues at National Level”, 27 NABL accredited participating laboratories located in different
parts of India collected and analyzed the samples of vegetables, fruits, spices, curry leaves, red
chili powder, rice, wheat, pulses, milk, fish/marine, tea, meat, egg and water from retail outlets,
APMC markets, mother dairy, organic outlets and farm gate for the possible presence of pesticide
residues. A total of 23,660 samples were collected and analysed. The pesticide residues were
detected in 4,510 samples (19.1%), out of which the residues in 523 (2.2%) samples were found
exceeding FSSAI MRL(Maximum residue Limit)
Source : Suryvey Report – Status of Pesticide Residue in India 2017-18
Ajmer et al., 2017 review various aspects of pesticide residues including accumulation of pesticide
residues in food grains and various hazards to human health. Many of these chemical pesticide
residues, especially derivatives of chlorinated pesticides, exhibit bioaccumulation which could
build up to harmful levels in the body as well as in the environment[10]. Persistent chemicals can
be magnified through the food chain and have been detected in products ranging from meat,
poultry, and fish, to vegetable oils, nuts, and various fruits and vegetables[11]. A study on the
levels of pesticides in soft drinks available in the market indicated pesticide residues 24 times
higher than Bureau of Indian Standards (BIS) norms. The levels of pesticide residue lindane
exceeded the BIS standards by 140 times in some samples. Heptachlor, which banned in India,
was found in 71 per cent of the samples, at levels four times higher than BIS standards.
Chlorpyrifos was found 200 times more than the BIS standard in a sample manufactured in Thane.
The average amount of pesticide residues found in all the samples was 24 times higher than the
BIS standards for total pesticides in soft drinks (Source: The Hindu). Organochlorine pesticides,
mainly isomers of hexachlorohexane, dichloro-diphenyl-trichloroethane, endosulphan, endrin,
Impact on environment:
The pesticides spread into the environment has detrimental effect on human health through the
contamination of soil, air and water resources and poses significant risks to the environment and
non-target organisms, such as beneficial species of insects, soil, micro-organisms, plants and bird
.Pesticides have contaminated almost every part of our environment and pesticide residues are
found in soil, air and in surface and groundwater.
Surface and ground water contamination
Pesticides can reach surface water through runoff from treated plants and soil. A number of
researchers have reported pesticides and heavy metals in drinking and groundwater in different
parts of India.
Gagandeep et al , 2017, conducted studies for investigating the heavy metals and pesticides
concentration in Agricultural soil and ground water of Mansa district of Punjab, India .
The study revealed high level of Ni, Hg, Se, Cd in soil. High levels of Sr were observed in both
soil and groundwater samples . Altogether, the results depict the poor quality of soil and
groundwater in the area. These chemical inputs will definitely be having detrimental effects on
human health as the incidence of cancer, asthma, kidney, skin, digestive tract diseases, heart
ailments, male infertility, female reproductive disorders are increasing in Punjab.
Effect on beneficial soil microorganisms
Sanjay et al carried out a series of field experiments at farmer’s field at Sitapur, Paddy growing
belt in UP, with different modules of integrated pest management (IPM) including use of safe
pesticide formulations. The impact of application of pesticides on the soil properties including
soil microbial populations, microbial biomass carbon and enzymatic activity was assessed.
Soil samples were collected from the rhizosphere of paddy from 20 locations in Sitapur district
(UP) where the farmers use different types of pesticides in crops. Part of soil samples were use for
microbial and biochemical analysis and the other part was use for physicochemical and nutrient
analysis. Soil samples were analysed for pH, EC, OC, av. N, total N, carbonate, bicarbonate,
chloride, exchangeable ions like Ca, Mg, Na and K .Pesticides, viz. chlorpyriphos, 2,4-D,
carbendazim and carbofuron were use in study
In the laboratory incubation experiment, it was observed that soils applied with 2,4-D showed
drastic reduction in dehydrogenase activity compared to control. It was observed that there was
reduction of dehydrogenase activity in soil by 42.97%, 58.24%, 28.68% and 43.96% when applied
with chlorpyriphos, 2,4-D, carbofuron and carbendazim respectively, compared to control soil. It
was observed that soils applied with 2,4-D showed reduction in soil organic C content as well as
total C content compared to control. There was reduction in soil organic C content from 4.4 g kg–
1 in control to 4.2 g kg–1 in soils applied with chlorpyriphos or carbofuron, while the reduction
Overview of pesticide industry revealed that capacity and production during the period 2010-11 to
-2017-18 remain at increasing trend except for the period 2017-18. Although installed capacity
increase at CAGR 3.8% , Production increase at the CAGR 5.74%. Export quantity increase at the
CAGR 14.7% vs. 4.4% import quantity.
Pesticide use in the southern states has been declining at CAGR -3.09 . Whereas in the northern
states it has been inclined at CAGR 0.61% . Among the states increasing trend of pesticide
consumption was notices in Tripura, Maharastra, Punjab, Orissa, UP, Chhattisgarh, Haryana.
Declining trend was observed in Andhra Pradesh, Rajastan, Tamil nadu, , West Bengal. No trend
observed in Uttarakhand. Highest consumption of pesticide was observed in Maharastra 15568MT
with CAGR 8.15% , followed by Uttar Pradesh 10595MT with CAGR 2.85% for 2017-18 and For
the country consumption of pesticide showed inclined trend at CAGR 0.87% . This increasing
trend of pesticide consumption therefore aggravate the socio-economic and environmental and
human health problems.
Analysis of literature pertaining to awareness of farmers towards usage of pesticide revealed that
majority farmers adopt crop protection measures on advise by Pesticide dealers . No farmer
followed CIBRC(Central Insecticide Board Registration Committee) guidelines for pest
management. The recommended dose, time and frequency & number of application of the
pesticides are generally overlooked by the farmers. Farmers follow the pesticide application on
regular basis throughout the crop season without considering the presence of pest or disease
symptoms. Farmers continue the application even during harvesting. The increase number of
pesticide sprays made agriculture less profitable and resulted in development of resistance. Not
much attention is given to the requisite safety measures to be adopted and the recommended mode
of application for different kinds of commonly used pesticides. Although farmers store the
pesticide bottles at safe places, after use of the same, they reuse or sell the empty bottles or left in
the field. Disposal of empty bottles was not a safety concern for them . Lack of awareness , low
education regarding the undesirable health and environmental effects was observed to influence
the approach of the farmers towards adopting requisite protective measures .It was further
observed ,Farmers had limited knowledge of pest management as well as consequences of
pesticides. Farmer’s education levels plays an important role as it widens the vision of the farmers
and exposes them to various aspects and opportunities related to agriculture particularly to promote
pesticide and environmental stewardship. low education level may have led to farmers’
Increasing trend of pesticide consumption leads to biggest issue of environmental and human
health problems. Lack of education and awareness among farmers towards pesticides , results into
problems like overuse ,misuse of pesticide with unsafe handling. This has resulted into short term
and long terms Impact on respiratory system, nervous system, reproductive system of humans.
Also pose serious threats to environment and non target organism.
Hence biggest challenge is to increase awareness among farmers, pesticide applicators and dealers
towards pesticide usage ,about recommended and approved doses by Central insecticide board ,
frequency of application, time of application, safe handling and disposal of pesticide and its
containers, waiting period . Farmers look upon to dealers for their technology requirement and
being the first contact for purchase of their requirements of Agri Inputs. There is need to designed
appropriate education and training programs for pesticide dealers to educate and assist the farmers
in proper and adequate usage. Safety measures should be make affordable for farmers to encourage